A . .. 
 
Gass PC^IO^ 
 Book .^ ^4- 
 
 l^LC 
 
PROGRESSIVE 
 
 ( 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR 
 
 AND EXERCISES, 
 
 ON THE BASIS OF 
 
 LEVIZAC'S FRENCH GRAMMAR: 
 
 AND FUHTHER COMPRISINa, 
 
 ON A FLAN ENTIRELY ORIGINAL^ 
 
 I. A Table of all the Irre^lar and 
 Defective Verbs in the French Lan- 
 guage, conjugated in such Tenses 
 as are liabl^o Irregularities. And, 
 
 II. A Terminational Vocabulary, 
 comprised in Twelve Pages, where- 
 by the Gender of every Noun may be 
 promptly and certainly determined. 
 
 BY A. G. COLLOT, 
 
 PROFESSOR OF THE FRENCH LANGOAOE IN THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD, ENGLAND; 
 
 AUTHOR OF THE " PROGRESSIVE FRENCH SCHOOL SERIES ;" AND LATK 
 
 TEACHER OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE IN PHILADELPHIA. 
 
 PHILADELPHIA: 
 
 S. C. HAYES, 439 MARKET STREET. 
 
 T. ELLWOOD ZELL, PUBLISHER. 
 
 1860. 
 
W^x l^^Jh^M^ ,.,^^ ^^ 
 
 
 a KVITol yXvK£(f.— Aristotu 
 
 i?-. 3 
 
 By 
 
 MAY 86 WW 
 
 Entered according to the act of Congress, in the year 1844, by Jamet 
 Kay, Jun. &. Brother, in the office of the clerk of the District Court of th« 
 United States in and for the Eastern District of Pennsylvania. 
 
PRE'FACE. J 
 
 The Author, in the preparation of this volume, owes 
 much to Levizac's French Grammar, which he has assumed 
 as its basis. The work of M. Levizac is characterized by 
 so many excellencies, that it is much to be regretted that 
 it has faults which materially detract from its usefulness. 
 It is arranged with little regard to order, is extremely diffuse, 
 and contains much matter which is either entirely out of 
 place in a Grammar, or too philosophical for the tender 
 mind of the youthful scholar. Besides which, it has 
 treated the two most important objects of a French 
 Grammar, viz. the Genders of Nouns, and the Verbs, the 
 former superficially and unsatisfactorily, and the latter in 
 a manner perplexing, and even erroneous. 
 
 The Author has endeavoured to give proper arrange- 
 ment to the valuable materials in Levizac's Grammar : he 
 has omitted such portions of it as he deemed irrelevant, 
 or above the comprehension of learners — at the same time 
 that he has retained every thing of practical value ; and 
 has introduced such improvements and corrections as 
 were required by the decisions of the best modern authori- 
 ties. He claims as his own exclusively, the Terminational 
 Vocabulary of Genders ; the Table of the Irregular and 
 Defective Verbs ; and large additions to and improvements 
 in the Exercises, 
 
 The object of the Terminational Vocabulary of 
 Genders is to enable the scholar, by a method certain 
 and rapid, to fix permanently in the memory, the Gen- 
 ders of the French Nouns ; without a good knowledge 
 of which, it is impossible to speak or write the French 
 language with propriety. In the English language there 
 are three genders, — which are called masculine, feminine 
 
vi PREFACE. 
 
 and neuter : under the first are classed all males, under 
 the second all females, and under the third all inanimate 
 things. The French have but two genders : the masculine 
 and the feminine. It is as easy in French as in English 
 to class the males and the females ; but M^hen the pupil 
 comes to inanimate things, a difficulty of great importance 
 meets him. As the French have no neuter gender, they 
 are obliged to make what would be neuter in English 
 either masculine or feminine. A child learning French 
 can see no reason why a chair or a table should be called 
 feminine, or why a hinge or a nail should be termed mas- 
 culine ; and yet they are so. 
 
 Many attempts have been made to furnish a system of 
 rules to determine, either by signijicatian^ or by termina- 
 tion, the genders of inanimate objects in French. But so 
 perplexing and impracticable have they been found, that 
 many eminent writers and teachers (among whom may 
 be mentioned Boyer, the author of the French Dictionary, 
 and the celebrated Cobbett, the author of the French 
 Grammar) have recommended students, as the only me- 
 thod of acquiring an adequate knowledge of the Genders 
 of French Nouns, to go completely through the French 
 dictionary, and copy out all the nouns, affixing the gender 
 to each. An Herculean labour! 
 
 The author coincides in opinion with these eminent 
 men, as to the entire insufficiency of every system of 
 rules hitherto devised for acquiring a knowledge of the 
 Genders ; but he has not deemed it possible that any pupil 
 could spare the time to travel over so immense a volume 
 as the French Dictionary, in pursuit of that knowledge. 
 The author has therefore done it for him. He has pre- 
 pared, from actual examination of the dictionary, an Al- 
 phabetical Vocabulary of all the Masculine and Feminine 
 Terminations in the French language ; and has placed in 
 one Table all the Masculine, and in another all the Femi- 
 nine Terminations, with tlie Exceptions in juxtaposition. 
 The whole is comprised in the short space of twelve 
 pages; and by far the greater portion of the Terminations 
 have none, or at most but two Exceptions. The Student 
 has therefore presented to him, in small compass, a mass 
 
PREFACE. vii 
 
 of knowledge which is entirely within the reach of a mind 
 of the most ordinary ability ; and he will be inexcusable, 
 should he fail to avail himself of it. 
 
 The Table of Irregular and Defective Verbs is 
 comprised in two Sub-Tables. The first contains a mo- 
 del of every variety of Irregular or Defective verb, con- 
 jugated in all the tenses which are liable to irregularities, 
 and so arranged that the eye takes in each Verb at a 
 glance. The second comprises all the remaining Irre- 
 gular and Defective Verbs in the French language, with 
 the name of the model verb of each, and the page at which 
 that model will be found in the preceding sub-table. 
 
 M. Levizac has divided the verbs of the second conju- 
 gation into four, and those of the fourth conjugation into 
 five branches, and, considering them all as regular, has 
 given a model verb for each — whereby the one conju- 
 gation has four, and the other five model verbs. Tliis ar- 
 rangement has been found most perplexing to the young 
 student; and even to grown persons of sound judgment. 
 The Author's plan has been to give only on« verb as 
 a model, in each of these conjugations ; and he has con- 
 sidered as irregular all those verbs which do not conform 
 to the model, and has accordingly placed them in the 
 table of Irregular and Defective Verbs. The Author be- 
 lieves that those engaged in tuition will best understand 
 the value of this arrangement ; and he flatters himself that 
 the simplicity, perspicuity and conciseness of his table of 
 the Irregular and Defective Verbs will not pass unnoticed. 
 
 The Author avails himself of the opportunity here af- 
 forded him of urging on teachers to accustom their pupils 
 to conjugate the verbs from the primitive tenses. These 
 are but five in number; and as every other tense of the 
 verb is derived from one of these, it is evident that ^ce 
 words will lead to the conjugation of the whole verb. 
 This method, which is stricdy inductive, will enable the 
 pupil, from infallible premises, to guide himself througli 
 the intricacies of the French verb, a thorough knowledge 
 of M^hich, in the language of a popular writer, is one-third 
 of the acquisition of the language 
 
viii PREFACE. 
 
 The Exercises have been made very copious; and ex 
 emplify, in a progressive order of difficulty, all the nicetier 
 of the French language. In many instances in these Ex- 
 ercises, the English and French might have been made u 
 conform more literally to each other; but it was deemec 
 of importance to preserve the peculiarities of each lan- 
 guage, so that the scholar, by comparing them, mighi 
 acquire a practical familiarity with French idiomatic ex- 
 pressions, and also learn how to express those of his own 
 language in correct French.* Throughout the Exercises 
 in the First Part, the genders of new nouns have been 
 marked ; but in those of the Second Part, which treats of 
 Syntax, the pupil is expected to ascertain the Genders by 
 the Terminational Vocabulary already spoken of. 
 
 Great pains have been taken to render this Grammar 
 iucid in its typographical arrangements. In the table of 
 the Irregular and Defective Verbs, the advantages which 
 have been derived from attention to this particular will be 
 apparent at a glance. The conjugations of the regular 
 verbs have been printed in a compact manner, in order 
 that the learner might embrace each at one view. The 
 simple tenses have been placed in the left, and their re- 
 spective compound tenses in the right column, immedi- 
 ately opposite to them ; and each person of a tense occupies 
 but one line of a column. While, in other editions of 
 Levizac, the affirmative form of the verb avoir occupies 
 seven pages ; the four forms of the same verb are given in 
 this Grammar in four pages and a half. In the exercises, 
 the lines are placed at proper distances apart; the words 
 are separated from each other by a greater space than or- 
 dinary ; and each English word or phrase is placed precisely 
 above its corresponding French. All the Rules in the 
 Grammar have been numbered ; and advantage has been 
 
 * In the Author's " Progressive Ixterlixear Frexch 
 Reader,'"' which is to be studied simultaneously with this Gram- 
 mar, the Pupil is made familiar not only with the meaning of each 
 idiomatic expression that occurs, but also of each word of which it 
 consists, and thus obtains information which will afford him much aa- 
 tistance in his preparation of these exercises. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 taken of this facility of reference, in the Exercises in the 
 Second Part, to require the pupil to make his own appli- 
 cation of each Rule, instead of applying it for him. 
 
 Such explanations and instructions as are necessary for 
 the use of the Grammar, have been given in Notes at the 
 places where they are required. 
 
 For the use of Teachers, Parents, and those who may 
 be studying French without Instructor, the author has 
 prepared a Key to the Exercises in this Grammar, 
 which may be obtained from the Publishers of the Gram- 
 mar, or other Booksellers. 
 
 This Grammar and the Key terminate the Author's Se- 
 ries of Elementary French School Books. The whole, in 
 Six Volumes, furnish a complete course of study of the 
 French, both as a written and spoken language; and are 
 believed to point out the means, by the shortest routes, 
 whereby the Student may attain the object he has in view 
 — the speedy and thorough acquisition of the elegant and 
 useful accomplishments of speaking, reading and writing 
 the French language. For an account of them, the reader 
 is referred to the advertisement in front of this Grammar. 
 
 This work has now assumed its permanent form; and 
 will not henceforth be subjected to alterations of any de- 
 scription. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 INTRODUCTION : being a Brief Explanation of the Parts 
 
 of Speech 15 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 FRENCH ALPHABET, with the Old and New Pronun- 
 
 ciation 24 
 
 FRENCH SOUNDS , 25 
 
 The Vowel Sounds 25 
 
 The Diphthongs 26 
 
 The Consonants 26 
 
 ACCENTUATION AND PUNCTUATION 29 
 
 GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS 30 
 
 GEJfBEBS BT SlGKIFICATlOU" 30 
 
 Masculine by Signification 31 
 
 Feminine by Signification 31 
 
 Genders by Termixatiojt 31 
 
 Terminational Vocabulary 82 
 
 Table of Masculine Terminations 32 
 
 Table of Feminine Terminations 40 
 
 List of all the Nouns which are Masculinb in one 
 
 Signification and Feminine in another 45 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE EXERCISES 47 
 
 Of the Article 47 
 
 Of the Article, and the Prepositions a and de 48 
 
 Of a and de, and the Demonstrative Adjective 49 
 
 Of Elision 50 
 
 Of the Words which are spelled alike in both Languages, 
 
 or which differ only in their Terminations 51 
 
 (x) 
 
PART I. 
 THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 OF THE SUBSTANTIVE, OR NOUN 53 
 
 CHAPTER n. 
 
 OF THE ARTICLE 55 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE 57 
 
 Of the qualificative Adjective 58 
 
 Of the Formation of the Feminine 61 
 
 List of Adjectives with Irregular Feminines 63 
 
 Of the Formation of the Plural 65 
 
 Of the Determinative Adjective • • • • 66 
 
 Agreement of the Adjective writh the Substantive 69 
 
 Numbers: Cardinal, Ordinal, Collective, Adverbial, Distribu- 
 tive and Proportional 70 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 OF THE PRONOUN 72 
 
 Section I. — Of the Personal Pronouns 72 
 
 Section II. — Of the Possessive Pronouns 75 
 
 Section III. — Of the Relative Pronouns 76 
 
 Section IV. — -Of the Absolute Pronouns 78 
 
 Section V. — Of the Demonstrative Pronouns 79 
 
 Section VI. — Of the Indefinite Pronouns 81 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 OF THE VERB 82 
 
 Of Conjugations 83 
 
 Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb Avoir 84 
 
 1. Affirmative Form 84 
 
 2. Negative Form 85 
 
 3. Interrogative Form 87 
 
 4. Negative-and-Interrogative Form 88 
 
 xi 
 
xii CONTENTS. 
 
 Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb Etre 90 
 
 First Conjugation — in ER 93 
 
 Observations on Verbs of the First Conjugation 95 
 
 Second Conjugation — in IR 97 
 
 Observations on Verbs of the Second Conjugation 98 
 
 Third Conjugation— in OIR 100 
 
 Remarks on the Tiiird Conjugation , 101 
 
 Fourth Conjugation— in i2£ 102 
 
 Of the Neuter Verbs 105 
 
 Of the Phoxominal Verbs , 1 06 
 
 Conjugation of the Pronominal Verb Se Lever 107 
 
 1. Affirmative Form 107 
 
 2. Negative Form 109 
 
 3. Interrogative Form 109 
 
 4. Negative-and-Interrogative Form 109 
 
 Of the Passive Verbs Ill 
 
 Of the Impeb 805^ al Verbs Ill 
 
 Conjugation of the Impersonal Verb Neiger 112 
 
 Conjugation of the Impersonal Verb Y Avoir 113 
 
 Of the Formation of Texses 115 
 
 Table of the Termination of the Simple Tenses of the Four 
 
 Conjugations 116 
 
 Of the iRREGriiR AXD Defective Verbs 117 
 
 Table of the Irregular and Defective Verbs — arranged ac- 
 cording to their respective Conjugations 121 
 
 List of all the Irregular and Defective Verbs in the French 
 Language not contained in the foregoing Table — ar- 
 ranged according to their respective Conjugations. ... 133 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 OP THE PARTICIPLE 149 
 
 Of the Participle Present 149 
 
 Of the Participle Past 151 
 
 Of the Participle Past accompanied by the veib Etre 152 
 
CONTENTS. xiii 
 
 Of the Participle Past accompanied by the verb Avoir, 
 and followed or preceded by its Object Direct, or Indirect. 153 
 
 Of the Participle Past of Impersonal Verbs , 154 
 
 Of the Participle Past of Pronominal Verbs 154 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 OF THE ADVERB 155 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 OF THE PREPOSITION 158 
 
 Of Prepositions of the First Class 159 
 
 Of Prepositions of the Second Class 160 
 
 Of Prepositions of the Third Class 160 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 OF THE CONJUNCTION 161 
 
 Of Conjunctions of the First Class 161 
 
 Of Conjunctions of the Second Class 1*62 
 
 Of Conjunctions of the Third Class *iQZ 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 OF THE INTERJECTION 164 
 
 PART IT. 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 OF THE SUBSTANTIVE 165 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 OF THE ARTICLE 167 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE 170 
 
 Of the Qualificative Adjective 1 70 
 
 Of the Determinative Adjective.. 173 
 
 ;CHAPTER IV. 
 
 OF THE PRONOUN 175 
 
 Section I. — Of the Personal Pronouns 175 
 
 Section II. — Of the Possessive Pronouns 180 
 
XIV CONTENTS. 
 
 Section III. — Of the Kelative Pronouns 1 
 
 Section IV . — Of the Absolute Pronouns 1 
 
 Section V. — Of the Demonstrative Pronouns • . . . . 1 
 
 Section VI. — Of the Indefinite Pronouns 1 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 OF THE VERB lo» 
 
 Agreement of the Verb with the Subject 188 
 
 Regimen of Verbs 190 
 
 Use of Moods and Tenses 193 
 
 Of the Indicative and its Tenses 193 
 
 Of the Conditional, and its Tenses 195 
 
 Of the Imperative 195 
 
 Of the Subjunctive, and its Tenses 195 
 
 Of the Infinitive 197 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 OF CHE PARTICIPLE 201 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 OF THE ADVERB ^. 203 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 OF THE PREPOSITION. 205 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 OF THE CONJUNCTION Que 205 
 
 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 
 
 Ths Death of Adsastxts Fenelon 206 
 
 The QuESTioif s left bt Mihos Fenehn 210 
 
 Th« Tbaitskigratioks of Isdub Barbauld 2 W 
 
INTRODUCTION; 
 
 A BRIEF EXPLANATION OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 Words are articulate sounds, which we make use of to 
 express our ideas. There are, in French, ten kinds of 
 words : namely, the Substantive or Noun, the Article, the 
 Adjective, the Pronoun, the Verb, the Participle, the Adverb, 
 the Preposition, the Conjunction, and the Interjection. 
 
 Words, considered as sounds, are formed by Letters and 
 
 Syllables. 
 
 Letters are divided into Vowels and Consonants. The 
 Vowels are ; a, e, i, o, w, y : the Consonants are ; 5, c, df 
 /? g^ h^ ji k, ?, ni, n, p. q^ r, s, t, u, a;, z. 
 
 A Vowel is an articulate sound, that can be perfectly ut- 
 tered without the help of any other sound. 
 
 A Consonant is an articulate sound, which cannot be 
 perfectly uttered without the help of a Vowel. 
 
 A Syllable is a sound, either simple or compound, pro- 
 nounced by a single impulse of the voice, and constituting 
 a Word, or part of a Word : as, an, year ; ww, one ; a-mi 
 friend. 
 
 A Diphthong is a coalition of two sounds, which are 
 uttered by a single impulse of the voice : as, bien^ well ; 
 owi, yes, 
 
 (15) 
 
16 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 A word of One Syllable is termed a Monosyllable ; a 
 word of Two Syllables, a Dissyllable ; a word of Three 
 Syllables, a Trisyllable ; and a word of Four or more Syl- 
 lables, a Polysyllable. 
 • 
 
 A Sentence is an assemblage of Words, forming com- 
 plete sense : as, Dieu est juste, God is just. 
 
 Sentences are of two kinds : Simple, and Compound. 
 
 A Simple Sentence has in it but one subject, one verb, 
 and one object or attribute : as, la vie est courte, life is 
 short. 
 
 A Compound Sentence consists of two or more simple 
 sentences connected together : as, Dieu recompensera les 
 bons, et punira les mediants; God will reward the good, 
 and punish the wicked. 
 
 The subject (nominative) is the thing or person chiefly 
 spoken of; the verb expresses the action, affirmed or de- 
 nied of it ; and the object (accusative) is the thing or per- 
 son affected by such action. Thus, in the following sen- 
 tence, Dieu punit les mechants^ God punishes the w icked 
 — God is the subject; the action that proceeds from God is 
 affirmed by the verb punishes; and the object upon which 
 it falls is the wicked. 
 
 The Substantive, or Noun. The Substantive is a 
 word which represents a person or a thing that exists in 
 nature; a&, Aomme, man ; arire, tree; Zirre, book; or which 
 has its existence in the mind ; as, vertu, virtue ; esperancey 
 hope; courage, courage. 
 
 • 
 There are two kinds of Substantives : the Substantive 
 Proper, or proper name ; and the Substantive Common. 
 
 The proper name is that which is applied to a particular 
 person or thing : as, Annihal, Paris. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 17 
 
 The Substantive Common is that which belongs to a 
 whole class of objects : as, arhre^ t-ee. 
 
 Number. There are two Numbers : the Singular, and 
 the Plural. 
 
 The Singular expresses but one object: as, une chaise^ 
 a chair; une iable^ a table. 
 
 The Plural signifies more objects than one : as, des 
 
 chaises,) chairs ; des tables^ tables. 
 
 Gender. There are only two Genders: the Masculine, 
 and the Feminine. 
 
 The Masculine belongs to the male kind : asj un honime^ 
 a man ; un lion^ a lion. 
 
 The Feminine belongs to the female kind : as, une femme^ 
 a woman ; une lionne^ a lioness. 
 
 This distinction has, through imitation, been extended 
 to all substantives : thus, un livre^ a book, is masculine ; 
 une chaise, a chair, is feminine. 
 
 Cases. Cases express the different relations of one 
 thing to another. 
 
 To express these different relations, the Greeks and Ro- 
 mans made use of different terminations of the substantive; 
 such as, ordo, the order, Pordre; ordinis, of the order, de 
 Pordre; ordini, to the order, a Pordre, &c. The termi- 
 nations thus varied are called cases; and all the nouns, 
 which, in the variations of their cases, have the same end 
 ing, are called of the same declension. 
 
 The French, English, Italian, and other modern lan- 
 guages, do not admit of any variation in the terminations 
 of their nouns ; and, consequently, the nouns of these lan- 
 guages, having but one termination in the singular, and 
 
 A* 2 
 
18 CULLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 another in the plural, are supplied with prepositions pre- 
 fixed : as, pierre, stone ; de pierre, of stone ; a la pierre 
 to the stone ; en pierre, in stone ; avec la pierre, with tho 
 stone. 
 
 The Article. The Article is a word prefixed to sub- 
 stantives, to determine the extent of their signification : as, 
 le soleil luit, the sun shines. 
 
 The French article is Ze, for the masculine singular; la, 
 for the feminine singular ; and les, for the plural of both 
 genders. 
 
 The article is subject to Elision and Contmction. 
 
 The Elision of the article, is the omitting of the e in le, 
 and the a in la, wlien they precede a noun beginning with 
 a vowel, or h mute : as, V argent, the money; /' liistoire, 
 the history. 
 
 Contraction is the compression of two words into one. 
 It takes place when the preposition a, or de^ precedes the 
 article, in the following cases : instead of putting de le be- 
 fore a masculine singular, beginning with a consonant, or 
 h aspirated, du must be employed ; instead of a le, au must 
 be used ; and before the plural of both genders, de les is 
 changed into des, and a les into aux: as, du roi, of the 
 kmg; an roi, to the king; des rois, of the kings; aux rois, 
 to the kings. 
 
 The Adjective. The Adjective is a word which ex- 
 presses the quality of the substantive : as, bon p'ere, good 
 father ; bonne mere, good mother. 
 
 In French, the adjective takes the gender and number of 
 the substantive to which it relates. 
 
 The Pronoux. A Pronoun is a word used instead of 
 a noun, to avoid the too frequent repetition of tlie noun : 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 19 
 
 as, Pierre est sorti^ il reviendra hicntot; Peter is out, he 
 will soon return. 
 
 There are several kinds of pronouns : as, the Personal, 
 Possessive, Relative, Absolute, Demonstrative, and Inde- 
 finite. 
 
 The Verb. The Verb expresses the action, or the state 
 of the subject : as, D'leu punira les mediants^ God will 
 punish the wicked ; ma sceur repose, my sister reposes. 
 
 • There are five kinds of Verbs : the Active, Passive, Neu- 
 ter, Pronominal, and Impersonal. 
 
 The Verb Active expresses an action performed by the 
 subject, and has a regimen direct : as, f aime mon pere^ J 
 love my father. 
 
 The Verb Passive expresses an action received by the 
 subject : as, mon pere est aime de moi^ my father is loved 
 by me. 
 
 The Verb Neuter expresses also an action, but has no 
 direct regimen : as, je vais en Italie^ I am going to Italy. 
 
 The Pronominal Verb is that which is conjugated 
 through all the tenses with two personal pronouns : as, je 
 mejlatte^ I flatter myself 
 
 The Impersonal Verb is used only in the third person 
 singular : as, /'/ pleut, it rains. 
 
 The Verb has Numbers, Persons, Tenses, and Moods. 
 
 There are two Numbers in Verbs; the Singular, and 
 Plural : as, je chanie^ 1 sing ; nous chanions, we sing. 
 
 There are three persons in each number. The first is 
 the person who speaks : as, je pense, I think ; nous pen- 
 sons^ we think 
 
20 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 The second is the person spoken to : as, tu penses, thou 
 ihinkest ; vous pensez^ you think. 
 
 The third is the person spoken of: as, il or elle pense, 
 he or she thinks ; Us or elles pensent^ they think. 
 
 Tense is the distinction of time, and admits only of 
 Three Parts : tlie Present, Past, and Future. 
 
 The Past, and Future, being composed of many diffe- 
 rent instants, admit of various degrees of anteriority ana 
 posteriority. The Present admits of no division. 
 
 The Present represents an action or event as passing at 
 the time in which it is mentioned: as, je vois^ J see; il 
 vienty he comes. 
 
 The Present Tense likewise expresses a character or 
 quality at present existing : as, c' est un habile homme, he 
 is an able man ; c' est une femme aimahle^ she is an amia- 
 ble woman. 
 
 In animated historical narrations, this tense is some- 
 times substituted for the preterit : as, il envahit le ierri- 
 toire des paisiOles habitants, fait un immense butin, qu^ il 
 partage entre ses soldats, &c. ; he invades the territory of 
 the peaceable inhabitants, takes immense booty, which he 
 divides amongst his soldiers, &c. 
 
 There are Five Tenses to express the Past: the Imper- 
 fect, Preterit-definite, Preterit-indefinite, Preterit-anterior, 
 and Pluperfect. 
 
 The Imperfect expresses a present, with respect to 
 something past: as, f entrais au moment oil vous sortiez, 
 I came in at the moment you were going out. Or, it ex- 
 presses something past, without fixing the time of its dura- 
 uon : a.s, CSsar ctait un habile general, Csesar was an able 
 general. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 21 
 
 The Preterit-definite marks that a thing took place at a 
 time completely past: as, f ecrlvis hier a Rome, I wrote 
 yesterday to Rome. 
 
 The Preterit-indefinite expresses an action as having 
 taken place at a time which is neither precise nor determi- 
 nate: as, il w? a fait un vrai plaisir en venant me voir, he 
 has given me real pleasure hy coming to see me. Or, at 
 a time which is not absolutely past : as, f ai ecrit au- 
 jourd^hui, I have written to-day. 
 
 The Preterit-anterior expresses an action as having taken 
 place just before another, at a time which is past: as, quand 
 f eus lu, je partis; when 1 had read, 1 set out. 
 
 The Pluperfect expresses one action as having taken 
 place at any period antecedent to another action equally 
 past : as, J' avais Jini quand vons vintes, I had finished 
 when you came. 
 
 The Future has two tenses : the FuturC'absolute, and 
 Future-anterior. 
 
 The Future-absolute expresses that an action will take 
 place at a time which does not yet exist: as, f irai demain 
 a la campagne, I shall go to-morrow to the country. 
 
 The Future-anterior expresses an action that will take 
 place at a time anterior to another action : as, quand f au- 
 raijini^je sortirai; when 1 shall have done, I will go out. 
 Or, to a time to come : as, f aurai jini demain, I shall 
 have done to-morrow. 
 
 Mood consists in the change which the verb undergoes, 
 to signify various intentions of the mind. 
 
 There are five Moods : the Indicative, Conditional, Im- 
 perative, Subjunctive, and Infinitive 
 
 The Indicative mark^ the affirmation in a positive and 
 
22 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 absolute manner: as, p ajpjprends^ I am learning-; je voya- 
 ger ai^ I will travel. As it comprehends the three divisions 
 of time, its tenses, which are eight in number, have been 
 above explained. 
 
 The Conditional is the mood which affirms on condi- 
 tions : as, je le ferais, si je pouvais; 1 would do iu if I 
 could. 
 
 The Imperative mood is used for commanding, exhort- 
 ing, entreating, or reproving: as, sortez, get out; restons, 
 let us stay. 
 
 The Subjunctive mood expresses a subordination to 
 what precedes : as,^e voudrais qv? il liit, I wish he would 
 read. 
 
 The Infinitive mood expresses a thing in a general and 
 unlimited manner, without any distinction of number or 
 person : as, agir^ to act ; etre crainl^ to be feared. 
 
 The Participle. The Participle is a part of the verb, 
 which partakes of the properties both of a verb and of an 
 adjective: of a verb, as it has its signification and regimen; 
 of an adjective, as it expresses the quality of a person or 
 thing. 
 
 There are two participles : the Present, and the Past. 
 
 The participle Present always terminates in ant: as, 
 Jinissant, finishing ; recevant, receiving. 
 
 The participle Past has various terminations : as, fru, 
 finished ; re^u, received, &c. 
 
 The Adverb. The Adverb is a word which qualifies 
 a verb, an adjective, or another adverb : as, il park bien, 
 he speaks well; il est tres eloquent^ he is very eloquent; 
 il parle tres bien, he speaks very well. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 23 
 
 The Pre position. Prepositions serve to connect 
 words with one another, and to show the relation between 
 them : as, il alia de Paris a Versailles^ he went fro7?i Pa- 
 ris to Versailles. 
 
 The Conjunction. The Conjunction is a word which 
 serves to connect words or sentences : as, Pierre et Jeaii 
 rient^ Peter and John laugh ; parlez peu et pensez bien, 
 speak little and think well. 
 
 The Interjection. Interjections are words which 
 serve to express the sudden emotions of the soul : as, He* 
 las! alas! ^h! ah! Fi done! for shame! 
 
94 
 
 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 1. Grammar, in general, is the art of speaking and 
 writing correctly. To speak, is to convey our thoughts 
 by means of articulate sounds. To write, is to render 
 those thoughts pennanently visible by means of certain 
 signs, or characters, called Letters ; and their number, 
 disposed in order, constitutes what is called the Alphabet. 
 
 2. The letters of the French Alphabet are twenty-five, 
 as in the first and second columns in the Table below : by 
 the old pronunciation, they are named as in the third, arfd 
 by the new pronunciation, as in the fourth column. 
 
 FRENCH ALPHABET, 
 
 o. p. Jv. p. 
 
 A . . a ah .... ah 
 
 B..b bay... .be* 
 
 C . . c say . . . .ke 
 
 D. .d day. . .de 
 
 E. .e a a 
 
 F..f eff. ...fe 
 
 G..g jay. ..ghe 
 
 H. .h ahsh. .he 
 
 I. . .1 e e 
 
 J-j .jee....je 
 
 K..k kah...ke 
 
 L...1 ell....le 
 
 M . . m emm . . me 
 
 O.p. JV. i». 
 
 N. .n enn. . .ne 
 
 O. .0 o o 
 
 P . . . p pay . . . pe 
 
 Q. .q ku ke 
 
 R. .r .air. . . .re 
 
 S.. .s ess ... .se 
 
 T..t lay te 
 
 U. .u u u-j- 
 
 V . . V vav ve 
 
 X. .X eeks kse 
 
 Y. .y e-e:rcc.e-grec 
 
 Z. .z zed. . . .ze 
 
 * In the new pronunciation, the letter e, after each consonant, is 
 sounded Uke u in the English word sun. 
 
 f There is no approximate sound of this ktter in English. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 25 
 
 FRENCH SOUNDS. 
 
 3. The Simple, or Vowel Sounds, in the French lan- 
 guage, are nineteen in number, as follows : 
 
 French. 
 
 a sounds like 
 
 e 
 
 i 
 o 
 6 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 eu 
 ou 
 ou 
 an 
 in 
 on 
 un 
 
 English. 
 in bat. 
 . . boj'. 
 
 . . sun. 
 
 THE VOWEL SOUNDS. 
 
 French. 
 
 It is exemplified by Jacc. 
 
 ^ge- 
 
 C se, 
 
 'Ijeune. 
 
 . , etait. 
 
 pert. 
 
 .., me. 
 
 , . . . . pique. 
 
 giie. 
 
 robe. 
 
 cote. 
 
 c?u. 
 
 , mur. 
 
 Jeune. 
 
 sounds like oo in good. sous. 
 
 00 . . mood. vouie, 
 
 has no standard in English sang*. 
 
 f'^' 
 
 son. 
 
 un. 
 
 met. 
 p'dir, 
 there. 
 
 Pg- 
 
 field, 
 
 rob. 
 
 robe. 
 
 has no standard in English. 
 
 We see, from the above table, that seven sounds have 
 no standard in the English language. 
 
 The u can be obtained in the following manner. Ar- 
 ticulate first the sound ee, as in eel ; then, close your lips 
 a little, and articulate the sound of u. 
 
 The sound ii is the same in quality, but longer. 
 
 The sound eii is nearly the same in quality as that of u 
 in the English word sun, but longer and closer. 
 
 An approximate to an may be found in the Englisn 
 word antique ; to in in length •, to on in long ; and to un 
 in rung. These are termed the nasal sounds 
 
26 
 
 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 \i/) Y. This letter, when alone, or when preceded or 
 followed by a consonant, is pronounced as simple i ; 
 except in pays^ paysan^ po.ysage, which are pronounced 
 pe-is^ pe-isan, pe-isoge. Between two vowels, it is pro- 
 nounced it : as, balayer, to sweep ; nettoyer^ to clean ; 
 which are pronounced, as if spelled with ii, halaiier^ 
 neiloiier. See the " Pronouncing French Reader," Rule 12, 
 p. 280. 
 
 5. The Diphthongs, in the French language, are 
 twenty-six in number. They are as follows : 
 
 THE DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 16 ii^; 
 
 la. ...exemplified in verbiage. 
 
 i6 assied. 
 
 omiere. 
 
 iai liaison. 
 
 oi gloire. 
 
 oi moine. 
 
 . C oi decloUre. 
 
 ^ "l ouai jouaient. 
 
 oue enjoue. 
 
 . c oin besoin. 
 
 °*'^^ouin tintouin. 
 
 io Etkiopien. 
 
 ien bien. 
 
 C ian insouciante. 
 
 ^^'^ ^ ien patience. 
 
 iau materiaxxx. 
 
 ieu. . ..exemplified in, . . .milievi. 
 
 ieu . ,, . curieux. 
 
 ion intention. 
 
 iou cachioxxra. 
 
 iu reliure. 
 
 ouan lonanges. 
 
 oua louable. 
 
 oui rejome. 
 
 ua nuage. 
 
 ue extenue. 
 
 u6 continnel. 
 
 uej 
 
 uai suaj;. 
 
 uan remwanf. 
 
 ui ttu/rui. 
 
 uin .join. 
 
 6. THE CONSONANTS. 
 
 B. This letter has the same sound as in English : as, 
 hal, ball. It is always pronounced in the middle of 
 words ; as, abdiquer : and at the end of proper names ; 
 as. Job, Caleb, Moab : also in the words radoub, rumb , 
 but not in plomb. 
 
 C. Has the sound of k, before a, o, m, /, w, r, except 
 when it has a cedilla, in which case it sounds like s ; as, 
 rf(^u. It sounds like s before e, i and y. Ch has always 
 the sound of sh, except when it is followed by a conso- 
 nant, in which case it sounds like k. as, ichneumon. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 27 
 
 D. Has the same sound as in English. It is always 
 sounded in the middle of words : as, adverbe. It is 
 likewise heard at the end of proper names : as, Uavid, 
 Alfred, &c. 
 
 At the end of many words it sounds like /, when the 
 following word begins with a vowel, or h mute : as, 
 grand homme^ which is pronounced grantome. 
 
 F. \s sounded like the same letter in English : as, 
 fleur^ flower. It is sounded in all words ending in if. 
 
 (G?) Has tha hard sound of g in the English word go, 
 belbfe a, 0, u ; as, gomme, gum: and the )soft sound of s 
 in pleasure, before e, i, y ; as, genie, genius. Gn, at the 
 beginning of words, has always the hard sound of the same 
 letters in the English wwd ignorant : as in gnomon. h\ 
 the middle of words, gn has a liquid sound, nearly similar 
 to that of ni in the English word onion. 
 
 H. Is sounded with a guttural impulse, when aspi- 
 rated ; as heros, hero : and when it is mute, has no use 
 but that of showing the etymology of the word; as, 
 honneur, honour. 
 
 J. Has always the sound of s in pleasure : as, jon- 
 glerie, juggling. 
 
 K. Has always a hard^found, as in the English word 
 king : as, kiosgue, kiosk. 
 
 L. Has two sounds. The first is precisely the same 
 as 7 in the English word lily : as, lilas, lilac The second 
 is liquid ; and occurs when Z at the end, or U in the 
 middle, of words is preceded by i. It resembles the sound 
 of the second i in the English word William: thus, 
 pareil, pareiWe. Exception : when i begins a word, as in 
 iUustre, the // is never liquid. See further, Rules 3 and 13, 
 " Pronouncing French Reader." 
 
 M. Has the sound of the same letter in English • as, 
 
28 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 momie, mummy. Um is pronounced omm, in some words 
 adopted from the Latin : as, centumvir, album. 
 
 jy. Has the sound of the English n : as, nonne, nun 
 
 P. Is sounded as in English : as, pourpre, purple. Ph 
 has the sound ofy*: as^ philosophe, philosopher. 
 
 Q. Has the sound of k in king : as, qualite, quality. 
 
 R. Is sounded as in English, but much more strongly : 
 as, riviere, river. It is always sounded at the end of 
 words, after the vowels a, z, o, u. In substantives, adjec- 
 tives and verbs ending in er, it is silent, unless it is fol- 
 lowed by a word begmning with a vowel : as, le dernier 
 ouvrage, the last work ; which is pronounced le dernie- 
 rouvrage. 
 
 S. Has two sounds. The first is hard, as in the 
 English word sister ; as, suspensif, suspensive : the second 
 is soft, as in the English word please : as, raison, reason. 
 It has uniformly the hard sound at the beginning of words • 
 and the soft, between two vowels. Both sounds occur in 
 saison, season. S is mute before ch : as, schall, Schajf- 
 house, &c. It is alw'^s sounded at the end of foreign 
 proper names : as, Brutus^ Protesilas, Sec. In compound 
 words it preserves the hard sound : as, parasol, parasol. 
 
 T. Has two sounds : the first is hard, as in the Eng- 
 lish word tit; the second soft, like c in cedar. Both 
 sounds occur in construction. 
 
 It is soft before i, connected with some other following 
 vowel or vowels ; as, patience, action : except when it is 
 immediately preceded by an s ; as, question. 
 
 V. Has the same sound as in English : as, vivace, vi- 
 vacious. This letter, when doubled, is represented by the 
 character w, which is met with in some foreign words, 
 and is always pronounced as a simple v ; except i^ wist 
 and wiski, when it has the sound of the Engrlish w. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 29 
 
 X Has generally the sound of ks in axe : as, sexe^ 
 sex ; hoxer^ to box. Jn all words beginning with a:, or 
 ex^ followed by a vowel, it has the sound of gz : as, 
 Xavier, exil. At the end of words it sounds like z, when 
 followed by a word beginning with a vowel, or h mute ; 
 as, leaux yeux^ beautiful eyes ; dix hommes, ten men. 
 
 Z. Has generally the sound of z in zone, or s in rose. 
 
 Note. — The French and English words given as examples in the 
 foregoing table of " The Vowel Sounds," are used as standards, in 
 the author's " Proxouxcixg French Reader." The same French 
 words, together with those in the preceding table of "The Diph- 
 thongs," and an example of every other sound of difficult pronuncia- 
 tion in the French language, are introduced into a single short fable 
 in that work ; to which the author begs leave respectfully to refer* as 
 a practical and progressive introduction to French pronunciation, 
 which may be considered complete, in every respect. 
 
 ACCENTUATION AND PUNCTUATION. 
 
 7. In reading, due attention should be paid to the t^c- 
 cents and the Cedilla, to the Apostrophe, Diceresis, 
 Hyphen, &c. 
 
 8. There are three Accents. The acute ( ' ), never 
 placed but on e : as, in bonte. 
 
 9. The grave ( ^ ), placed over a, e, u : as in vo'dd, 
 proces, ou, 
 
 10. The circumflex ["), placed over any long vowel : 
 as in pldire, reve, epitre, apbtre, hiiche. 
 
 11. The Cedilla is a kind of comma, placed under c, 
 giving it the sound of s^ before a, o, u : as in facade, 
 fagon, regu. 
 
30 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH' 
 
 12. The Apostrophe ( ' ) marks the suppression of a 
 vowel before another vowel, or an h mute : as in P oiseau^ 
 V homme, s' il vient ; for le oiseau^ le homme, si il vient 
 
 13. The DicBresis ( *' ) is placed over the vowels e, i, 
 w, to indicate that they are to be pronounced distinctly 
 from the vowels by which they are accompanied. 
 
 14. The Hyphen ( - ) is particularly used in connecting 
 compound words ; as in belles-lettres, chefs-d? ceuvre, arc- 
 en-ciel. 
 
 15. All the other distinctive marks, as the Comma, 
 Semicolon, Colon, Period, Interrogation, Admiration^ 
 Exclamation, Parenthesis, &c., are the same in the French 
 as in the English language. 
 
 GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS. 
 
 It has already been stated (see Introduction, page 17 
 ante), that there are only two genders in French, the mas- 
 culine and feminine. Whatever is neuter in English must 
 therefore belong to either the one or the other of these 
 genders in French. Every attempt hitherto made to give 
 a system of rules for distinguishing the genders of in- 
 animate objects by their signification, has ended only in 
 perplexing and harassing the learner. "They are so 
 numerous," says Boyer, " so intricate, and liable to so 
 many exceptions, that the best and easiest way is to learn 
 ihem in the dictionary." 
 
 16. GENDERS BY SIGNIFICATIOJV. 
 
 The following short general rules, which have few or 
 no exceptions, and are of easy apprehension and applica- 
 tion, will be practically very useful. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 31 
 
 MASCULINE BY SIGNIFICATION. 
 
 1. All the names of the days, months and seasons of 
 the year : except mi, middle, is used before the name of a 
 month, forming with it a compound word, when it makes 
 it feminine : as, la mi-Juin, the middle of June. 
 
 2. All objects to which we fancifully attribute the quali- 
 fies of the male ; as, vainqueur^ conqueror; juge^ judge; 
 genie ^ genius. 
 
 3. The names of all metals, minerals and colours. 
 
 4. The names of all mountains, except those chains 
 which have no singular; the cardinal points; and the 
 winds, except la blse^ la tramontane, La hrise^ and Its 
 moussons. 
 
 5. Words denoting the language of a country : as, le 
 Franqais^ P It alien, 
 
 6. All the words compounded of a verb and a substan- 
 tive, even though the substantive by itself be feminine ; 
 except garde-robe^ wardrobe, which is feminine. 
 
 7. And, when used substantively^ all the ordinal, dis- 
 tributive, and proportional numbers ; also adjectives, in- 
 finitives of verbs, prepositions, adverbs, conjunctions, in- 
 terjections ; and even sentences : except la moitie. 
 
 FEMININE BY SIGNIFICATION. 
 
 1. The names of all the virtues; except courage and 
 merife. 
 
 2. The names of all the vices. 
 
 3. All objects to which we attribute feminine qualities : 
 as, lune^ moon ; terre^ earth, Stc. 
 
 17. GENDERS BY TERMINATION. 
 
 The author, however, wishes the scholar mainly to rely 
 on the Terminational Vocabulary, consisting of the 
 two following Tables of Masculine and Feminine Termi- 
 nations, which he has prepared, at great expense of time 
 and labour, from the dictionary, with the express vjew of 
 
32 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH. 
 
 furnishing a certain and universal method of determining 
 the genders of nouns by their terminations. They should, 
 therefore, be made a subject of attentive study ; and it will 
 be well to commit to memory those endings which have 
 few or no exceptions. 
 
 To give an instance of the mode of using these Tables: 
 let it be required to find the genders of the words vina." 
 gre and place. The scholar will look in the Table of 
 Masculine Terminations, and find -aigre in it; which tells 
 him that vinaigre is masculine. He will next look for 
 -ace in the same table, and not finding it there, will pro- 
 ceed to the Table of Feminine Terminations, where he 
 will find it, and of course thereby determine its gender to 
 be feminine. It is scarcely necessary to say, that all the 
 Exceptions in the Table of Masculine Terminations are 
 feminine ; and all those in the Table of Feminine Termi- 
 nations are masculine. 
 
 TERMINATIONAL VOCABULARY. 
 
 I. Masculine Terminations. 
 
 TERMIITATIOJfS. EXCEPTIONS 
 
 -a sepia, bandora, talpa, falaca, vinula. 
 
 -abe Souabe, svllabe. 
 
 -able fable, table, 6 table. 
 
 -abre cabre. 
 
 -ac None. 
 
 -acle bemacle, debacle, made. 
 
 -acre nacre. 
 
 -act None. 
 
 -acte cataracte, ^pacte. 
 
 -adre escadre. 
 
 -af. None. 
 
 -age rage, image, ambages, saxifrage, passerage, cage, 
 
 nage, plage. 
 
 -agme ,...None. 
 
 -ai None- 
 
 -aigle None. 
 
 -aigre None 
 
 -ail None. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 33 
 
 TABLE OF MASCULINE TERMINATIONS— Coniinwei. 
 TERMINATIONS. EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 -ain main. 
 
 -air chair. 
 
 -aire affaire, aire, glaire, paire, grammaire, chaire, jugu- 
 
 laire, haire, and eleven names of plants. 
 
 -ais None. 
 
 -ait None. 
 
 -aitre None. 
 
 -aix paix. 
 
 -al None. 
 
 -ale None. 
 
 -alrae scalme. 
 
 -alque None. 
 
 -alt None. 
 
 -alte halte. 
 
 -am None. 
 
 -ambe jambe. 
 
 -amble None. 
 
 -anibre chambre, antichambre. 
 
 -amme anagramme, 6pigraniiue, flamme, onflamme. 
 
 -amp None. 
 
 -amphre None. 
 
 -an None. 
 
 -anc .None. 
 
 -ancre ancre. 
 
 -and None. 
 
 -ang None. 
 
 -ange fange, fontange, frange, graage, lavange, losange, 
 
 mesange, orange, paretsange, phalange, veii- 
 
 dange, vidange. "" 
 
 -angle sangle. 
 
 'anie None. 
 
 -ant None. 
 
 -antre None. 
 
 -anvre None. 
 
 -'yo None. 
 
 -ap None. 
 
 •aphe epigraphe, cpitapne, orthographe. 
 
 -aps None. 
 
 'fique attaque, baraque, caque, cardiaque, casac^ue, celia- 
 
 que, claque, laque, maque, patraque, plaque, 
 
 polaque, riqueraque, sandaraque, theriaque. 
 
 -ar None. 
 
 •arbre None. 
 
 -arc None. 
 
 drd None. 
 
 3 
 
34 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 TABLE OF MASCULINE TERMINATIONS- Continued. 
 TEUMIITATIOIfS. EXCEPTIOXS. 
 
 «re cithare, tare, fanfare, tiare. 
 
 <irme alarms, arme, larme. 
 
 •arque anasarque, parqi>e, remarque. 
 
 -arre ' bagarre, barre, carre, simarre. 
 
 -ars I^one. 
 
 -art hart, part, quotepart, plupart. 
 
 -artre cbartre, martre, dartre. 
 
 -as None. 
 
 -asme None. 
 
 -aspe None. 
 
 -asque basque, bourrasque, brasque, frasque. 
 
 -ast None. 
 
 -aste caste, haste. 
 
 -astre None. 
 
 -at None. 
 
 -atre finatre. 
 
 -au eau, peau. 
 
 -aud None. 
 
 -aume paume. 
 
 -aut None. 
 
 -aux chaux. 
 
 -ave. cave, bave, betterave, entraves, epaves, octave, rave, 
 
 cassave, etrave, enclave, lave, architrave. 
 
 -avre None. 
 
 -ax ISone. , 
 
 -e pitie, moitie, amitie, inimitife. Words ending in 
 
 -te are not included here : see -e, in the Table 
 
 of Feminine Terminations. 
 
 -ec Nojie. 
 
 -ecle None. 
 
 -ect None. 
 
 -ecte pandectes, secte. 
 
 -ectre None. 
 
 -ed None. 
 
 -ede None. 
 
 ♦edre NoTie. 
 
 -ef. nef. 
 
 -effle nefle. 
 
 -ege allege. 
 
 -egme None. 
 
 -egne None. 
 
 -egs None. 
 
 -egue ..gregue. 
 
 •eigle None. 
 
 fiL NoriA. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 35 
 
 TA.BLE OF MASCULINE TERMINATIONS— Continued. 
 TERMIXATIONS. EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 ^1 None. 
 
 -elfe None. 
 
 -em None. 
 
 -erne br^me, cr^me, trireme, septi6me (a sequence at 
 
 piquet.) 
 
 -emple None. 
 
 -emps None. 
 
 -en None. 
 
 -ens. None. 
 
 -ent gent, dent. 
 
 -entre None. 
 
 -ep None. 
 
 -epre None. 
 
 -epte None. 
 
 -eptre None. 
 
 -er mer, cuiller. 
 
 -ere None. 
 
 -ercle None. 
 
 -erf. None. 
 
 -ergue vergue. 
 
 -erle.: perle. 
 
 -errae berme, ferme. 
 
 -ers None. 
 
 -ert None. 
 
 -ertre None. 
 
 -es None. 
 
 -est None. 
 
 -este peste, sieste, soubvreveste, veste. 
 
 -estre liraestre. 
 
 -et None. 
 
 -etre guetre. fenetre. 
 
 -eu None. 
 
 -eublc None. 
 
 -euf None. 
 
 -eul None. 
 
 -eume None. 
 
 -eune None. 
 
 -euple None. 
 
 -euque None. 
 
 -eur There are sixty-seven feminines in eur, tvhtch 
 
 express properties and qualities : as, jaideux* 
 
 hauteur, rougeur, &c. 
 
 -eurre None. 
 
 -eurt None. 
 
 ■C^vtre None. 
 
36 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 TABLE OF MASCULINE TERMINATIONS— Continited. 
 TERMIITATIOirS. EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 •eutre T^one. 
 
 -eux None. 
 
 -evre chevre, fi6vre, levre, pidvre. 
 
 -ex None. 
 
 -exe ^.None. 
 
 -exte sexte. 
 
 -ez None. 
 
 -eze None. 
 
 -i raerci, fourmi, apres-midi, ammi, gagui, demi 
 
 -ibe None. 
 
 -ible bible. 
 
 -ibre fibre. 
 
 'ic None. 
 
 -ice avarice, cicatrice, cotice, epice, immondice, inter- 
 stice, injustice, justice, lice, malice, matrice, 
 milice, natice, notice, police, premice, varice, 
 venefice ; and, of course, all the names that de- 
 signate women • cs, actrice, cantatrice, &c. 
 
 -icle bemicle, beside, manicle, 
 
 4ct None. 
 
 -id None. 
 
 -ide ride, bride, ides, egide, pyramide, cantharide, he 
 
 morroides, cycloide, cariatide, bastide, carotide, 
 chrysalide, cissoide, conchoide, eneide, ephe- 
 lides, ephemerides, epinyctides, heroide, nei©' 
 ide, parotide, rhomboide, ricinoide. 
 
 -idre None. 
 
 -if None. 
 
 -ifFre None. 
 
 -ige lige, tige, volige. 
 
 -igle None. 
 
 -igme enigme. 
 
 -igne guigne, ligne, vigne, consigne. 
 
 -igre None. 
 
 -il None. 
 
 -ile pile, vigile, tie, bile, file, huiie, niile. 
 
 -ilphe None. 
 
 -ils None. 
 
 -iltre None. 
 
 -im None. 
 
 -imbe None. 
 
 -imbre None. 
 
 -in None. 
 
 -inc Nnn£. 
 
 •inct None , 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 37 
 
 TABLE OF MASCULINE TERMINATIONS— Continiiei. 
 TBRMIITATIONS. EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 -indre None. 
 
 -inge meninge. 
 
 -inq . . . , None. 
 
 -intre None. 
 
 -inx , None. 
 
 -iple None. 
 
 -ir None. 
 
 -ire cire, satire, ire, Hegire. 
 
 -irque None. 
 
 -irse None. 
 
 -irte None. 
 
 -is vis, brebis, fleur de lis, chauve-souria. 
 
 -isc None. 
 
 -isme None. 
 
 -isque bisque, brisque. 
 
 -iste piste, batiste, liste, baliste. 
 
 -isthme None. 
 
 -istre None. 
 
 -it nuit. 
 
 -ithme None. 
 
 .itre vitre, epitre, mitre, huitre. 
 
 -ivre None. . 
 
 -ix perdrix. 
 
 -o None. 
 
 -ob No7ie. 
 
 -obe robe. 
 
 -oble None. 
 
 -obre None. 
 
 -oc None. 
 
 -ocle None. 
 
 -ocre ocre. 
 
 -od None. 
 
 -ode. . . commode, ^pode, methode, ode, pagode, spode. 
 
 -of. None. 
 
 -offre None. 
 
 -oge epitoge, horloge, loge, toge. 
 
 -ogme None. 
 
 -ogue drogue, eglogue, vogue, synagogue, pirogue. 
 
 -oi loi, foi, paroi« 
 
 -Old. None. 
 
 -oif. None. 
 
 -oil None. 
 
 -oine Names of plants and stones with this terminatwn 
 
 are feminine, 
 •oint None. 
 
38 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 TABLE OF MASCULINE TERMINATIONS— Continiwi 
 tehmistatioxs. exceptions. 
 
 -(Mr None. 
 
 -oire foire, poire, moire, histoire, gloire, machoire, na- 
 
 geoire, victoire, and all names indicating 
 the power qf holding or containing : as, ai- 
 moire, ecritoire, &c. 
 
 -ois fok. 
 
 -oit None. 
 
 -oitre None. 
 
 -oivre None. 
 
 -61 None. 
 
 -olf. None. 
 
 -cm None. 
 
 -oinb None. 
 
 -ombre ombre, penombre. 
 
 -ome and -omme . . gomme, pomme. 
 
 -omphe None. 
 
 -ompte None. 
 
 -on pamoison, prison, trahison, moisson, foison, garnP- 
 
 son, fagon, boisson, chanson, toison, ranpon, 
 legon, guerison. See -ion and -aison, in the Ta- 
 ble of Feminine Terminaiions. 
 
 -onche.. . t- conche, jonche. 
 
 -onde petoncle. 
 
 -ond None. 
 
 -one anemone, annone, argemone, mangone, auin6ne, 
 
 zone. 
 
 -ongle None. 
 
 -ongre None, 
 
 -onstre None. 
 
 -ont None. 
 
 -onze None. 
 
 -op None. 
 
 -or None. 
 
 -orbe None. 
 
 -orche torche. 
 
 -ord None. 
 
 -ordre None. 
 
 -ore mandragore, m6taphore, aurore, p^re, amphne, 
 
 plethore. 
 
 -orps None. 
 
 -ors Nont, 
 
 -ort None. 
 
 -OS. None. 
 
 -ot dot 
 
 ou None. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 39 
 
 TABLE OF^MASCULINE TERMlNA-TlONS^CoTuludad. 
 TERMIlfATIOJrS. EXCEPTIOITS. j 
 
 •oude soude. 
 
 -oufle pantoufle. i 
 
 -ouffre None. 
 
 -oug None, 
 
 -ouge gouge. 
 
 -oup None. I 
 
 -our cour. J 
 
 -ours None. 
 
 -out None, 
 
 -oux toux. 
 
 -oxe None. \ 
 
 -u glu, tribu, vertu. 
 
 -ube jujube. 
 
 -uc None. 
 
 -ucre None. 
 
 -ud None. 
 
 -uf. None. 
 
 -ufle None. 
 
 -uge None. 
 
 -uis None. i 
 
 -ul None, ^\ 
 
 -um None. ; 
 
 -un None. 
 
 unt None. 
 
 •ur None j 
 
 urne urne. ' 
 
 us None. , . j 
 
 use None. 
 
 uscle None, '' 
 
 uste None, ; 
 
 -ustre None. ^ 
 
 -ut Non-e. 
 
 -ux None. ; 
 
 -uxe None. 
 
 -yge apophyg^ 
 
 -yme None, ■} 
 
 -ynx None. i 
 
 -ype None. ] 
 
 -yplie None, 
 
 -yrse Nonf,, . 
 
 -yrte iVone,' \ 
 
 -yx ••••••• ^o««. I 
 
40 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 II. FEMININE TERMINATIONS. 
 
 TEKMINATIOXS. EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 -ace espace. 
 
 -ache gamaches. 
 
 -ade stade. jade, grade. 
 
 -afe parafe. 
 
 -afle None. 
 
 -afre cafre. 
 
 -agne alpagne, bagne, pagne. 
 
 -agre cleragre, meleagre. 
 
 -ague carague, gyrovague, ossifrague. 
 
 -aie None. 
 
 -aigne None. 
 
 -aile baile. 
 
 -aille None. 
 
 -aine domaine, Le Maine (a province of France.) 
 
 -ainte None. 
 
 -aise malaise, mesaise. 
 
 -aison None. 
 
 -aisse None. 
 
 -aite None. 
 
 -ale scandale, ovale, petale. 
 
 -algue None. 
 
 -alle intervalle. 
 
 -alse None. 
 
 -alve None. 
 
 -ame amalgame, ^pithalame, hippopotame, vidame. 
 
 blame, dictame. 
 
 -ampe None. 
 
 -ance ranee. 
 
 anche dimanche. 
 
 -ande multiplicande. 
 
 -andre meandre, palixandre. 
 
 -ane ane, crane, manes, organe, filigrane, arcane. 
 
 -angue None. 
 
 -anne None. 
 
 -anque manque, saltinbanque. 
 
 • anse None. 
 
 -ante Nones. 
 
 -ape and -appe None. 
 
 -arbe None. 
 
 -arce None. 
 
 -arche None. 
 
 -arde pericarde. 
 
 -arge large. 
 
 'Vix%o.9 i\<rtitf. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 41 
 
 TABLE OF FEMININE TERMINATIONS- Contiauei. 
 
 TERMIBTATIOirS. EXCEPTIOIfS. 
 
 argue largue. 
 
 -arne acame. 
 
 -arpe None. 
 
 -arse tarse. 
 
 -arte None. 
 
 -ase gymnase, Pegase, Caucase. 
 
 -ate and atte automate, Euphrate, stigmata. 
 
 -aube None. 
 
 -auche None. 
 
 -aude None. 
 
 -auge None. 
 
 -aule saule. 
 
 -aupe None. 
 
 -ause None. 
 
 -ausse None. 
 
 -auve None. 
 
 -axe axe. 
 
 -e The feminine termination here meant is -t^. 
 
 The exceptions are: ete, traite, te, veloute, 
 pate, cote, b^nedicit^, aparte, arr^te, comte, 
 comite. 
 
 -^e musee, trophee, hymen^e, coryphee, scarab^e. 
 
 -6bre zebre. 
 
 -ece None. 
 
 -eche preche. 
 
 -eigne peigne. 
 
 -eille None. 
 
 -eine None. 
 
 -ele zele, modele. 
 
 -elle libelle, vermicelle, isabelle, violoncelle, 
 
 -empe None. 
 
 -ence silence. 
 
 -encre None. 
 
 -ende dividende. 
 
 -endre None. 
 
 •eae alcaligene, amphisbene, ^pagomene, Epicene, hy- 
 
 drogene, molybdene, oxygene, paralipomenes, 
 phalene, silene, tungsthene, chene, frene, p^ne, 
 troene. 
 
 •enne renne. 
 
 -ense None. 
 
 -ente trente. 
 
 -cpe None. 
 
 epse None. 
 
42 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 TABLE OF FEMININE TERMINATIONS— Cojiftnaed. 
 
 TERMIITATIOXS. EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 •eque areque, cercopitheque. 
 
 -erbe verbe. 
 
 -erce commerce. 
 
 -erche None. 
 
 ere cimetiere, viscere, mystere, cautere, adultere, ul- ,■ 
 
 cere, cralere, caractere, hemisphere, monastere, 
 ministere, clystere, mesentere, planisphere, [ 
 presbytere, quadrilatere, reverbere, somnifere, . 
 stere. 
 
 -erge cierge. 
 
 -erne averne, ceme, malgouveme, quaterne, teme. 
 
 -erre cimeterre, verre, parterre, tonnerre, paratnnnp.ri^ ^ 
 
 lierre. • , / , _ , 
 
 -erse None. n. .1^:'^'^' ''■'''^^\ i.---'''^,d^j^--^ 
 
 ^rte None. "^jvOtAoiXj tj^^ .^ • 
 
 -erve None. ^ 
 
 -ese diese, diocese, manganese. 
 
 -esque None. 
 
 -esse None. 
 
 -ete and -ette amulette, squelette, casse-noisette, and a few other 
 
 compound words. 
 
 -eue None. 
 
 -eule None. 
 
 -eure None. 
 
 'Cuse None. 
 
 -eute Acne. 
 
 -euve fleuve. 
 
 -euvre None, 
 
 -eve reve. 
 
 -iche acrostiche, caniche, fetiche, hemistiche, stokfiche. 
 
 -ie genie, perihelie, parapluie, pavie, incendie. 
 
 -ifFe No7ie. 
 
 -igue None. 
 
 -ille calville, codicille, codille, miUe, spadille, trille, 
 
 vaudeville. 
 
 -ime abime, centime, crime, regime, dedme, grimt^ 
 
 millesime, mime, sublime. 
 
 -ince None. 
 
 -inde inde, Pinde. 
 
 -ine None. 
 
 -ingle None. 
 
 -ingue elingue. 
 
 -inte None. 
 
 -ion pion, septentrion, croupion, scorpion, fanion, ca- 
 mion, scion, bastion, bestion, gabion, guiion, 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 43 
 
 TABLE OF FEMININE TERMINATIONS— Conttnuei. 
 
 TEHMINATIONS. EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 talion, million, billion, trillion, lampion, brim- 
 
 borion, alerion, alcyon, horion, morion, orion. 
 
 -ipe participe, principe. 
 
 -ipse None. 
 
 -ique portique, topique tropique, cantique, distique, 
 
 emetique, narcotique, viatique. 
 
 -ise None, 
 
 -isse None, 
 
 -ite merite, demerite, gite, site, rite, satellite, areopa- 
 
 gite. 
 
 -ive convive, qui-vive. 
 
 -obe globe, lobe. 
 
 -oce negoce, sacerdoce. 
 
 -oche coche, medianoche, proche, reproche. 
 
 -ogne None. 
 
 -oie foie. 
 
 -oile None. 
 
 -oise None. 
 
 -oisse None. 
 
 -oite None. 
 
 -oix choix. 
 
 -ole and -olle capitole, role, monopole, pole, protocole, symbole, 
 
 controle. 
 
 -olte None. 
 
 -ombe lombes. rhombe, 
 
 -ompe None. 
 
 -once quinconce. 
 
 -onde monde 
 
 -onge mensonge, songe. 
 
 -ongue None. 
 
 -onne None. 
 
 -onte conte. 
 
 -ontre None. 
 
 -ope baroscope, engyscope, horoscope, m^t^oroscope, 
 
 microscope, telescope. 
 
 -ophe None. 
 
 -oque coUoque, engastriloque, soliloque, ventriloque. 
 
 -orce divorce. 
 
 -orde exorde, monocorde, pentacorde, tetracorde. 
 
 -orge None. 
 
 -orme , corme, orme. 
 
 ■orne — capricorne, cromorne. 
 
 orte cloporte. 
 
 ose None. 
 
 >6se carrosse, colos&e. 
 
44 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 TABLE OF FEMININE TERMINATIONS— ConcZoded. 
 TEnMINATIOKS. EXCEPTIOifS 
 
 -oste anagnoste, perioste. 
 
 -ote and -otte antidote, vote, tire-botte. 
 
 -ouche piedouche. 
 
 -oucle None. 
 
 -oudre None. 
 
 -oue None. 
 
 -ouffe bouffe. 
 
 -ouille None. 
 
 -oule None. 
 
 -oulpe ■ None. 
 
 -oupe groups. 
 
 -ouque None. 
 
 -ourbe None. 
 
 -ource None. 
 
 -ourde None. 
 
 cure None. 
 
 -otirme None. 
 
 -ourse None. 
 
 -ouse None. 
 
 -ousse None. 
 
 -oute doute. 
 
 -outre . .coutre. 
 
 -uble None. 
 
 -uce prepuce. 
 
 -uche No}U. 
 
 -ude prelude. 
 
 -ue No7ie. 
 
 -u]e and -uUe adminicule, animalcule, conciliabule,conventicule, 
 
 corpuscule, crepuscule, fascicule, galericule, 
 globule, indicule, lobule, manipule, matricule, 
 module, monocule, monticule, opuscule, pecule, 
 pedicule, perpendicule, preambule, prostibule, 
 regule, ridicule, scrupule, vehicule, ventricule, 
 vestibule. 
 ulte culte, tumulte. 
 
 -ume apostume, bitume, costume, legume, rhume. 
 
 -une None. 
 
 -upe None. 
 
 •uque None. 
 
 -ure augure, parjure, murmure, tellure, mercure, col'jie. 
 
 -use. None. 
 
 -ute and -utte parachute. 
 
 'Uve None. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 45 
 
 Ll§/ There are some nouns which are masculine in one 
 signification, and feminine in another : thus, livre^ a book, 
 is masculine, while livre. a pound weight, is feminine. 
 These have not been included in the foregoing Rules and 
 Tables : and are as follow : 
 
 LIST OF ALL THE NOUNS WHICH ARE MASCULINE 
 IN ONE SIGNIFICATION, AND FEMININE IN AN- 
 OTHER. 
 
 jrASCtJLINE. FEMININE. 
 
 aide assistant aide /lelp 
 
 :iigle eagle aigle standard 
 
 amour love, affection amours, pi. intrigues of gallantry 
 
 aune alder-tree aune ■ell 
 
 baybe Barbary horse baijig beard 
 
 barde poet Tame slice of bacon 
 
 Ba sque- Biscayan ba Jjiue skirt 
 
 oerce- •• bird berce- a plant 
 
 braque setting dog braques, pi. claws of a shellfish 
 
 cdpre privateer cSpre caper, a pickle 
 
 caraque cocoa caraque a kind of ship 
 
 carpe wrist carpe rarp 
 
 cartouche ornament in designing cartouche cartridge 
 
 coche passage-boat coche old sow 
 
 couple a man and his wife coujpje, a brace, a pair 
 
 cVepe^ 'mourning c^pfiT • pancake 
 
 critique a critic critique criticism 
 
 d^lice delight d^Iices •. delights 
 
 enfant male child enfant -female child 
 
 enseigne officer enseiane -fiag 
 
 exemple example exeinple writing copy 
 
 faux -falsehood faux scyth e 
 
 fm chief point fin end 
 
 foUicule gall-bladder follicule seed-vessel in plants 
 
 for6t gimlet foret -forest 
 
 foudre tun-vessel, a great warrior foudre thunderbolt 
 
 fourbe impostor fourbe kna'>iery, cheat 
 
 garde a guardsman garde defence 
 
 grefFe register greffe graft 
 
 gueules, pi. gules in heraldry gueule the jaws of a beast 
 
 guide guide guide rein 
 
 haute-paye soldier in extra pay haute-paye extra-pay 
 
 heliotrope sun-Jlower heliotrope spotted precious stone 
 
 hymne chaunt of the ancients hymne Christian hymn 
 
 larves, pi. evil spirits larve worm, grvb 
 
 litre measure for liquids litre • -mourning hangings of churches 
 
 li_vre book Uwifi- • • -pound weight, piece of money 
 
 manche handle nianche sleeve, channel 
 
 manoeuvre bricklayer' s man inanceuvre manceuvre 
 
 matamore boaster matamore • •slave-priso7i 
 
 m^moire bill, memoir mernoire meviorp 
 
 iniTe. boar five years old \mne- •^. ■■■-■■■ -..^.aim, the button 
 
 •' •' I on the barrel of a gun to take aim by 
 
 mode mood, system mode -fashion, custom 
 
 mdle pier, dyke m6le false idea 
 
46 
 
 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 mort corpse, dead man 
 
 Tnoulle set of pulleys 
 
 moule model, pattern 
 
 mousse ship hoy 
 
 ceuvre action, toork 
 
 ombre game at cards 
 
 orge raond6 peeled barley 
 
 orgue organ 
 
 page page, attendant 
 
 paillasse theatrical clown 
 
 palme measure of length 
 
 panache plume 
 
 pantomime pantomime player 
 
 paralI61e comparison 
 
 pendule pendulum 
 
 p^riode height 
 
 pique spade at cards 
 
 pivoine a kind of snipe 
 
 plane plane-tree 
 
 platine platina 
 
 plinthe squared body of soldiers 
 
 po6Ie stove 
 
 Polacre a Polish gentleman 
 
 ponte gambler 
 
 poste station, office 
 
 pourpre purple colour, purple fever 
 
 pr^texte pretence 
 
 piipille male pupil 
 
 quadrille game 
 
 r^iale organ-pipe 
 
 relache relaxation 
 
 remise hackney coach 
 
 serpentaire constellation 
 
 Emople vert in heraldry 
 
 solde balance of an account 
 
 Bomme sleep, nap 
 
 pouris smile 
 
 tour turn^ trick 
 
 triomphe triumph, victory 
 
 trompette trumpeter 
 
 vague empty space 
 
 vase-- • vase 
 
 voile veil 
 
 FEMIi'IIfE, 
 
 mort - death 
 
 moufle mitten 
 
 moule shell fish 
 
 mousse moss, froth 
 
 ceuvre literary work 
 
 ombre shadow, ghost 
 
 orge barley 
 
 orgues, pi. organs 
 
 page page in a book 
 
 paillasse mattrass 
 
 palme advantage ' 
 
 panache pea-hen 
 
 pantomime pantomime 
 
 parall61e parallel line 
 
 pendule clock ■ 
 
 p^riode epoch, period 
 
 pique spear 
 
 pivoine peony, a plant i 
 
 plane carpenter" s tool 
 
 platine plates of a watch 
 
 plinthe plinth in architecture ; 
 
 poele frying-pan 
 
 polacre polacca • 
 
 ponte laying of eggs 
 
 poste postoffizc, the mail ." 
 
 pourpre • • purple dye, badge of royalty , 
 
 pr^texte ancient Roman dress 
 
 pupille the apple of the eye . 
 
 qnadrille.troop of horseinatournament 
 regale- -the holding a vacant bishopric 
 
 relache the touching at a seaport 
 
 remise coach-house ' 
 
 serpentaire dragonwort ' 
 
 sinople anemony 
 
 solde pay of a soldier 
 
 somme sum of money , 
 
 souris mouse 
 
 tour tower 
 
 triomphe game at cards 
 
 trompette trumpet 
 
 vague wave 
 
 vase slime 
 
 voile -^eail 
 
k 
 
 GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 47 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 J^Tote.— The five following Exercises are intended to be introductory tc those 
 hich follow them ; and should therefore be well understood and renieni- 
 loered by the learner. He will bear in mind that he is expected to apply all 
 the knowledge, and acquaintance with w^ords, which he has obtained in pre- 
 vious Exercises, to those which succeed ; as they are all progressive in their 
 construction, and lead practically, and by almost imperceptible advances, from 
 the easy to the difficult. 
 
 19. The learner is to render the English definite article 
 the^ in the singular, by 
 
 Icj before a noun masculine : as, le livre, the book ; 
 la, before a noun feminine : as, la rue, the street; and 
 /', before a noun of either gender, beginning with a vowel or h 
 mute : as, /' ame, the soul ; /' histoire, the history ; 
 
 and in the plural, by, 
 
 les, before nouns of either gender: as, les livres, the books; lea 
 rues, the streets. 
 
 20. A, or an^ is to be rendered by 
 
 tin, before a noun masculine: as, un homme, a man; and 
 une, before a noun feminine: a.s, une femme, a woman. 
 
 EXERCISE I* 
 
 The wood. The forest. The houses. The men. The court. 
 
 bois, OT. for^t, /. maisons homraes cour,/. 
 
 The foot. The arms. The room. The garden. The windows. 
 
 pied,ai. bras chambre,/. jardin, m. fenfires 
 
 A history. A novel. A foreigner. A walk. A day. 
 
 histoire, /. roman, m. Stranger, m. promenade, /. jour, nt. 
 
 A night. The sun. The moon. The stars. A body. A card. 
 
 huit,/. soleil, m. lune,/. ^toiles corps, m. carte,/. 
 
 \ crown. 
 
 ^cu, VU 
 
 21. The prepositions of^Lndfrom are rendered by de\ 
 to and at hy a \ and when followed by the article, thus : 
 
 * In the following Exercise, and wherever they may occur 
 throughout the grammar, m. stands for masculine, f. for feminine, s. 
 for singular, pi. for plural, art. for article, h asp. for h aspiratcdy 
 &c. &c. The initial h, of all words in the Exercises which are pot 
 "oreceded or followed by h asp., will be considered by the scholar a/i 
 nute. 
 
48 
 
 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 "da, before a noun masculine singular beginning with 
 a consonant or h aspirated : as, du pare, of the park; 
 de la, before a rM)un fem. sing,, beginning with a con- 
 sonant or h aspirated : as, de la ri\'iere, of the river; 
 de V , before a noun singular of either gender, beginning 
 with a vowel or h mute : as, de V esprit, of the mind ; 
 des, before any noun in the plural : as, des plumes, of 
 v^ the pens. 
 
 of ike 
 
 and 
 
 fioftn ihty 
 
 by 
 
 to the 
 and 
 
 at the, 
 by 
 
 "au, before a noun masculine singular beginning with a 
 
 consonant or h aspirated : as, au chirurgien, to the 
 
 surgeon ; 
 
 a la, before a noun feminine singular beginning with a 
 
 ^ consonant or h aspirated : as, a la boite, to the box ; 
 
 a r, before a noun singular of either gender beginning 
 
 with a vowel or h mute : as, a /' ami, to the fiiend; 
 aux, before any noun in the plural: as, aux lois, to the 
 ' ^ laws. 
 
 22. And when these prepositions are followed by a 
 or an, thus : 
 
 of a rd' un, before a noun masculine; as, cT un jour, of a 
 
 and J day ; 
 
 from a, \ d' une, before a noun feminine : as, cf une nuit, of a 
 
 by l^ night. 
 
 to a rd un, before a noun masculine : as, a un couteau, to 
 
 and 1 a knife ; 
 
 at a, ] a U7ie, before a noun feminine : as, a une fourchette, to 
 
 by L ^ ^^^^' 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 The palace of the king. Of the queen. Of the man. 
 
 palais, m. roi reine homnie 
 
 book. To the chair. To the arm-chair. To the hands, 
 
 hvre, TO. chaise, /. fauteuil, m. mains 
 fingers, 
 doi^ts 
 
 Of the 
 Tofho 
 Toa 
 
 From a balcony. From a window. Of a prince, 
 
 balcon, m. fenetre, /. prince 
 
 princess. Of the gardens. Of the evening. To the courtiers, 
 
 princesse jardins coir, vi. courti^ans 
 Of a table. To the master. To a lady. Of the soul. Of the 
 
 table,/. maitre dame &me,/. 
 sheep. To a ram. Of the shepherds, 
 brebis,/. belief berger3 
 
 23. These same prepositions, when followed by the 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 49 
 
 possessive adjectives my^ thy, his, her, its, our, your, and 
 their, are rendered thus : 
 
 of and from my "^ 
 
 thy 
 
 his, ker, its ! 
 
 our f 
 
 S. VI. 
 
 s.f. 
 
 Vl.vi.Scf. 
 
 rde mon 
 
 ma 
 
 mes 
 
 . . ton 
 
 ta 
 
 tes 
 
 j . • son 
 
 sa 
 
 ses 
 
 . . notre 
 
 notre 
 
 nos 
 
 . . votre 
 
 votre 
 
 vos 
 
 ^. . leur 
 
 leur 
 
 leurs 
 
 C a mon 
 
 ma 
 
 mes 
 
 I &c. 
 
 &c. 
 
 &c. 
 
 your 
 
 their 
 
 to and at my ^ . C 
 
 «&c. &c. 5^1 
 
 24. It must be observed here, that possessive adjec- 
 tives, in French, always agree in gender and number with 
 the object possessed ; and not with the possessor, as in 
 Jl^nglish ; for which reason they must always be repeated 
 before every noun. 
 
 25. Thus, speaking of a lady's parents, the English 
 say, her father and mother ; while the French express the 
 same by, son pere et set mere. In the English example, 
 ner agrees with lady, the possessor ; and altliough it may 
 be, scarcely ever is repeated. But in the French, as we 
 have said, the possessive adjectives agree with the objects 
 possessed, in this case pere and mere ; which being of 
 different genders, obviously require correspondent genders 
 in the possessive adjectives prefixed to them. Such is the 
 reason of a rule which has been extended so as to embrace 
 nouns of similar gender. 
 
 26. The prepositions of and from., to 'and at, 'when 
 followed by the demonstrative adjectives this or that, these 
 or those, must be rendered thus : 
 
 '"ce, before a noun masculine begin- 
 ning with a consonant or h aspi- 
 rated : as, de ce lieu, of that place ; 
 cet, before a noun masculine begin- 
 ning with a vowel or h mute : as, 
 a cet homme, to this man ; 
 cefie, before a noun feminine : as, ^ 
 1^ cetfe femme, to this woman. 
 
 ,. . y. ,t ,7 ,7 rbefore nouns plural of either 
 
 of and from these or those, by de ces, j j 
 
 J J } J ' J gender : as, de ces portes, 
 
 I 
 
 c 4 
 
 of and from this or that, by de 
 to and at this or that, by d 
 
 . , . ., 7/ u V \ of these doors d ces sou- 
 
 to and at these or those, by a ces, ^ j^^^^ ^^ ^^^^^^ ^^^^^^^ 
 
no COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 Of my clothes. Of thy handkerchief. Of his pocket Of youi 
 
 habits. mouchoir, vi. poche, /. 
 
 letters. Of our treasure. To their house. Of this steeple. Of that . 
 letlres. tr6sor, m. raai^on,/. clocher, m. { 
 
 hero. Of this tower. Of these models. Of my sister. To your 
 h asp- h^ros. tour, /. modules. soeur. 
 
 relations. The top of this mountain. To my friend. Of these , 
 parens. sommet, m. montagne, /. ami, m. j 
 
 pleasures. To our duties. To their connexions. Of his acquaint- i 
 
 plaisirs. devoirs. liaisons. connais 
 
 ances. To my neighbours, 
 sances. voisLns. 
 
 27. The Apostrophe (') marks, we have said, page 
 30, the suppression of a vowel, before another vowel, or 
 an h mute. 
 
 (28, This suppression is called elision. A^ e, i are the 
 only vowels liable to be thus cut off. tOf the suppression 
 of the latter of the three, but two instances occur, viz. in 
 the conjunction s?!, before Uie pronoun singular and plural, 
 i/, Us : thus, s' rZ, s' ils.\ iU' yirMi -vvi r u c^*- (^-^^1-^ .1 
 
 29. The a is suppressed only in la, feniiume, Dotn 
 when an article and a pronoun. 
 
 30. The elision of e occurs in the masculine article and 
 pronoun Ze, and also in many other monosyllables, such 
 as,ye, me, te, se, de, ce, 7ie, que, and in the compounds of 
 que., such as, parceque, quoique, &.c. 
 
 31. It is allowable, either to retrench, or retain the 
 final e of the preposition entre, between, among, when it 
 precedes the pronouns eux, elles and autres ; but it is 
 always suppressed in the following compound words : 
 entr'acte, an interlude ; s'entr'aider, io help one another; 
 entr'ouir, to hear imperfectly ; entr'ouvrir, to half open. 
 
 EXERCISE IV.» 
 
 The soul. The heroine. The mind. He ^loves 'him. She sjoves 
 4me,/. heroine. esprit, m. U aime le. elle airae 
 
 * The learner will perceive small figures, ', 2, s^ &c. placed fre- 
 quently before English words, in these Exercises, He will understand 
 by these figures, that in writing his Exercises, he is to place the French 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 51 
 
 'her. I love this man. You do not 2understand 'me. He ^esteems 
 la. Je homme. Vous — * ne entendez pas ine. estime 
 
 'thee. He goes away. It was the 2golden 'age. Do not go 
 
 te. se en-va. Ce 6tait de or age. — ne allez pas 
 
 there. If he comes. If they please. What has he said 1 Till 
 
 la.. Si vient. Si veulent. Que a-t- dit t Jusque au 
 
 night. Though he says. Since he 2knows 'him. When he ^saw 
 soir. Quoique dise. Puisque connait le- Lorsque vit 
 'them. Between them. Some body is come. I have 2done 'nothing 
 
 les. Entre eux. Quelque un est venu. ne ai fait rien. 
 He loves nobody. He ^has 3never ''seen 'it. 
 ne ne a jamais vu. 
 
 32. There are many words which are alike in both 
 languages, and others which differ only in their termina- 
 tion. The words which are perfectly alike, are those 
 particularly, which have the following terminations : viz. 
 in a/, hle^ ace,, ance, ence, ice, acle, ade, age, ege, ge, ule^ 
 He, ine, ion, ant and ent. 
 
 33. Many other words require only a change of termi- 
 nation, as follows : 
 
 English. French. 
 
 as energy, energie. 
 . , military, militaire. 
 . . glory, gloire. 
 
 . . clemency, clemence. 
 . . beauty, beaute. 
 . . dangerous, dangereux. 
 . . favour, faveur. 
 
 . . error, erreur. 
 
 . . clandestine, clandestin 
 . . expressive, expressif. 
 . . fury, furie. 
 
 words in the order indicated by the figures ; as the order of arrange- 
 ment of words in the French language, frequently differs from that 
 proper to the English. Thus, the expression, a ^mischievous ^old 
 ^monkey, is to be rendered into French, arranged as follows : nn vieux 
 
 I singe malin ; which, it will be observed, is conformable to the order 
 
 j of the figures preceding the English words. Occasionally, however, 
 for convenience sake, these small figures will precede the French 
 
 I words: in which case, also, the words will of course be arranged as 
 
 , indicated by the figures. 
 
 ! • This sign, — , indicates that the English word under which it is 
 
 j (/'aceu, requires nc corresponding word in the French. 
 
 I 
 
 English 
 
 French. 
 
 -^.y 
 
 into -gie, 
 
 -ary 
 
 -aire, 
 
 -ory 
 
 -oire, 
 
 •cy 
 
 -ce, 
 
 'ty 
 
 -te, 
 
 -ous 
 
 -eux, 
 
 •our 
 
 -eur, 
 
 -or 
 
 .... eur, 
 
 -ine 
 
 -in. 
 
 -ive 
 
 .... -if. 
 
 -ry 
 
 .... -ne. 
 
52 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 English. French. English. French, 
 
 dy .... -die, . . perfidy, perfidie. 
 
 siy .... -stie, . . modesty, modestie. 
 
 JS". B. Adjectives in eux^ if^ in, make their feminines. 
 respectively, in euse, ive, ine ; in ant, ent, and al, take e 
 mute. 
 
 EXERCISE V. 
 
 The beauty of that fable. The horror of vice, the utility of 
 
 /. /. /. art. 7/1. /. art. 
 
 science. The atrocity of this action. The simplicity of that machine. 
 
 /. /. /. /. /• 
 
 An 2audacious 'conspirator. The absurdity of that opinion. The 
 
 /. /. 
 
 ^military 'evolutions. An ^industrious 'nation. An ^important 
 
 /• 
 'victory. An ^alimentary 'pension. A ^dangerous 'animal. A 
 
 /. /. m. 
 
 2famous 'general. His 2constant 'generosity. His fidelity is 
 
 /• /• 
 
 indubitable. Your clemency is admirable. The destruction of his 
 
 /• _ /• 
 
 fortune was the consequence of his temerity. She is very scrupu- 
 
 /. fut /. /. 
 
 lous. This history is incontestable. Your facility is prodigious 
 
 /• /• 
 
 His perfidy is odious. The sublimity of his sentiments is still 
 
 /. /• 
 
 preferable to the energy of his expressions. This instrument is not 
 
 /. m. 
 
 harmonious. The prosperity of the wicked is not durable. Your 
 
 /• 
 ^insidious 'presents are not acceptable. His memory is truly extra- 
 
 m. sont f. 
 
 ordinary. It was a great favour. His modesty is sincere. It was a 
 
 /• /• 
 
 sbnital, 3but ^prudent 'action. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 53 
 
 PART I 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 OF THE SUBSTANTIVE, OR NOUN. 
 See Introduction, p. 16. 
 
 34. The plural, in French, is generally formed, as in 
 English, by adding an s to the singular : as, 
 
 sinff. piur, 
 
 le president, the president ; les presidents, tlie presidents. 
 un ange, an angel ; des anges, some an^^eU. 
 
 35. Exceptions. 1. Substantives singular, ending m 
 «, X or z, remain unalterable : as, 
 
 sing. plur. 
 
 le fils, the son ; les fils, the sons. 
 
 la voix, the voice ,- les voix, the voices. 
 
 le nez, the nose ,- les nez, the noses. 
 
 36. 2. Nouns ending in au or ew, take an x : as, 
 
 sing. plur. 
 
 bateau, boat; bateaux, boat'i. 
 feu, Jire,- feux, fires. 
 
 37. 3. Substantives ending in aZ, are changed into 
 aux : as, 
 
 sing. phir. 
 
 cheval, horse,- chevaux, horses. 
 
 hopital, hospital; hopitaux, hospitals. 
 
 38. 4. The f, in polysyllables ending in ant or eni^ is 
 dropped or retained at pleasure : as, 
 
 sing. plur. 
 
 diamant, diamond; diamans, diamonds. 
 appartement, apartment ; appartemens, apartments, 
 
 39. But monosyllables retain the t : as, 
 
 sing, plur. 
 
 gant, gbve ; gants, gloves. 
 
 dent, tooth ; dents, teeth. 
 
54 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 40. Remarks. 1. The substantives chou^ caillou^ 
 bijou, genou, hibou and joujou, take x, and make chouxy 
 &c. 
 
 41. 2. The substantives bal, col, paJ, regal, camavaJ, 
 follow the general rule, simply taking s. 
 
 42. 3. The substantives bail, sous-bail, corail, email, 
 soupirail, vantail, ventail, change ail into aux, and make 
 baux, &c. Ail, garlic, makes aulx ; betail, cattle, makes 
 bestiaux ; bercail, sheepfold, has no plural. 
 
 43. 4. The four following have two plurals : 
 ("work, makes travaux ; 
 
 travail J ^ tmve (wilh farriers), makes travails ; 
 
 j occupation of a minister with a sovereign, makes tra- 
 1^ vails. 
 
 rtke tester of a bed, makes dels de lit ; 
 ciel J ^^^ ^''•s^ bed of stone in a quarry, makes ciels de car- 
 
 neres : 
 \jky, heaven, makes cieux. 
 
 .. C eye, makes yeux ; 
 ' "^ an oval window, makes ceils de bcEuf. 
 
 .. , C ancestor, makes aieux ; 
 ' (_ grandfather, makes aieuls. 
 
 EXERCISE VI. 
 
 The flowers oi the gardens. The niceties of the languages. The 
 
 fleur jardin d^licatesse langue. 
 
 palaces of the kings. The woods of these countries. The walnuts 
 
 palais roi. bois pays. noix 
 
 of their orchards. The pictures of those painters. The feathers of 
 
 verger. tableau peintre. plume 
 
 these birds. The melody of their voices. The gods of the pagans. 
 
 oiseau. m^lodie voir. dieu pa'ien. 
 
 The jewels of my sisters. The cabbages of our gardens. These 
 bijou sceur. cliou jardin. 
 
 ^charming 'places. 1 he horses of my stables. The fans of these 
 
 charmant lieu. cheval ^curie. 6ventail 
 
 ladies. The front-gates of those churches. The actions of my 
 
 dame. portail eglise. 
 
 ancestors. The evils of this life. The victories of those generals, 
 aieul. mal vie,/. 
 
 The works of those architects. The corals of those seas. The 
 
 travail arcbitecte corail xuer. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 66 
 
 learned-men of those times. The presents of my parents. The 
 
 sarant lemps-ia. 
 
 teeth of your combs. The playthings of our children. The heads 
 dent peigne. joujou enfant. t^te 
 
 of these nails, 
 clou. 
 
 CHAPTER ir. 
 
 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 See Introduction, p. 18. 
 
 44. The article is Ze, for the masculine ; as, 7e joicr^ 
 the day : Z«, for the feminine ; as, la nuit^ the niglu: ks^ 
 for the plural of both genders ; as, les jours, the days ; les 
 nuits, the nights. 
 
 45. It always agrees in gender and number with the 
 substantive to which it relates. 
 
 46. Elision of the article takes place before a vowel, 
 or h mute : as, V ambition, the ambition ; P honneur, the 
 honour. 
 
 47. It never takes place in the plural. 
 
 48. Contraction takes place in the following cases : 
 
 49. 1. Before a masculine singular beginning with a 
 consonant or h aspirated : as, 
 
 du prince, of the prince, instead of de le prince 
 
 du heros, of the hero, de le heros ; 
 
 au prince, to the prince, a. le prince ; 
 
 au heros, to the hero, a le heros. 
 
 50. 2. Before any noun in the plural : 
 
 des princes, of the princes, instead of de les princes; 
 
 des enfants, of the children, de les enfants ; 
 
 aux amis, to the friends, ^ les amis ; 
 
 aux ferames, to the women, ^ les femmes. 
 
56 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 (oiy The article, and the prepositions n and de, whether 
 cotrtreicted or not, are invariably to be repeated before 
 every substantive : as, 
 
 II dut la vie a la clemenrp He owed his life to the clemeri' 
 
 et a la magnariimite du vain- cy and magnanimity of the con- 
 
 queur. " queror. 
 
 II est comble d'honneur et de He is loaded with honour and 
 
 gloire. glory. 
 
 EXERCISE VII. 
 
 The soul of man, without cultivation, is like a diamond 
 &me,/. art. culture diamant, th. 
 
 in the rough. Self-love and pride are always the 
 
 brut art. amour-propre art. orgueil 
 
 offspring of a ^weak 'mind. The top of the mountains, 
 partage, m. esprit, m. sommet, m. montage, 
 
 and the bottom of the valleys, are equally agreeable. Silk is 
 
 fond, 771. valine art. Soie, /. 
 
 soft to the touch. The happiness of a ^feeling 'man, is to relieve 
 douce toucher, m. bonheur, m. sensible de subvenir h 
 
 the wants of the poor. A man given to pleasure was 
 besoin pauvre, in. s. Iivr6 art. plaisir, m. ne f'lt 
 
 never a great man. He obeyed the orders of the king. The 
 • ob^it h ordres 
 
 warbling of birds, the murmuring of streams, the enamel 
 gazouillement, m. art. murmure, m. art, ruisseau (5niail, m. 
 
 of meadows, the coolness of woods, the fragrance of 
 
 art. prairie fraicheur,/. art. parfuna, m. art. 
 
 flowers, and the sweet smell of plants, contribute greatly to 
 
 fleur douce odeur,/. art. plante contribuent beaucoup 
 
 the pleasures of the mind, and to the health of the body. The 
 
 VI. sant^,/ corps, m. 
 
 history of man, under all the circumstances of life, is the 
 
 art. dans toutes circonstances art. vie,/, 
 
 study of the wise. What we value is health, 
 
 ^tude sage, vi. Ce que estimons c6 est art. art. 
 
 frugality, liberty, Nigour of mind and body. 
 /. art. f. anrt. f. art. art. 
 
 52. Du^ de la., de Z', rfes, put before substantives taken 
 in a partitive sense, always imply that some word or words 
 understood precede them, such as rine portion., un mor- 
 ceau^ quelques-uns., &c., the equivalent of which, in Eng- 
 lish, is some^ or any : as, 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Je mange du pain. I eat bread. 
 
 II prend de la peine. He takes some trouble. 
 
 Vous avez de 1' amitie. You have some friends hip. 
 
 Avez-vous des livres ] Have you got any books ? 
 
 •53. It is to be observed that some, or aw?/, is sometimes 
 understood in English too; but the equivalent of du^ de 
 la, de /', des, which is of the, is very seldom expressed. 
 
 EXERCISE VIII. 
 
 Give me some bread and butter. Offer him some meat. 
 
 Donnez-moi art. beurre, 7ft. Ofl^rez-lui viande, /. 
 
 'I'rtke some salt. There is mustard. We have some 
 
 I'renez sel, m. Voili art. moutarde,/. Nous avons 
 
 tfherkins. Shall I offer you some chicken 1 Shall I help you to 
 •'oriiichons. • 'Vous offrirai-je- • ixjiilef? m. Vous servirai-je — 
 
 sojne fruit ] I will take, with pleasure, some broth. Bring me 
 
 fruit ? m. Je prendrai volontiers bouillon, m. Apportez-moi 
 
 some knives. Pour me out some beer. Drink some wine. 
 
 couteaux. Versez-moi — bi6re,/. Buvez vin, 7/1. 
 
 Take some tea. Put in some sugar and milk. I hear 
 Prenez th6, tk. Mettez-y siicre,7n. art. lait, 7n. J6 entends 
 
 some noise. There falls some hail. She has some pride. 
 
 bruit, m. II tombe grele,,/. Ella orgueil, m 
 
 Have you any ink and pens] Put some oil and 
 Avez-vous encre art. plumes'? Mettez huile art. 
 
 vinegar to the salad. Eat some lobster. He has 
 
 vinaigre, m. sur salade, /. Mangez h. asp. honiard, m. 
 
 received some gold and silver. 
 
 re§u or art. argent. 
 
 CHAPTER IIT. 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 54. The adjective is a word, which is added to a sub 
 stantive, to express its quality, or manner of being: as, 
 
 ban papier, good paper,- bonne plume, a good pen ; 
 cet habit, this coat ; rnon habit, my coat. 
 
 55. In French, the adjective takes the gender and 
 number of the substantive to which it relates. 
 
68 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 •56. There are two sorts of adjectives ; the qualificative^ 
 and determinative. 
 
 57. The qualificative adjective is that which expresses 
 the quality of the substantive : as, 
 
 bon, good ; beau, fine. 
 
 58. The determinative adjective is that which deter 
 mines or limits the signification of its substantive : as, 
 
 ma maison, my house ; cette porte, this door. 
 
 OF THE QUALIFICATIVE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 59. This adjective can express the quality, either sim- 
 ply, or with comparison, or to a very high degree ; hence, 
 three degrees of qualification. 
 
 60. The three degrees of qualification are : the posi- 
 tive^ the comparative and the superlative. 
 
 61. 1. The positive expresses simply the quality : as, 
 Le merite est modeste. Merit is modest. 
 
 62. 2. The comparative expresses the quality with 
 comparison. There are three sorts of comparatives : 
 
 63. The comparative of equality, which is formed by 
 putting aussi^ as, or autanl, as much, before tlie adjective, 
 and que, as, after it : as, 
 
 Cesar etait aussi eloquent que Caesar was as eloquent as 
 
 brave. brave. 
 
 Cesar etait autant admire Caesar was as much admired 
 
 qu' estime as esteemed. 
 
 64. The comparative of inferiority, which is formed by 
 placing moins, less, before the adjective, and que, than, 
 after it : as. 
 
 La violette est moins belle que The violet is less beautiful than 
 la rose. the rose. 
 
 65. And the comparative of superiority, which is 
 formed by putting plus, more, before the adjective, and 
 que, than, after it : as, 
 
 La rose est plus belle que la The rose is more beautiful than 
 riolette. the violet. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 59 
 
 EXERCISE IX. 
 
 Shipwreck and death are less fatal than the pleasures 
 
 art. naufrage, m. art. mort, /. funeste 
 
 ^hich attack virtue. 2pope's Hmages are as perfect 
 
 £ii attaquent, art. vertu,/. De Pope art. f. parfait 
 
 ^ his style is harmonious. Delicacy of taste is a gift 
 
 ^ TO. art. D61icatesse art. gout, m. don, m. 
 
 f nature, as scarce as true genius. The love ol 
 
 art. f. rare art. vrai g^nie, ?«. amour 
 
 our neighbour is as necessary in society, for the 
 
 ait. — prochain, m. dans art. f. pour 
 
 happiness of life, as in Christianity, for 2eternal 
 
 bonheur, m. art. art. christianisine, m. ^ternel art. 
 
 salvation. It is as easy to do good, as to do evil, 
 
 salut, m. ais6 de faire art. bicn, m. art. mal, m. 
 
 He has as much wit as his brother, but he has not so much 
 
 de esprit autant 
 
 vanity. The republic of Athens was more illustrious than 
 de vanity. r^publique,/. Ath6nes illuslre 
 
 tha. of Lacedemon. Homer was, perhaps, a greater genius 
 
 Lac^d^mone. Homere peut-fetre grand 
 
 than Virgil; but Virgil had a more ^delicate and more ^refined 
 
 Virgile ; avait fin ddlicat 
 
 'taste than Homer. Milton ^appears to 'me more sublime than all 
 
 parait — me tou3 
 
 the other ^epjc ipoets. Autumn is less varied than 
 
 other 2epic 
 
 Ipoets. Autumn 
 
 is less varied 
 
 autre ^pique 
 
 po6te. art. Autonme, m. 
 
 vari6 
 
 spring, 
 
 but it is richer. 
 
 
 printemps, m. 
 
 riche. 
 
 
 66. The three following adjectives are comparatives in 
 tliemselves : 
 
 67. MeiUeur, better, is used instead of plus hon, which 
 is never said : as, 
 
 Ceci est bon, mais cela est This is good, but that is bei^ 
 meilleur. ter. 
 
 68. Plre^ worse, is used instead of plus mauvais: as, 
 Sa condition est mauvaise, mais His condition is bad, but it fun 
 
 «lle a ete pire. been worse. 
 
 69. Moindre, less, is used instead o( plus petit: as. 
 
 Ma depenst est petite, mais la Mi, expense issmall,but yours 
 votre est moindre. is less. 
 
CO COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 70. These comparatives must not be mistaken for the 
 three adverbs, mieux, pis,, moins^ which are generally ren- 
 dered by the same English words, better, worse, and less. 
 
 71. Mieux is used instead of _pZw5 bien^ more well, 
 which is said in neither language : as, 
 
 Ceci est bien, mais cela est This is well, but that is bet- 
 mieux. ter. 
 
 72. Pis is used for plus mal^ worse : as, 
 
 II se portait mal, mais 11 est pis He was unwell, but he is warse 
 que jamais. than ever. 
 
 73. Moins, is used for plus pen,, which is never heard : 
 as, 
 
 Je parle peu, vous parlez encore / speak little, you speak still 
 raoins. less. 
 
 EXERCISE X. 
 
 His reasoning is not better than yours. Your style is 
 
 raisonnement, m. le v6tre. Votre m. 
 a great deal better than that of his brother. The thickness of 
 
 ^de beaucoup: celui ^paisseur,/. 
 
 this wall is less than that of the 2next 'wall. This column is 
 
 mtir, m. celle voisin colonne,/. 
 
 less than the other in height and thickness. The remedy 
 
 autre en hauteur en grosseur. remade, m. 
 is worse than the disease. Your horse is worse than mine, 
 
 mal, 7/1. cheval, m. le mien. 
 
 The wine which he brought to-day is still worse than that 
 
 m. a apporte aujourd'hui encore 
 
 of yesterday. Give him more bread and less meat. From 
 
 hier. Donnez-lui de pain de viande. 
 bad to worse. It is worse than ever, 
 en Ce 
 
 74. 3 The superlative expresses the quality in a very 
 high, or in its highest degree : hence, two sorts of super- 
 latives, the absolute and the relative. 
 
 75. The superlative absolute, which marks a very hiffh 
 degree without comparison, is formed hy puiiing tres, fort^ 
 hien,, very, before the adjective : as, 
 
 La niodestie est tres-rare. Modesty is very rare. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 61 
 
 76. The superlative relative, which marks the highest 
 rlegree with comparison, is formed by prefixing the article 
 le to the comparatives meilleur, moindre, pire, and to the 
 adverbs plus and moins : as, 
 
 La modestie est la plus belle des Modesty is the finest of qua- 
 qualites. lities. 
 
 77. Plus and moins, with the article, are repeated be- 
 fore every adjective. 
 
 EXERCISE XI. 
 
 That landscape is very diversified, very extensive, and infinitely 
 
 paysage, m. vari6 ^tendu 
 
 agreeable on every side. The Alps are very high and very 
 
 de tout c6t^, m. Alpes, /. 
 
 steep. The style of Fenelon is very rich, and very harmonious, but 
 escarp^. m. 
 
 it is sometimes prolix ; that of Bossuet is extremely sublime, 
 il quelquefois prolixe; celui 61ev6, 
 
 but it is sometimes harsh and unpolished. The most beautiful 
 
 dur rude, 
 
 comparison that there is, perhaps, in any language, is that which 
 
 /. • -qu'il y ait- • dans aucun langue,/. celle que 
 
 Pope has drawn from the Alps, in his Essay on Criticism. The most 
 
 tir6 Essai art. Critique,/, 
 
 able men 2are 'not always the most virtuous. The most an- 
 
 habile gens pas vertueux. 
 
 cient and most general of all kinds of idolatry, was the 
 
 art. espfice, /. 
 worship rendered to the sun. The least excusable of all 
 culte, VI. rendu soleil, m. art 
 
 errors, is that which is wilful, 
 erreur,/. volontaire. 
 
 OF THE FORMATION OF THE FEMININE. 
 
 \78. ) Rule 1. All adjectives ending in the singular in 
 e mute, are of both genders, except maitre and traitre^ 
 tvhich make maiiresse and traifresse : as, 
 
 un homme aimable, mi amiable man ; 
 
 une femme aimable, an amiable woman. 
 
 79. Rule 2. Whenever the adjective does not end in 
 t mute, the e mute is added to form its feminine : as. 
 
62 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 un homme prudent, a prudent man; 
 une femme prudente, a prudent woman. 
 
 80. Rule 3. Adjectives in el^ien<^ on^ e^, to form their 
 feminine, double their last consonant, and take e mute :* as, 
 
 masc. fern. 
 
 cruel, cruelle, cruel ,- 
 
 ancien, ancienne, ancient ; 
 
 bon, bonne, good ; 
 
 net, nette, cltan. 
 
 81. Rule 4. Adjectives ending in/, change this letter 
 into u, and take e mute : as, 
 
 ■masc. fern. 
 
 bref, breve, short; 
 
 actif, active, active,- 
 
 naif, naive, ingenious ; 
 
 neuf, neuve, new. ^ 
 
 82. Rule 5, Adjectives ending in a?, change this let- 
 ter into 5, and take e mute : as, 
 
 vmsc. fem. 
 
 honteux, honteuse, ashamed; 
 
 vertueux, vertueuse, virtuous; 
 
 jaloux, jalouse, Jealous. 
 
 83. Rule 6. Adjectives ending in ewr, form their i 
 feminine in three different manners : I 
 
 I 
 
 84. 1. Those that are derived from verbs, change the ji 
 r into s, and take e mute : as, 
 
 masc. fem. |j 
 
 trompeur, trompcuse, deceitful; | 
 
 
 
 menteur, 
 
 menteuse. 
 
 lying. 
 
 
 
 
 85. 
 rice : 
 
 2. 
 
 as. 
 
 Those that are of Latin origin. 
 
 change 
 
 eur 
 
 into 
 
 
 
 masc. 
 acteur, 
 admirateur. 
 
 fem. 
 actrice, 
 admiratrice, 
 
 actor, actress ; 
 admirer. 
 
 
 
 * But concret, complete discret, indiscret, inquiet, incomplet, pret, 
 replet, secret, suref, form tbeir feminine by changing ef into (te, and ; 
 make coficrcte, complete, &c 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 63 
 
 86. 3. Tliosp that indicate opposition or comparison, 
 take only an e mute, and follow the second rule : as, 
 
 masc. fevi. 
 
 anterieur, anterieure, anterior ^ 
 meilleur, meilleure, better. 
 
 EXERCISE XIT. 
 
 She is decent. This house is well situated. I'his pear is too 
 Cette maison, /. bien situ6. poire, /. trop 
 
 ripe. She is tall and well formed. This story is very 
 niur. grand fait. histoire,/. trfia 
 
 entertaining. This person is very unsteady. This mountain 
 atnusant. personne,/. l^ger. montagne,/ 
 
 IS steep. This road is not very safe. The door is not open. 
 escarp6. route,/. sur. porta,/. ouvert. 
 
 This room is dark. This street is too narrow. It is an ancient 
 chambre,/. obscur. rue,/. 6troit. Ce 
 
 custom. She is a^ gpod actress. His memory will be immortaV 
 coutume,/. Ce • acteur. Sa m^moire,/. immortel. 
 
 His manners are natural. The engagement was warm. That is 
 inani6re,/. na'if. action,/. vif. ••Voiia.-- 
 
 an 2original "thought. This cloth is the best of all. They are 
 neuf pens^e,/. 6toffe,/. f.pl. Ce 
 
 ^delusive 'promises. He seduces by his 2fawning ^manners, 
 des trompour promesse, /. s^duit flatteur 
 
 The delightful valley of Tempe is in Thessaly. She is deaf 
 d^licieux valine,/. Temp6 Tliessaiie. sourd 
 
 and dumb, 
 muet. 
 
 87. The following adjectives form their feminine 
 irregularly, and must be learned separately. Some of them 
 have no feminine, others have no masculine : 
 
 MASCUXIITE. FEMININE. 
 
 absons absoute absolved 
 
 bailleur bailleresse a lessor 
 
 bas basse loro 
 
 he\, before a vowel or h mute • ■ • T^^^^ '-^"^ 
 
 b^iiin b^nigne benign 
 
 fcisch^, {said of eggs) rotten and broken 
 
 bin lie blanche whitt 
 
 Ino masc. blette overripe 
 
 l''"^""^ • {boSss^'iii^ie;™;^'^;™;^;,^::^"^-^^'^'^ 
 
 ['■ailtic caduqne decrepid 
 
 '."" >"nsc. cantatrice a celebrated songstress 
 
 [•^^s-..' casse hoarse. Woken 
 
 I 
 
64 COLLOT-S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 MASCULINE. FEMIXIXE. 
 
 ^^^^^^""^ ''""'«'■{ SasIeJ^V^in'p^e^ai'.tV/ei:::}^''"^'-"' 
 
 cb&tain nvt-brown 
 
 coi coite still, snug 
 
 defendeur defenderesse defendant 
 
 demandeur demanderesse plaintiff 
 
 dispos active, cheerful 
 
 doux douce siceet 
 
 drSle f drole queer 
 
 \ dr61esse a worthless creature ^ 
 
 enchanteur enchanteresse delightful ' 
 
 6pais ■ epaisse tiick 
 
 pxpr6s expresse express 
 
 fot fop 
 
 faux: fausse false 
 
 lavori favorite favourite 
 
 fol, before a vowel or h vivte • • • • 1 ^ „ . 
 
 foJ... r°"« ""'^ 
 
 ^fraia,- fraiche fresh 
 
 franc francTie frank 
 
 gentil gentiTIe genteel ^ 
 
 gouverneur governor- -gouvernante goierriess 
 
 eras ?rass§ fat 
 
 Grec CTfecque Greek : 
 
 gros grosse big • 
 
 jouvenceau- --a lad, a stripling- jouvencelle a lass 
 
 jumeau jumelle twin 
 
 Tas • • • • ittsse • ' tired 
 
 long longue long , 
 
 maitre master- -maitresse mistress 
 
 malin maljgne malignant 
 
 metis m^tisse mongrel 
 
 mol, before a vowel or h mute ■ • ") ,, „ -, 
 
 moil-... I"'""^ ^''-^^ 
 
 mulitre mulitresse mulatto 
 
 nouveau... • ••••••••• Inouvelle new 
 
 nouvel, before a vowel or n mute 3 
 
 nul nulle none 
 
 paillet, (said of wine) pale 
 
 pareil pareille like 
 
 Pauvre-; •; {Pauvresse'.'--"-"----"--^}^'''''"'*"^^ 
 
 p^cheur p^p heresse a sinner 
 
 X>rifix ■■ pr?fixe prefixed i 
 
 prof6s monk- -professe nvn 
 
 public publique public ' 
 
 r^sous melted, resolved 
 
 ^jfljix rousse red 
 
 • ^ fip .- s?c5^ drtf 
 
 serviteur ser^nte servant 
 
 -. sot^ s otte • sillv J 
 
 t"?moin TSmbin witness ' 
 
 tiers tierce third 
 
 tors torse ticisted 
 
 traitre traitor- -traitresse traitress i 
 
 -■ Turc TuiOUg. - Ti/rkisk 
 
 " vengeur vengeresse revengeful - 
 
 vermeil vermeilte Urely red 
 
 vieil, before a vowel or h mute- lyjgjjig ^14 
 
 vieux J 
 
 vieillot vieilloite eldisk 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. G5 
 
 EXERCISE XIII. 
 
 The grass is very thick. That soup is very good, but too fat. 
 
 herbe,/. soupe,/. mais trop 
 
 It is a foolish undertaking. There is no truth in all that. This 
 
 sot entreprise, /. II u' y a nul v^rit^, /. dans tout cela. 
 water is not clean. It is a 2very ^silly 'history. It is in the newest 
 eau,/. net. Ce fol /. di 
 
 fashion. It is a fine statue. The law is express upon that point, 
 .node,/. beau /. loi,/. m. 
 
 He lives in a state of luxurious idleness. This wax is not very 
 
 vit dans — — mou oisivet^,/. cire,/. 
 
 vvnite. She is as fresh as a rose. The paint on that wainscot 
 — comma /. peinture, /. de lambris,?« 
 
 is not dry. His answer is a mere evasion. The th'mg is public. 
 
 r6ponse,/. franc d^faite, /. chose,/. 
 
 1 hat plant possesses a ^pernicious 'property. She is of a ^benevolent 
 
 herbe,/. a malin quality, /. a — b^nin 
 
 'character. The Avenging 'thunderbolt smote that impious wretch, 
 humeur,/. vengeur foudre,/. frappa imjue, rw. — 
 
 He ^extended to 'us a protecting hand. This woman is jealous and 
 
 tendit — nous protecteur main,/. jaloux 
 
 deceitful. His temper is mild. This colour is too red. These 
 faux. Son humeur,/. doux. couleur, /. roux. 
 
 old clothes are good for nothing, 
 hardes,/. ne h rien. 
 
 OF THE FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. 
 
 88. General Rule. Every adjective forms its p^ral 
 by the simple addition of s : as bon^ Ions ; bonne^ bonnes. 
 
 89. This rule is without exception, as it regards the 
 feminine termination ; but the masculine has the three fol- 
 lowing exceptions. 
 
 90. 1. Adjectives ending in s or x, do not change 
 their termination : as, gros, gfas, heureux. 
 
 9L 2. Those ending in aw, take x : as beau, beaux ; 
 nouveau, nouveaux. 
 
 92: 3. Some adjectives ending in al change this termi- 
 Ination into aux ; as, egal, egaux ; general, generav^ : 
 jothers take only s; as, fatal, fatals ; nasal, nasals: some 
 'have no plural-, as, menial, vocal, &c. 
 
Ga COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 EXERCISE XIV. 
 
 They are en\ious and jealous. Those fowls are big and fat 
 
 Us jaloiix. poulet 
 
 Owls are 2frightfuPbirds. There are some beautiful jewels 
 
 art. JlihovL des hideux oiseau. •■Voiia.-- de beau bijou. 
 
 The two new operas have succeeded. Men an 
 
 deux nouveau ont r^ussi. art. ne 
 
 2only lequal in the infirmities of nature. The ^genera 
 
 par art. 
 
 'officers are assembled. This fruit is excellent. His proficiency 
 assemble. m. pi. sont Ses progr^s, m. pi 
 
 is slow, but solid. All his friends have been very glad to ^set 
 soiii solide. ami €t€ bien aise de voij 
 
 him. Those ladies are tired with walking. You have powerfa, 
 le. las de marcher. avez de , 
 
 eneniies, but their efforts will be vain and useless. The four 2cardi- 
 I'Miieini, leurs seront inutile. quatre 
 
 nal 'points are the east, west, south and north 
 orient, Occident, sud nord. 
 
 OF THE DETERMIXATIVE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 93. There are four kinds of Determinative Adjectives 
 the JWrneraJ.) Demonstrative^ Possessive^ and Indefinite. 
 
 94. I. The JSumeral are those which determine thf 
 signification of the substantive, by adding to it an idea of 
 number, or order. 
 
 95. There are two sorts of numeral adjectives: the 
 Cardinal and Ordinal. 
 
 96. The Cardinal are those which express the num^ 
 ber : as, «n, deux^ trois^ quatre^ &c. ; one, tAvo, three, 
 four, &c. 
 
 97. The Ordinal are those which mark the order, oi 
 rank : as, premier^ second^ iroisienie, quatrieme. Sec. ; first 
 second, third, fourth. Sec. 
 
 98. 2. The Demonstrative are those which determine 
 the signification of the substantive, by giving to it the idea 
 of indication. These adjectives are : ce, cet^ celte, ces : as, 
 
 ce soldat, *kis soldier ; 
 
 cet enfant, this childs 
 
GRAMxMAR AND EXERCISES. ^T^'' '^ 
 
 rf-tkyV*^" 
 
 cette femme, Mi5 woman ,• 
 ces animaux, ^Aese animals. 
 
 99. 3. The Possessive are those which relate to pos- 
 session or property. These adjectives are 
 
 7/1. 
 
 /• 
 
 pl. 
 
 m.4-/. 
 
 V 'a. '^>Vt ^' -t'^ ^^ 
 
 mon, 
 ton, 
 son, 
 notre. 
 
 ma, 
 ta, 
 sa, 
 notre, 
 
 mes, 
 tes, 
 ses, 
 nos, 
 
 my. 
 
 thy. 
 
 his, her, its. 
 
 our. 
 
 O-riAn-Xt ^i<^>'>v\.J 
 
 votre, 
 leur, 
 
 votre, 
 leur, 
 
 vos, 
 leurs. 
 
 your, 
 their. 
 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 >' Q22*' These adjectives, in French, always agree in gen 
 III der and number with the object possessed^ and not with 
 J; the possessor, as in English, for which reason they must 
 be repeated before every noun : as, 
 
 Man pere, ma mere et mes My father, mother and bra- 
 
 freres sont a la campagne, avec thers are in the country with 
 
 vos amis et leurs enfants. your friends and their children. 
 
 Mon cousin est alle consoler 5a My cousin is gone to conwlc 
 
 sojur, qui a perdu son fils. his sister, who has lost her son. 
 
 lOijj Mon, ton, son, instead of ma, ta, sa, are used be- 
 fore a noun feminine beginning wim a vowel or h mute : 
 thus, mon ame, my soul ; ton humtur, thy humour ; son 
 amitie, his friendship, must be saic*) instead of ma ame, ta 
 humeur, sa amitie. 
 
 J 02. 4. The Indefinite are thoae which express then, 
 subjects in an indefinite or general manner. These adjec- 
 tives are : 
 
 EXERCISE. XV. 
 
 'JMy principles, my love of retirement, mv taste for 
 
 < principe, gout, m. pour art. retraite, /. amour, m. 
 
 jevery thing that is connected with learning, and my detestation 
 
 , >out ce qui •■••tient t art. ins '^c\ljn, h asp. hoiine,^ 
 
 \\ 
 
 chaque. 
 
 every. 
 
 quelque, 
 
 some. 
 
 nul, 
 
 no. 
 
 plusieurs, 
 
 several. 
 
 pas un. 
 
 not one* 
 
 tel. 
 
 such. 
 
 aucun. 
 
 any. 
 
 quel, 
 
 what. 
 
 meme. 
 
 same. 
 
 quelconque. 
 
 whatever. 
 
 tout, 
 
 all. 
 
 
 
68 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 of all spirit of party, every thing has induced me to prefer a 
 pour esprit parti, tout a port6 preterer — 
 
 life passed in the closet, to the 2active 'life of the world. Do not 
 art. — de — cabinet, m. — 
 
 think, my daughter, that thy candour, thy ingenuousness, thy taste, 
 pense, que /. /. gout, t/i. 
 
 so delicate and so refined, and even thy graces, can shelter 
 
 d^licat fin, mfime puissent raettre i 1' abri 
 
 thee from censure. His wit, his talents, his honesty, and 
 
 de art. f. esprit, in. honnetete, 
 
 even his good nature, make him beloved by every body. Our 
 
 bonhomie, /. font aimer de tout le monde. 
 
 constancy and our efforts will, 2at last 'surmount all obstacles. 
 
 /. — enfin surmonteront art. 
 
 I see nothing that can be censured in your conduct. Their 
 
 ne vois rien que on puisse reprendre dans conduit-e. 
 
 taste for the fantastical, the monstrous, and the marvellous, 
 
 bizarre, m. monslrueux, m. merveilleui, m. 
 
 gives to all their compositions, although very fine in themselves, an 
 donne /. quoique en elles-memes, 
 
 air of deformity, which shocks at first sight. Every age has 
 m. difformit6, qui choque i art. coup-d' ceil, m. a 
 
 its pleasures; every condition has its charms. He wiD submit 
 
 6tat, m. charms. ne veut se soumettre 
 
 to no authority whatever. Several historians have related that 
 d. aucun autorite,/. historiens ont racont6 
 
 action in the same manner. Man fears to ^see ^himself such i 
 
 /. de /- art. craint de voir se que 
 
 he is, because he is not such as he ought to be. Great crimes * 
 
 parce que devrait etre. art. m 
 
 are always preceded by some other crimes. Kot one of all those 
 Eont pr6c6d6 de — Nul w 
 
 who 2went 'there has returned. Not one believes that intelligence, 
 qui ont 6t6 y ne en est revenu. ne croit nouvelle, /. 
 
 You have no means of succeeding in that affair. This'r 
 ne avez moyen, m. r^ussir dans /. 
 
 poem is the same as that I was 2mentioning to 'you. AH 
 
 po6me, m. que celui dont ai parle — 
 
 the ^celestial 'bodies are in motion. What people of anti- 
 
 celeste corps en mouvement. peuple, m. art. 
 
 quity ever had better laws than the Egyptians! 
 a eu de loi,/. que Egyptien? 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 69 
 
 AGREEMENT OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE SUB- 
 STANTIVE. 
 
 103. Rule 1. The adjective always agrees in gender 
 and number with the substantive to which it relates : as, 
 de beaux jardins, Jine gardens. 
 
 de belles promenades, Jine walks. 
 
 ^04) Rule 2. When the adjective relates to two sub- 
 stamives singular of the same gender, it must be put in the 
 plural, and agree with them in gender : as, 
 
 Le roi et le berger sont egaux The king and the shepherd are 
 apres la mort. equal after death. 
 
 y /lQ^ Rule 3. When two substantives, to which the ad- 
 jective relates, are of different genders, the adjective is to 
 be put in the masculine plural : as, 
 
 Mon pere et ma mere sont Mi/ father and mother are con- 
 contens, . tented. ,. . , . 
 
 EXERCISE XVI. 
 
 These hills are covered with trees loaded with fruit already 
 
 coteau, m. couvert de arbre, m. charg6 m. pi. dej^ 
 
 ripe. A pure stream rolls its ^limpid 'water through the 
 mur. Clair ruisseau, m. roule limpide crista! ^ 
 
 midst of meadows enamelled with flowers. Every thing interests 
 milieu prairie,/. ^maill6 fieur. Tout int^res&e 
 
 the heart in this abode which is full of charms. Fly, ^incon- 
 coeur, TO. s^jour, TO. — — plein attrait. Fuyez, iiicoiv- 
 
 siderate 'youth, fly from the 'enchanting ^allurements of a 2vain 
 
 sid6r6 jeunesse, /. — enchanteur attrait, to. 
 
 iworld : its ^perfidious 'sweets are a 2slow 'poison, which 
 monde, m. ses perfide douceur, /. lent to. 
 
 would destroy in your soul the noble enthusiasm of 
 
 d^truirait dans &me,/. enthousiasnae, m. art. 
 
 goodness, and the precious seeds of ^sublime 'virtues. 
 
 bien, m. germe, m. art. art. 
 
 Uprightness and piety are much esteemed, even by the 
 
 Droiture,/. art. pi^te,/. tr6s estiin6, meme de 
 
 wicked. A man in sthe 4]:nost ^elevated, and 
 
 m^chant, pi. — art. dans ^lev^, ^art. '^^tat 
 
 a man in ^the ^most ^obscure Zgituation, are equally 
 
 — art. obscur 'art. 6tat, to. ^galement 
 
ro 
 
 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 precious in the eyes of God. Pilpay and Confucius are verj t 
 a Dieu. ! 
 
 celebrated among the nations of Asia. His probity and 
 
 c616bre parmi peuple, m. on-t. Asie. f. son 
 
 disinterestedness are known every where. The love of life, 
 d^sint^ressement, m. connu partout. amour art. 
 
 and the fear of death are natural to man. 
 
 crainte, /. art. mort,/. naturel art. art. 
 
 Ignorance and self-love are equally presumptuous. My 
 
 /'. art. amour-propre pr^somptueux. { 
 
 sister and brother were very attentive to the instructions of j 
 
 mon ont ^t6 
 
 their masters, 
 maitre. 
 
 NUMBERS. 
 
 106. Numbers are dirided into six classes, viz. : Car- 
 dinal, Ordinal, Collective, Adverlial, Distributive, and 
 Proportional. 
 
 J^''ombres Cardinal 
 
 Cardinaux. Numbers. 
 
 un, une 1 
 
 deux 2 
 
 trois 3 
 
 quatre 4 
 
 cinq 5 
 
 Bix 6 
 
 sept 7 
 
 huit 8 
 
 neuf 9 
 
 dix 10 
 
 onze 11 
 
 douze 12 
 
 treize 13 
 
 quatorze 14 
 
 quinze 15 
 
 seize 16 
 
 dix-sepl 17 
 
 dix-huit 18 
 
 dix-neuf 19 
 
 vingt 20 
 
 vingt et un 21 
 
 vinsrt-deux, &;c. 22 
 
 trente 30 
 
 trente et un, &c. 31 
 
 quarante iO^ 
 
 quarante et un, &c. 41 
 
 cinquanle 50 
 
 cinquanle et un, &c. 51 
 
 soixante 60 
 
 soixante et un, &c. 61 
 
 goixante et dix- • 70 
 
 eoixante et onze 71 
 
 Boi^ante dou^e. &c. 72 
 
 ituatre-vingt • 80 
 
 ^''ombres Ordinal 
 
 Ordinanx. Kiuiibers. 
 
 premier, premiere 1st. 
 
 deuxifime, second, seconds 2«/. 
 
 troisi^me 3t/. 
 
 quatrifime 4f/i. 
 
 cicquifime 5th. 
 
 sixi6me • •• : 6th. 
 
 f eptidme 7/ A. 
 
 Imiti^me 8/ A . 
 
 neuvi6me 9th. 
 
 dixi^me lOth. 
 
 onzi6me Uth. 
 
 douzieme 12r A 
 
 treizifeme I3ih. 
 
 quartorzifeme I4rth. 
 
 quinzi6me 15/A. 
 
 seizifime IPih. 
 
 dLx-septiSme 17^' . 
 
 dix-huiti6me IS:, 
 
 dLx-neuvieme IPr 
 
 vinsti6me 20? 
 
 vinet et uni^me 21.- 
 
 vine1-deuxi6tae, &:c. 22 
 
 trentieme SC//;. 
 
 trente et unifeme, <fcc. 31st 
 
 quaranti^me 40^,';. 
 
 quarante et unidme, &c. 4lff. 
 
 cinquar.ti6me 50ih. 
 
 cinquante et uni^me, &c. 5L^f. 
 
 soixantifeme 60r; 
 
 soixante et unieme. &c. 61.- 
 
 soixante et di.\i6nie 70^; 
 
 soixante et onzi^nie 7].--*. 
 
 soixante-dniizi6me,&c. T^d- 
 
 quatre-vingn^me 8(1/A 
 
GBAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 Komhres 
 
 Cardinaux. 
 quaire-vingt-un, &;c. • • 
 
 qiiatre-vingt-dix 
 
 quatre-vingt-onze, &c. 
 
 cent 
 
 cent-un, &x. 
 
 Cardinal 
 M umbers. 
 
 81 
 
 90 
 
 91 
 
 100 
 
 101 
 
 deux cents 200 
 
 mille 1,000 
 
 deux mille, &c 2,000 
 
 dix mille 10,000 
 
 million 1,000,000 
 
 JVombres Ordinal 
 
 Ordinaux. Numbers. 
 
 quatre-vingt-uni6me, &c. Hist. 
 
 quatre-vingt-dixifime QOth. 
 
 quatre-vingt-onzi6me, &.c. 9\st. 
 
 chTi^me^: . TTT" 1 00(//.. 
 
 cent-uni6me, &c. lOU-f. 
 
 deux centi^me WOtk. 
 
 milli6nie lOQUth. 
 
 deux milli6me, <fec. 2000</t. 
 
 dix milli6me 10,000fA. 
 
 millioni6me millionth. 
 
 Jfovibres Collective 
 
 Collectifs. Numbers. 
 
 une couple a couple. 
 
 une demi douzaine half a dozen. 
 
 une huitaine a week. 
 
 une neuvaine nine days of prayer. 
 
 une dixaine half a score. 
 
 une douzaine a dozen. 
 
 deux douzaines, <fec two dozen, ^-c. 
 
 une qulnzaine a fortnight. 
 
 tfhe douzaine et ") . .5"' dozen and a 
 
 demie, &c. j (. halfSfC. 
 
 une vingtaine a score. 
 
 urie""'tr"entaine, ") fa score and a 
 
 &:c. S""\ halfSfc. 
 
 une centaine Jtoe score. 
 
 un millier one thousand. 
 
 deux milliers, «fcc.- -two thousand, ifc. 
 
 JVombres Distributive 
 
 Distributifs. Numbers. 
 
 la moitie the half. 
 
 un tiers one third. 
 
 deux tiers t7co thirds. 
 
 un quart one quarter. 
 
 deux quarts tico qvarters. 
 
 un cinqui6me one fifth. 
 
 deux cinquidmes two fifths. 
 
 un sixifime one sixth. 
 
 deux sixi6mes tv:o .tiith.':. 
 
 un septi6rne one. .serenth. 
 
 deux septi^mes, Scc.-two serai>ths,i^-c. 
 
 JVombres Proportional 
 
 Proportionnels. Numbers. 
 
 double double. 
 
 triple triple. 
 
 quadruple fourfold. 
 
 quintuple -fircfold. 
 
 sextuple sixfold. 
 
 septuple sevenfold. 
 
 octuple lightfidd. 
 
 nonuple ninefold. 
 
 decuple, &c. tejifi'ld, ^t. 
 
 centuple, &;c. hundredfold, ifc. 
 
 JVombres Adverbial 
 
 Adverbiaux. Numbers. 
 
 promi6rement first. 
 
 en premier lieu in the first place. 
 
 secondement secondly. 
 
 troisidmement thirdly. 
 
 luatri^mement fourthly. 
 
 cinquifimement, &c. fifthly, ^c. 
 
 C^Tjy When mentioning the days of the moiuh., the 
 French make use of the cardinal instead of the ordinal 
 number, and say, le onze (f Avril^ not le onzieme^ &.c. ; 
 except, however, that instead of Z' wtz du moi.s^ they say, 
 le premier du mois^ the first day of the month. 
 
 108. Mille never takes s in the plural; thus, v'mat 
 mille^ is twenty thousand, and not vingt milles^ whicli 
 would mean twenty miles; and when mentioning the 
 Christian era, they curtail this word into mi/, and write, 
 for example, V an mil hull cent trente hidt^ and never /- an 
 
 109. There are many other numerical expressions, 
 
 1 
 
I ~ ■ 
 
 72 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 used in poetry, music, games, &c. : as, distique^ tercet^ 
 quatrain,, sixain, Jmitain, &c. ; solo, duo, trio, quatuor 
 quinque, quinte, octave, &c. ; beset, sonnez, &c. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 110. A pronoun is a word substituted for a noun. 
 
 111. There are six kinds of pronouns : the Personal, 
 Possessive, Relative, Absolute, Demonstrative, and /»t- 
 dejlnite. 
 
 SECTION L 
 
 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 112. Personal Pronouns are used for the names cf 
 
 srsons, or 
 
 things 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 Subject. 
 
 Object. 
 
 
 Subject. 
 
 
 Object. 
 
 C fje 
 
 te 
 
 connais, 
 
 I 
 
 know 
 
 thee. 
 
 ■iitu 
 
 ^iil 
 
 me 
 
 conduis, 
 
 thou 
 
 leadest 
 
 me. 
 
 le 
 
 voit, 
 
 he 
 
 sees 
 
 him. 
 
 « telle,/. 
 
 la 
 
 cherehe, 
 
 she 
 
 seeks 
 
 her. 
 
 Tnous 
 "« 1 vous 
 
 vous 
 
 croyons, 
 
 we 
 
 believe 
 
 you. 
 
 nous 
 
 persuadez, 
 
 you 
 
 persuade 
 
 us. 
 
 e1"=^ 
 
 les 
 
 punis&ent, 
 
 they 
 
 punish 
 
 them. 
 
 Lelles,/. 
 
 les 
 
 admirent, 
 
 they 
 
 admire 
 
 them^ 
 
 niS/ The pronouns me and te, are changed into moi 
 armfoz, when put after the verb : as, crcis-vaoi, je te con- 
 nais, toi et ton fr ere ; 
 
 1 14. And also when put before it, to give more strength 
 to the phrase : as, moi, je dis ; toi, tu ne vois rien. 
 
 115. When the verb has no regimen direct, the objec- 
 tive pronouns, le, la, les, are changed thus : 
 
 Subject. Object. Subject. Object, 
 
 je lui parle (a lui), I speak to him. 
 
 je lui donne (a elle), I give to her. 
 
 je leur ecris (a cux, or a elles), I write to them 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 73 
 
 116. The same pronouns, ?e, Za, Zes, when put after 
 the verb, are changed thus : 
 
 Je le felicite, lui et ses amis. I congratulate him, and his 
 
 friends. 
 Je la vois, elk et ses enfants. I see her, and her children. 
 
 Je les meprise, eux (or dies) I despise them, and their ac- 
 et leurs complices. complices. 
 
 EXERCISE XVII. 
 
 I cast my eyes upon the objects which ^surrounded 'me, and 
 
 portai vue,/. objel qui environnaient me, je 
 
 eaw with pleasure that all was calm and tranquil. My father is 
 vis que ^tait calme tranquille. 
 
 satisfied with me. We have told the . truth. If we desire to 
 content de avons dit v6rit6,/. d^sirons 
 
 be happy, we must not deviate from the path of 
 
 devons nous dcarter sentier, m. art. 
 
 virtue. Thou art greater than I, and from thee I have 
 /. es moi, toi 
 
 2at once 'learned humility and wisdom. I was telling 
 en m6me temps appris art. f. art. f. disais 
 
 thee that dancing is to the body what taste is to the 
 
 te que art. danse,/. m. ce que art. m, 
 
 mind. You ^have Sshown 'us great talents; when 2will 
 
 montr6 de m. quand mon- 
 
 you show 'us great virtues] How Amiable 'you 2are ! How 
 irerez-vous Que 6tes ! 
 
 good you are to have thought of us! It was said of you the 
 
 de vousetre occup6 • -on disait- • 
 
 other day, that you intended to spend a winter in London, 
 autre jour, vous vous proposiez de passer m. h LondreSj 
 
 in order to see every thing ^curious 'which ^that ^city ^prejents. 
 
 pour-"' voir tout ce que ville offre de. 
 
 YoM will go with him. They received kindly neither him 
 
 irez On ne nous accueillit ni 
 
 nor me. You ^blame 'them, they who have ^only 'followed 
 ni blamez qui ne ont que siiivi 
 
 your counsels. When I 2saw 'them, they were at home, 
 conseil. Lorsque vis 6taient chez elles. 
 
 117. The pronouns eZ/e, elles, eux, lui, leur, used as 
 regimen indirect, generally apply to persons only. 
 
 118. When speaking of things, these pronouns are to 
 be replaced by en and ?/, which are used both for persons 
 and things. Thus, we say, in speaking 
 
74 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 of a poet: Que pensez-vous de lui ? What do you think of hint, ? 
 
 of his works : Qu' en pensez vous? What do you think of them ? 
 
 of a woman : Je m' approchai d' e//e. I approached her. 
 
 of a table: Jem' en approchai. I approached it. 
 
 of men : Je parlais d' eux. I was speaking of them. 
 
 of books: J' en parlais. I was speaking of them. 
 
 of women : Je pensais a elles. I was thinking of them. 
 
 of flowers : J' ?/ pensais. 1 was thinking of them. 
 
 119. Fand en are always put before the verb, except 
 vvith the imperative affirmative. 
 
 L20^ The pronoun se, of the third person, and com- 
 mon to both numbers and genders, is used for the conju- 
 gation of pronominal verbs : as, 
 
 II se donne des louanges. He gives himself praises, 
 
 Ella se flatte. She flatters herself 
 
 lis se sont deshonores. They have disgraced theni- 
 
 selves. 
 Elles se sont flattees. Tliey have flattered them- 
 
 selves. 
 
 Q21^ Se is always put before the verb. 
 
 J 22. Soi.) pronoun singular of the third person, and 
 of both genders, is generally used in phrases where there 
 is an indeterminate pronoun either expressed or under- 
 stood : as, 
 
 Chacun tire a soi. Every one draws to himself. 
 
 N' aimer que soi, c' est n' etre To love only ourselves, is to be 
 bon a rien. good for nothing. 
 
 123. Soi may also apply to things : as, 
 
 Le yice est odieux de soi. Vice is odious in itself. 
 
 La vertu est aimable en soi. Virtue is amiable in itself. 
 
 EXERCISE XVIir. 
 
 They speak a great deal of it. That is a 2Jelicate 'affair; the 
 
 On ••beaucoup-- Ce 
 
 success, of it is doubtful. This tree is very high; do not 
 Buccds, m. douteux. arbre, in. haut ; — 
 
 2climb upon Ut to gather its fruit, you would fall. See 
 
 montez — y pour en cueillir lea toinheriez. Voye* 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 them ; I ^consent to 'it, but do not trust them. That is a fine 
 
 ••consens-- — vous fiez y. Ce 
 
 appointment : he had ^l^ng 2aspired to 'it. In a thousand 
 
 charge,/. — ^depuis long-temps • -aspirait' • — ^ mille 
 
 instances we do not watch sufficiently over ourselves. The glory 
 occasions on — veille assez sur soi. /. 
 
 of the world passes away in an instant. He gives himself a great 
 
 m. se ^vanouit en donne se 
 
 deal of trouble. She tires herself. People should very seldom 
 
 peine. lasse se. On doit rarement 
 
 speak of themselves. We must take upon ourselves the care 
 
 On doit sur soin, m. 
 
 of our own affairs. We must help one another ; it is the law 
 
 ses propres affaires. '-Ilfaut se entr'aider;-- • ce 
 
 of nature. 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 124. Possessive pronouns mark the possession of per- 
 sons or things which ihey represent. Some relate to one 
 person, and others to several persons. 
 
 125. Those which relate to one person, are : 
 
 m. sing. f. sing: m. phtr. f. plur. 
 
 1st. le mien, la mienne, les miens, les miennes, mine. 
 
 2d. le tien, la tienne, les tiens, les tienncs, thine. 
 
 3d. le sien, la sienne, les siens, les siennes, his, hers, its, 
 
 126. Those which relate to several persons, are : 
 
 m. sing. f. sing. pi. m. 8^ f. 
 
 1st. le notre, la notre, les notres, ours. 
 
 2d. le votre, la votre, les votres, yours. 
 
 3d. le leur, la leur, les leurs, theirs. 
 
 The following are examples : 
 
 Votre pere et le mien etaient Your father and mine were 
 amis. friends. 
 
 •C est votre avantage et le It is your advantage and 
 notre. ours. 
 
 EXERCISE XIX. 
 
 Is it your temper or hers, that 2hinders lyou from living well 
 ce humeur,/. qui empdche de vivre 
 
76 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 together 1 If it be yours, it 2is ^easy for 'you to remedy it, 
 ensemble? ce est il ais^ — de porter remade y, 
 
 by mastering your temper; if it be hers, redouble your ccm- 
 en • -prenantsurvousineme:" redoublez de — 
 
 plaisance, attention, and good behaviour; it is very seldom 
 
 de de proc6d6, m. pi. il tr6s rare 
 
 that this method proves unsuccessful. If my friends had served 
 moyen, m. • ••ne reussisse pas- • • avaient servi 
 
 me with the same zeal as yours, it is very certain that I 
 
 z61e, 771. que il trfis sm 
 
 should have succeeded : but 3'ours have been all fire, and mine all 
 ■ • • aurais • • • r^ussi : €t€ de 
 
 ice. All the pictures which we expected from Rome are 
 de glace. tableaux, vi. attendions 
 
 arrived : there are some that are a little damaged ; but yours, his, 
 
 arrives: il y en a qui peu endommages ; 
 
 and mine, are in good condition. We know perfectly well what 
 en 6tat, vi. eavons — quels 
 
 are your amusements in town, and I assure you we are 
 
 a. art. f. assure que sommes 
 
 very far from Envying 'you ^them ; but if you knew ours 
 bien 6loign^e envier connaissiez 
 
 in the country, it is most likely you would not be long 
 
 a. campagne, /. il y a toute apparence que • -ne tarderiez pas- • 
 
 m ^giving 'them the preference. You have opened your heart to me 
 a, donner leur /. ouvert 
 
 with that noble frankness which 2so Swell 'becomes an honest man.* 
 
 franchise,/, qui sied t. honndte 
 
 this confidence ^well 'deserves mine 
 confiance, /. m^rite 
 
 SECTION m. 
 
 OF THE RELATIVE PROXOUXS. 
 
 127. Relative pronouns are those which relate to a pre- 
 ceding noun, or pronoun, called the antecedent. In the 
 phrase, Z' homme qui joue^ the man who plays, qui relates 
 to the substantive homme : V homme is then the antecedent 
 to the pronoun relative qui. 
 
 ("who .' Dieu qui voit God v:ho sees 
 
 . j tout everything. 
 
 * ' ] which: Les chevaux oui The horses which 
 
 I 
 
 qui 
 courent. are running. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 77 
 
 
 ^of which: 
 
 L* insulte dant 
 
 The insult of 
 
 
 
 vous vous plaignez. 
 
 which you com- 
 
 dont, 
 
 whose : 
 
 La nature dont 
 
 plain. 
 
 Nature whose se- 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 nous ignorons les 
 
 crets are unknown 
 
 de qui 
 
 
 secrets. 
 
 to us. 
 
 * 
 
 of whom : 
 
 Les gens de qui 
 
 The people of 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 vous parlez. 
 
 whom you speak. 
 
 
 ''whom : 
 
 L' homme que 
 
 The man whom 
 
 
 
 vous cherchez. 
 
 you seek. 
 
 que. 
 
 which . 
 
 Les lois que nous 
 
 The laius which 
 
 
 L 
 
 observons. 
 
 we observe. 
 
 
 "which : 
 
 C est une condi- 
 
 It is a condition 
 
 lequel, 
 
 
 tion sans laquelle il 
 
 without which he 
 
 laquelle, 
 
 
 ne veut rien faire. 
 
 will do nothing. 
 
 < 
 
 to whom : 
 
 Ceux auxquels il 
 
 Those to whom he 
 
 auxquels, 
 
 
 s' est adresse ont 
 
 applied have refus- 
 
 auxquelles, 
 
 L. 
 
 refuse de le defen- 
 dre. 
 
 ed to protect him. 
 
 
 "what : 
 
 J' ignore ce a quoi 
 
 lam ignorant of 
 
 
 
 il pense. 
 
 what he is think- 
 
 quoi, 
 
 why: 
 
 La cause, pour 
 
 ing. 
 
 The reason why 
 
 
 
 quoi on 1' a arrete, 
 
 he was arrested is 
 
 
 L 
 
 estconnue. 
 
 known. 
 
 128. Q?u, dont., que, are of both genders and both 
 numbers. Lequel is a compound of quel, and the article 
 le, la, les, with which it coalesces in the following man- 
 ner: 
 
 m. sing. f. sing-. m. plur. f. plur. 
 
 lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles, which. 
 
 duquel, de laquelle, desquels, desquelles, of which. 
 
 auquel, a laquelle, auxquels, auxquelles, to which. 
 
 129. Lequel always agrees in gender and number with 
 its antecedent. Quoi, which sometimes supplies its place, 
 is always governed by a preposition. 
 
 EXERCISE XX. 
 
 The man who sold me these pens is very cunning. The lady of 
 1 a vendu rus6. dame 
 
 ! whom you speak is not handsome. The person to whom X 
 j pailez personne,/. 
 
78 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 wrote %st Jyear has answered me this morning. She 
 
 6crivia art. derniere ann6e r^ponda matin, 7/1. 
 
 will not hear of the lady whom he is going to marry. 
 
 veut entendre parler va--. 6pouser. 
 
 Shun vice, and love that which is just. Men ^generally 
 
 Evitez art. m. aimez juste, art. 
 
 'love him who 2flatters Hhem. Do 2you ^speak of the lady whose 
 aiment celui flatte — parlez 
 
 husband is so avaricious 1 There is nothing for which he ^is inot 
 ruari avare 1 II ne y a rien i soit ne 
 
 fit. -Lying is a vice for which young people 
 
 propre. art, menBonge, m. m. pour art. gens 
 
 ought to have the greatest horror. The table upon which you 
 doivent avoir horreur,/. /. 
 
 write is broken, 
 ecrivez cass6. 
 
 OF THE ABSOLUTE PRONOUNS. 
 
 130. Absolute pronouns are those which have no an- 
 tecedent. They are the five following : 
 
 Cwho: Je vous dirai qui V I will tell you who 
 
 . I a fait. has done it. 
 
 ^'^^^ ] whom: Qui consulterez- Whom will you con- 
 
 {_ vous] sultP 
 
 que, what : Que ferez-vous 1 WJiat will you do ? 
 
 quoi, what : En quoi puis-je vous In what can I serve 
 
 servir 1 you P 
 
 quel, what : II ne sait quel parti He does not know 
 
 prendre. what part to take. 
 
 lequel, which .• Lequel aimez-vous le Which do yx)u like 
 
 mieux % best ? 
 
 131. Qui applies only to persons. f^M^ ^ 
 
 132. Que and quoi relate to things only. ^''^^^J^^ 
 
 133. Que?, masc, quelle., fem. sing.; quels.) masc. 
 quelles.) fem. plur., always precede a substantive, and take 
 its gender and number. 
 
 134. Lequel., duquel., auqucl., &c., are used to mark a 
 distinction between several persons or objects. 
 
' GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 79 
 
 EXERCISE XXI. 
 
 Who can give credit to a young man who does not speak the 
 pent ajouter foi — dit 
 
 truth? Of whom were you speaking, when I came 1 To whom 
 
 v€nt€,f. parliez-vous vins 1 
 
 have you lent my slate 1 Whom do you seek 1 W^hat 
 
 avez pr6t6 ardoisel/. — cherchezi 
 
 are you doing! What do 3you ^ask of 'mel What is 
 
 • ••failes-vous?--« — demandez — 
 
 the name of your father? In what city does he live? Of what 
 
 nom, TO. Dans /. -demeure-t-ill- 
 
 are you speaking 1 What is the country in which he was born ? 
 
 • ••parlez-vous?-"« pays, ?/i. dans est nd'i 
 
 There is in that affair I know not what that I do not understand. 
 ••Ilya-- dans /. sais entends. 
 
 SECTION V. 
 OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 135. Demonstrative pronouns are those which indi- 
 cate, in a precise manner, the persons or things which 
 they represent. They are : 
 
 S. VI. S. f. pi. 7/1. pi. f. 
 
 ce, ce, this, or that ; ce, ce, these. 
 
 celui, celle, this, or that ; ceux, coUes, these, or those. 
 
 celui-ci, celle-ci, this ; ceux-ci, celles-ci, these. 
 
 celni-1^, celle-i&, that; ceux-1^, celles-1^, those. 
 
 cS ZfZ: ;,*ij;}Thesehave„op,„ra,. 
 
 136. Ce is of both genders and both numbers : as, 
 Est-ce la votre plume 1 Is this your pen P 
 
 Sont-ce la vos livres ] Are these your books ? 
 
 ■nSTr^ Celui, celle ; ceux, celles^ when followed by the 
 preposition de, are rendered into English by that, those : 
 as, 
 
 Cette montre ressemble a celle This watch is like that of your 
 
 de votre frere. brother. 
 
 Vos livres, et ceux de votre Your books, and those of your 
 
 soeur, sant dechires. sister, are torn. 
 
 138. When followed by a pronoun relative, these pro- 
 nouns are expressed, in English, by he, she, they, him, her% 
 'htm. that, those : as, 
 
80 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 Celui qui pratique la vertu vit He who practises virtue Uvea 
 
 heureux. happy. 
 
 Vous punissez celui qui n' est You, punish him who is not 
 
 pas coupable. guilty. 
 
 139. Celui-ci, and celui-la^ adopt the gender and num- 
 ber of the substantives whose place they supply. When 
 opposed to each other, celui-ci marks the nearest object, 
 and celui-la the remotest : as, 
 
 Celui-ci plait, mais celui-ld This pleases, but that cap- 
 cajitive. tivates. 
 
 140. Ceci and cela apply only to things. They may 
 be used singly; but when they are opposed to each other, 
 ceci expresses the nearest object, and cela the remotest : a:*, 
 
 Je n' aime point ceci, donnez- / do not like this, give me 
 moi cela. that. 
 
 EXERCISE XXII. 
 
 The disorders of the mind are more dangerous than those of the 
 
 maladie, /. 
 body. Gentleness, affability, and a certain urbanity, distinguish 
 art. douceur,/, art f. distinguent 
 
 the man that frequents polite company ; these are marks 
 
 vit dans art. grand monde, m. art. f. 
 
 by which he is known. He that ^suffers 'himself to be ruled by bis 
 auxquelles on le reconnait. laisse se ••dominer-- 
 
 passions must renounce happiness. You have punished him 
 
 doit renoncer S. art. bonheur, m. pimi 
 
 w ho did not 2{3eserve Ut, and rewarded her who was guilty. We 
 
 — m^ritait le, r6compens6 
 
 ought to pray for them who 2persecute 'us. Of all virtues, that 
 devons prier ners^cutent / 
 
 which 2most 'distinguishes a Christian, is charity. I have 
 
 le plus distingue ce art. f. 
 
 seen the %ing's ipalace, and that of the queen. That gold 
 Sfflrt. palais, m. , 
 
 watch which you have shown me, is not yours, it is that of your 
 montre,/. que montr6e ce 
 
 brother. The body perishes, the soul is immortal; yet all 
 
 p^rit, immortel ; cependant 
 
 our cares are for that, while we neglect this. This is low 
 
 soins, m. tandis que n^gligeons bas - 
 
 and mean, but that is grand and sublime. 
 
 rampant, ; 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 81 
 
 SECTION YI. 
 
 OF THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 141. Indefinite pronouns are th^se which express, in 
 an indefinite or general manner, the persons or things 
 which they represent. These are : 
 
 Cone: On aime d. se flat- One is apt to flatter 
 
 I ter. one's self. 
 
 I \ somebody : Onfrappe ^la porte. Sowebody knocks at 
 
 on, -i the door. 
 
 I I people : On dit tout haut. People say openly. 
 
 ] \ we, or they : Si *1' otivous bl&me, If they blame you, 
 
 [_ on a tort. they are wrong. 
 
 Quiconque est riche Whoever is rich is 
 
 est tout. every thing. 
 
 Quelqu^un m' a dit. Somebody has told 
 me. 
 
 Chacun s' en plaint. Every one complains 
 of him. 
 
 Ne faites pas ft. au- Do not do to others 
 
 trui, ce que vous ne what you would not 
 
 voudriez pas qu' on they should do to you. 
 vous fit. 
 
 I,a fiert6 ne con- Pride becomes no- 
 
 vient a. personne. body. 
 
 Je vous prenais pour / took you for an- 
 
 un autre. other. 
 
 On ne vit jamais JVo such thing waa 
 
 rien de tel. ever seen. 
 
 U un et V autre sont Both are good. 
 bone. 
 
 Tout nous aban- Every thing for- 
 
 donne. sakes us. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIIT. 
 
 If you behave yourself in that manner, what will 2people 'say of you ? 
 vous conduisez ainsi — on dira-t- 
 
 riiey write me word from Ispahan that thou hast left Persia, 
 
 6crit — as quitt6 art. Perse,/. 
 
 I and art now at Paris. One can not read Tele- 
 
 I que tu es actuelleraent ^ peut lire T^16- 
 
 mach us, without becoming better: we there find every where a 
 j maque, devenir meilleur: on y trouve •••partout-- • 
 
 ttiild philosophy, 2nobIe ^and Elevated 'sentiments ; we there find 
 I /. des volt 
 
 I * This /' is placed between the tw^o vowels for the sake of euphony 
 j It has no other use, 
 
 ! f3 
 
 quiconque, 
 
 whoever : 
 
 quelqu'un. 
 
 somebody : 
 
 ebecun. 
 
 every one : 
 
 autrui. 
 
 others : 
 
 personne, 
 
 nobody. 
 
 autre, 
 
 other : 
 
 tel. 
 
 such : 
 
 r un et 1' autre 
 
 , both.- 
 
 tout. 
 
 every thing 
 
B2 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 in every line the effusions of a noble soul, and we admire 
 a chaque ligne ^panchenient beau /. des 
 
 precepts calculated to effect the happiness of the world. Thii 
 jtropre faire m. m. 
 
 speech is addressed to whoever is guilty. Somebody has come 
 .iiscours, m. • s' adresse- • est venu 
 
 to 2spea]j^ to lyou. Every one should, for the sake of his own 
 pour — devrait, — — — propre 
 
 happiness, listen only to the voice of reason and of 
 
 m. ne 6couier que — voix,/. art. f. art. 
 
 truth. lie sees the faults of others, but he ^never mentions 
 /. remarque d^fauts ••■'ne-en 
 
 them. Nobody is certain of living till to-morrow. Do no< 
 ^parle. ne assure vivre — 
 
 speak ill of other people, if you wish that nobody should speak 
 
 parlez mal voulez ne parle 
 
 ill of you. Both serve to the same purpose. You cannot per- 
 servent usage, m. ne sauriez per- 
 
 suade me of any such things All is in God, and God is in all. 
 fluader — rien de — en ' 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 See Introduction, pp. 19 — 22. 
 
 142. The verb expresses the action, or the state of' 
 the subject. When it expresses an action, the person or" 
 thing affected by such action is called the object. 
 
 143. Thus : Pierre punit Jean^ Peter punishes Jolip 
 Here John is the object^ because he suffers the action 
 which Peter performs: Peter is the subject; and punishes 
 IS the verb. 
 
 144. When the verb expresses a state, the word which , 
 marks that state is called the attribute : as, Pierre dart ■ 
 (Pierre est dormant)^ Peter is sleeping. Here, sleeping is 
 the attribute^ because it marks the state in which Peter i«. 
 
 145. The object., when spoken of in its connexion I 
 with verbs, is more properly termed the regimen. Tliere 
 fire two sorts of regimen • the direct^ and indirect. 
 
 i\ 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 83 
 
 146. The regimen direct is so called, because it com- 
 j pletes the signification of the verb without the help of 
 I any other word : as, Pierre ecril une lettre^ Peter writes 
 , a letter. 
 
 i 147. The regimen indirect is that which cannot com- 
 plete the signification of the verb without the aid of a 
 preposition : as, Pierre nuit a Jean^ Peter hurts John. 
 
 148. AH the neuter verbs have only one regimen — the 
 I indirect. There are many active verbs which have both 
 I regimens : as il a fait un present a sa soeur^ he has made 
 ' a present to his sister. 
 
 i 149. Though the greater part of the French verbs are 
 regular^ there are, as in other languages, some that are 
 irregular, and others that are defective. Regular verbs 
 are those which are conjugated conformably to a general 
 standard ; irregular verbs are those which do not conform 
 to a general standard ; and defective verbs are those which 
 want certain tenses, or persons. 
 
 OF CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 150. To conjugate a verb, is to rehearse it with all its 
 different inflections. 
 
 151. The French have four conjugations; which are 
 easily distinguished by the termination of the present 
 tense of the infinitive mood. The 
 
 First ends in -er, as, parler, aimer, donner, Sfc. 
 
 Second -ir, . . finir, sentir, ouvrir, Sfc. 
 
 Third evoir, recevoir, apercevoir, 4"C. 
 
 Fourth -re, . . rendre, plaire, ^c. 
 
 152. The French, like most modern nations, not hav 
 ing a sufficient number of inflections in their verbs to re- 
 present the great variety of their tenses, supply this de- 
 ficiency by the aid of two auxiliary verbs, avoir, to have, 
 and efre, to be. 
 
 153. Those tenses in a verb which are formed by in- 
 '' flections of the present tense of the infinitive mood (which 
 'I is called the root of the verb) are called simple tenses, am], 
 ; of course, are always expressed by a single word. But 
 
 I 
 
 ,1 
 I 
 
84 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 those which are formed by the union of the tenses of the 
 verbs avoir or etre with a participle past, are called com- 
 pound tenses. Thus : avoir, f ai, &c. ; parler, je parle, 
 &c., are simple tenses : but avoir eu^f ai eu; avoir parU, ,, 
 f ai parle, &c., are compound tenses. ' \ 
 
 JYote. — In the conjugations of the verbs in this Gram- 
 mar, the simple tenses are placed in the left, and the 
 compound tenses in the right hand column. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR,TO 
 HAVE, IN THE FOUR FORMS. 
 
 1. AFFIRMATIVE FORM. 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 avoir to have avoir eu to have had 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 ayant having past. 
 
 PAST. ayant eu having had 
 
 eu, m.; eue,/. had 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 j' ai I have j'aieu I have had 
 
 tu as thou hast tu as eu. thou hast had 
 
 il a he has il a eu he has had 
 
 nous avons we have nous avons eu tee have had 
 
 vous avez you have vous avez eu you have had 
 
 ils ont they have ils ont eu they have had 
 
 IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 
 
 j' avals I had j' avals eu I had had 
 
 tu avals thouhadst tu avals eu thou hadst had 
 
 11 avait he had 11 avait eu he had had 
 
 nous avions ice had nous avions eu we had lad 
 
 vous aviez you had vous aviez eu you had had 
 
 ils avalent the.y had ils avaient eu they had had 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 j' ens Ihad j' eus eu I had had 
 
 tu eus thou hadst tu eus eu thou hadst had 
 
 il eut he had 11 eut eu he had had 
 
 nous eumes we had nous eiimes eu we had kid 
 
 vous eutes yo^l had vous e^tes eu you had had 
 
 Us eurent they had ils eurent eu they hud had 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 85 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 j' aurai / shall have j' aurai eu 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
 
 ■I shall 
 
 til auras thou shalt have 
 
 il aura he shall have 
 
 nous aurous we shall have 
 
 vous aurez you shall have 
 
 ils auront- • 
 
 tn auras eu thou shalt 
 
 il aura eu he shall 
 
 nous aureus eu we shall 
 
 vous aurez eu you shall 
 
 they shall 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 j' aurais / should have 
 
 tu aurais thou shouldst have 
 
 il aurait he should have 
 
 r\ous aurions- • • • we should have 
 vous auriez you should have 
 
 they shall have lis auront eu 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 PAST.* 
 
 j' aurais eu / should 
 
 tu aurais eu thou shouldst 
 
 il aurait eu he should 
 
 nous aurions eu we should 
 
 vous auriez eu you should 
 
 have had 
 have had 
 have had 
 have had 
 have had 
 have had 
 
 ils auraient they should have ils auraient eu- 
 
 have had 
 have had 
 have had 
 have had 
 have had 
 they should have had 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 aie have (thou) 
 
 qu' il ait let him have 
 
 ayons let us have 
 
 ayez have (jjou) 
 
 qu' ils aient let them have 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 que j' aie that I may have 
 
 que tu aies- • that thou mayst have 
 
 qu' il ait that he may have 
 
 que nous n.yons- that we may have 
 qne vous ayez- -thatyou may have 
 qu' ils aient- • -that they may have 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 que j' eusse- • • • that Ivdo-ht have 
 que tu ewssesthat thou mig-htst have 
 
 ■^u' il eut that he miffht have 
 
 que nous eussions • • that we mia-ht 
 
 [have 
 ^ue vous eussiez- --that you vnn-ht 
 
 [have 
 lu' ilseu&sent-tAat they might have 
 
 PRETERIT. 
 
 que j' aie eu that I may have Jiad 
 
 que tu aies eu- • -that thou mayst have had 
 
 qu' il ait eu that he may have had 
 
 que nous ayons eu- -that we may have had 
 que vous ayez eu- -that you may have had 
 qu' ils aient eu that they may have had 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 que j' eusse eu that I mighf] 
 
 que tu eusses eu- • • -that thou mightst j 
 
 qu' il eiit eu that he viight "^ 
 
 que nous eussions eu- - -that ice might ["^ 
 
 que vous eussiez eu- • -that you might ^ 
 
 qu' ils eussent eu that they viight j 
 
 2. NEGATIVE FORM. 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 ue pas avoir not to have n' avoir pas eu not to have h 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 n' ayant pas not having n' ayant pas eu not having had 
 
 * J' eusse eu, tic eusses eu, il eut eu, nous eussions eu, vous eussiez 
 €u,ils eussent eu, I should have had, thou shouldst have had, &c., is 
 also used for the Past tense of the Conditional mood. This remark 
 holds good for everj' verb. 
 
A(i 
 
 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 je n' ai pas I have not 
 
 lu n' as pas thou hast not 
 
 il n' a pas he has not 
 
 nous n' avons pas we have not 
 
 vous n' avez pas- •• -you have not 
 ils n' ont pas they have not 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 je n' avals pas I had not 
 
 tu n' avals pas thou hadst nut 
 
 il n' avait pas he had not 
 
 Tious n' avlons pas \ce had not 
 
 vous n' aviez pas you had not 
 
 ils n' avaient pas they had not 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 je n' eus pas I had not 
 
 tu n' eus pas thou hadst not 
 
 il n' eut pas he had not 
 
 nous n' e times pas we had not 
 
 vous n' eutes pas you had not 
 
 lis II' eurent pas they had not 
 
 fi;ture absolute. 
 je n' aural pas- • • -I shall not have 
 tu n' auras pas- thou shalt not have 
 
 11 n' aura pas he shall not have 
 
 nous n'aurons pas we shall not have 
 vous n'aurez pas yoii shall not have 
 ils n' auront pas they shall not have 
 
 preterit indefinite. 
 
 je n' ai pas eu / have 
 
 tu n' as pas eu thou hast 
 
 11 n' a pas eu he has 
 
 nous n' avons pas eu tee have 
 
 vous n' avez pas eu you have 
 
 ils n' ont pas eu they have 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 je n' avals pas eu I had 
 
 tu n' avals pas eu thou hadst 
 
 il n' avait pas eu he had 
 
 nous n' avions pas eu we had 
 
 vous n' aviez pas eu you had 
 
 lis n' avaient pas eu they had 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 je n' eus pas eu I had 
 
 tu n' eus pas eu thou had"* 
 
 11 n' eut pas eu he haa 
 
 nous n' eumes pas eu we had 
 
 vous n' eutes pas eu you had 
 
 ils n' eurent pas eu they had 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
 
 je n' aural pas eu / shall 
 
 tu n' auras pas eu thou shalt 
 
 il n' aura pas eu he shall 
 
 nous n' auron? pas eu- • • -we shall 
 
 vous n' aurez pas eu you shall 
 
 ils n' auront pas eu they shall 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 je n' aurais pas I should^ 
 
 tu n' aurais pas ■t/to2t shouldst % 
 
 il n' auralt pas he should I ^ 
 
 nous n' aurions pas -we should f -g 
 vous n' aurlez pas-v/ou should s 
 ils n' auralent paiS- they should] 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 PAST.* 
 
 je n' aurais pas eu I should 
 
 tu n' aurais pas eu- -thou shouldst 
 
 11 n' aurail pas eu he should 
 
 nous n' aurions pas eu- -kc should 
 vous n' aurlez pas eu- you should 
 ils n' auraient pas eu- -they should 
 
 not had 
 not had 
 not had 
 not had 
 not had 
 not had 
 
 not had 
 
 not had 
 not had 
 not had 
 not had 
 not had 
 
 not had 
 not had 
 not had 
 not had 
 not had 
 not had 
 
 not"} 
 not II 
 not I ■« 
 not 
 not 
 not. 
 
 nof] 
 not II 
 not ! •** 
 not It 
 not 4 
 not] 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 n' ale pas have not (thou) 
 
 qu' 11 n' alt pas let him not have 
 
 n' ayons pas let us not have 
 
 n' ayez pas have not (you) 
 
 qu' ils n' alent pas let them not have 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PRETERIT. 
 
 que je n' ale pas- -that Iniay^ que je n' ale pas eu that I may'] 
 
 que tu n' ales pas- --that thou | que tu n' ales pas eu- that thou mayst | 1 
 [mayst I « 
 
 qu' 11 n' ait pas- --f/iat /ie wa^/ § qu' il n' ait pas eu that 
 
 que nous n' ayons pas -tAat we >-^ que nous n' ayons pas euthat we may 
 
 [may \ o 
 
 q>ie vous n' ayez pas-«Aaf ?/oji ^ que vous n' ayez pas eu-(/ia< you may 
 
 [may \ 
 
 qn'jlsn'aiier>tp3isthattheymayj qu' lis n' alent pas eu- '-that they may. 
 
 It 1 may \ 
 u mayst ''. 
 
 he may \ 
 
 we mav >': 
 
 * Also, je w' eusse pas eu, tu rC eusses pas eu, il n' eut pas eu, 
 nous ?i' eussions pas eu, vous »i' eussiez pas eu, ils n' eu,ssent 
 pas eu. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 87 
 
 IMPERFECT. « 
 
 que je n' eusse pus that 1 1 g 
 
 que tu ii' eusses ^-as- that thou ■^ 
 
 qu' il n' eilt pas that he [ g 
 
 que nous n'eussions pas that wc \ Z 
 quevousn'eussiezpas that iiou "^^ 
 qu'ils n'eussentpas- -that iheij j '^ 
 
 PLUPERFECT. „ 
 
 que je n' eusse pas eu that /"] § 
 
 que tu n' eusses pas eu- • • that thou ■^ ^ 
 
 qu' il n' eut pas eu that Ae i | a 
 
 que nous n' eussions pas en- that we | « "^ 
 que vous n' eussiez pas authat yon "^^ 
 qu" ils n' eussent pas eu- - -that they } g 
 
 3. INTERROGATIVE FORM. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 ai-je have I ai-je eu hai-e I had 
 
 as-tu hast thou as-tu eu hast thou had 
 
 a-t-il has he a-t-il eu has he had 
 
 avons-nous have ice avons-nous eu have we had 
 
 avez-vous have you avez-vous eu have you had 
 
 ont-ils have they ont-ils eu have they had 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 avais-je had I 
 
 avais-tu hadst thou 
 
 avait-il had he 
 
 avions-nous had we 
 
 aviez-vous had you 
 
 avaient-ils 
 
 ■had they avaient-ils eu- 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 eus-je had I 
 
 eus-tu hadst thou 
 
 eut-il had he 
 
 eunies-nous had we 
 
 eutes-vous had you 
 
 eurent-ils had tltey 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 aiirai-je shall I have 
 
 auras-tu shalt thou have 
 
 aura-t-il shall he have 
 
 auroiis-nous shall ice have 
 
 aurez-vous shall you have 
 
 auront-ils shall they have 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 avais-je eu had I had 
 
 avais-tu eu hadst thou hud 
 
 avail-il eu had he had 
 
 avions-nous eu had we had 
 
 aviez-vous eu had you had 
 
 had they had 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 eus-je eu had (had 
 
 eus-tu eu hadst thou had 
 
 eut-il eu had he had 
 
 eumes-nous eu had we had 
 
 eiites-vous eu had you had 
 
 eurent-ils eu had they had 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
 
 aurai-je eu shall I have had 
 
 auras-tu eu shalt thou have had 
 
 aura-t-il eu shall we have had 
 
 aurous-nous eu shall me have had 
 
 aurez-vous eu shall you have had 
 
 auront-ils eu shall they have had 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 aiirais-je should I have 
 
 durais-tu shouldst thou have 
 
 aurait-il should he have 
 
 aurions-nous should we have 
 
 auriez-vons should you have 
 
 auraieut-il5 
 
 •should they have auraicnt-ils eu- 
 
 PAST.* 
 
 aurais-je eu should I have had 
 
 aurais-tu eu shouldst ti/ou have had 
 
 aurait-il eu should he have hod 
 
 aurions-nous eu should we have had 
 
 auriez-vons eu should you have had 
 
 should they have had 
 
 * Also, eiisse-j'e eu, eusses-tu eu, 
 emsiez-vous eu, eussent-ils tu. 
 
 eut-il eu, eussions-7ious eu. 
 
BR 
 
 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 4. NEGATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE FORM. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 n' ;ii-je pa.s have I not 
 
 n' as lu pas hast thou not 
 
 n' a-t-il pas has he not 
 
 ri' avoiis-jious pas have tee not 
 
 n' avsz-votis pas have you not 
 
 n' oiit-ils i)as have they not 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 n' avais-je pas had I not 
 
 XV uvais-tu pas hadst thou not 
 
 n' avait-il pas hud he not 
 
 n' avidus nous pas had we not 
 
 n" aviez-vous pas had sou not 
 
 n' avaient-ils pas had they not 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 n' eiis-je pas had I not 
 
 n' eus-tu pas hadst thou not 
 
 n' etit-il pas had he not 
 
 n' euiiics-iious pas had we not 
 
 n' eutes-vous pas had you not 
 
 n' eurent-ils pas had they not 
 
 Fl'TURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 n' aiirai-je pas- •• • shall I not have 
 n' auras-ui pas shalt thou not have 
 n' a\ira-t-il pas ■ ■ shall he not have 
 n" a\irons-r\ouspa.s.sha}l7cenot have 
 iraiirez-\ ous pa.s. shall you not have 
 n"auroiit-ils pas s/taZZ they not have 
 
 PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 ' ai-je pas eu have I not 
 
 as-tu pas eu hast thou not 
 
 a-t-il pas eu has he not 
 
 avons-nous pas eu have wenot 
 
 avez-vous pas eu have you not 
 
 ont-ils pas eu — • • have they not 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 avais-je pas eu had I not 
 
 avai.«-tu pas eu hadst thou not 
 
 avail-il naseu had he not 
 
 avions-nous pas eu had icenut 
 
 a\iez-vous pas eu. had younot 
 
 avaient-ils pas eu had they not 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 n' eus je pas eu had I not 
 
 n' eus-tu pas eu hadst thou n^t 
 
 n' e;it-il pas eu had he not 
 
 n' euines-nous pas eu had ice not 
 
 n' eutes-vous pas eu had you not 
 
 n' eurent-ils pas eu had they not 
 
 FURURE ANTERIOR. 
 
 n' aurai-je pas eu •• • - shall I not have 
 n'auras-tu pas na-shalt thou not have 
 n' aura-t-il pas eu • -shall he not hare 
 n' aurons-nous pus en. shall ice not have 
 n' aiirez-vous pas eu.shall younot have 
 n' auront-ilspas eu . shall they not have 
 
 had 1 
 hail 
 
 had 
 had 
 had 
 had I 
 
 had . 
 
 had 
 
 had 
 
 had 
 
 had 
 
 had 
 
 had 
 had 
 had i 
 had 
 had t 
 had I 
 
 had ; 
 had 
 had 
 had 
 haa ' 
 had I 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST.* 
 
 n' aurais-je pas- - -should Inot have n' aurais-je pas eu should I not'^, 
 
 n' aurais-tupas • •shouldstthou not ii' aurais-tupas eu- -shouldst thou \ot 
 
 [have I 
 
 T]' a.\ira\X-\] PB.S- -should he not have n' aurait-il pas eu should ke not | "^ 
 
 n' aurious-nous pas- -should tre not n' aurions-nous pas eu- -should ice not ( -^ 
 
 [have 
 
 ■n aurisz-vouspas- -should you not n' auriez-vous pas eushould you not 
 
 [have 
 
 n' auriaent-ilspas- -should they not n' auraienc-ils pas eu- should they not 
 
 [have 
 
 EXERCISE XXIV. 
 
 154. The substantive being taken in a partitive sense 
 in this exercise, the article, where the adjective follows 
 
 • Also, n^ cusse-Je pas eu, n' eusses-tu pas et^ ri' eiif-il pas eu, 
 Ki cussions-nous pas eu, n' eussiez-vous pas eu, n eussent-ils pas eu. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 89 
 
 the substantive, must be used as directed in art. 52 and 53, 
 page 56 and 57 ante. 
 
 I have 2very ^black 'ink. Thou hast had 2hoTiest 'procoedings. 
 /. hoDiiete proc^d^. 
 
 She has 2uncoiT)rnon 'graces. You had had 2exquisite 'melons. 
 
 rare exquis 
 
 They have had 2ready 'money. I shall have 2vei7 ^studious 'pupils* 
 
 coniptaiit argent. appliqu6 ^16ve. 
 
 We shall have 2uscless 'cares. You will have 2true ^and •'real 'plea- 
 inutile soin. r^el 
 Bures. They will have 2poignant 'griefs. 
 
 cuisant chagrin, m. 
 
 l'55 y The article, however is to be omitted, if the ad- 
 jective, or an adverb of quantity (as plus^ more, &c.), 
 precedes the substantive ; and only rfe, rf', is to be used : 
 except bien^ much, which requires rfw, de la^ de /', des. 
 The article is also to be omitted in negative sentences, 
 excejptjwhen the substantive is followed by an adjective, 
 6'r~~any other word which determines its signification. 
 Examples : 
 
 J' ai de bon pain, I have good bread. 
 
 Je n' ai pas de pain, I have no bread. 
 
 Je n'ai pas de I'argent pour le de- / have not money to spend 
 
 penser foUement, it in a foolish way. 
 
 I shall have good paper. She will have had charming flowers. 
 
 VI. charmant fleur,/. 
 
 We have had good pens. I should have fine engravings. 
 
 plume, /. gravure, /. 
 
 They should have long conversations. We should have had a great 
 
 /• 
 deal of trouble. You have not 2ungrateful 'children. He has not 
 
 peine. 
 2dangerous 'enemies. 
 
 156. When a verb is followed by two or more sub- 
 stantives, the proper article and preposition must be re- 
 peated before each. ^ 
 
 Let him have modesty, ajid 2more ^correct 'ideas. Let us have 
 
 juste /. 
 courage and firmness. That I may have books and prints. That 
 ra. fermet6, /. estainpe. 
 
 I)* 
 
DO COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 they may have more condescension and 2more ^prepossessing 
 
 condescen dance pr6venant 
 
 'manners. That I might have a sword, musket and pistols, 
 tnani^re,/. 6p6e,f. fusil, ?«. pistolet, m 
 
 That we might have a knife, a spoon and a fork. 
 
 couteau, m. cuiller, /. fourchette, /. 
 
 That they might have had friendship and gratitude, 
 amiti^, /. /. 
 
 EXERCISE XXV. 
 
 We have not had generosity. They have not had money. He had 
 
 /. 
 not a skilful gardener. I shall not have great business. You shall 
 
 habile vi. affaires,/, 
 
 not have had ^q^iet 'days. They should not have bad 
 
 tranquille m. mauvais 
 
 pictures. Have not such whims. Let them not have ^sa 
 tableau, m. caprice, m. 
 
 ''whimsical % 2pxoject. That he may not have had perseverance. ^ 
 
 bizarre projet, m. f. 
 
 Have we had ^convenient 'houses ] Had she silk 1 Shall we have 
 
 commode /. 
 
 2odoriferous 'shrubs 1 Should you have good wine and ^nice 
 odorif^rant arbuste 1 vi. m. fin 
 
 'cordials] Have you not ^indulgent 'parents] Has she not had 
 liqueur f f. vi. 
 
 contempt, and even hatred for that man 1 Have they not 
 m^pris, m. meme haine, h. asp. 
 
 ^inattentive 'children ] Has he not used ^far-fetched 'expre» 
 enfant ?jn. fait usage de recherche /. 
 
 gionsl Had they not excellent models'? Shall I not have sweet 
 modeiel m. con- 
 
 meats ] Shall we not have a good preacher? Should ^he not 
 fitures ? /. predicateur 1 
 
 have 2clear ^and ^just 'ideas? Would they not have had ^more 
 
 /• 
 ^extensive 'knowledge? 
 6tendu connaissances 1 /. 
 
 CONJUGATION J^THE AUXILL^RY VERB ETRE, 
 TO BE. 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. ^ 
 
 fetre to be avoir ^te to have bttn 
 
GRAMMAh AND EXERCISP:S. 
 
 91 
 
 6t6- 
 
 PARTICIPLES, 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 ^tant being- 
 
 ayant 6t6- 
 
 having been 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 je suis lam 
 
 tu es thou art 
 
 il est he is 
 
 nous somnies we are 
 
 vous eies yoii are 
 
 ils sont they are 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 j' ^tais I was 
 
 lu ^lais thou wast 
 
 il etait he was 
 
 nous 6tions we zoere 
 
 vous etiez you were 
 
 ils 6taient they were 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 je fus I was 
 
 tu fus thou wast 
 
 il fut he was 
 
 nous fumes we were 
 
 vous futes you loere 
 
 ilsfurent they were 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 je serai I shall be 
 
 tu seras thou shalt be 
 
 il sera he shall be 
 
 nous serons we shall be 
 
 vous serez you shall be 
 
 ils seront they shall be 
 
 PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
 
 j' ai ^t6 Ihavebf-en 
 
 tu as ^X.€ thoH hast been 
 
 il a €i€ he has been 
 
 nous avons ^\.€ we have been 
 
 vous avez €i€ you have been 
 
 ils ont 6t6 they have been 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 j' avais ^i€ ■• . -I had been 
 
 tu avals ^t6 thoa hadst been 
 
 il avait 6te -he had been 
 
 nous avions €\.€ we had been 
 
 vous a viez €\.€ yoit had been 
 
 ils avaient ete they had been 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 j' eus 6t6 / had been 
 
 tu ens et6 ^ thou hadst been 
 
 il eut 6t^ he had been 
 
 nous eunies 6t6 joe had been 
 
 vous eutes 6t6 you had been 
 
 ils eurent ^te they had been 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
 
 j' aural 6t6 1 shall have been 
 
 tu auras 6t6 thou shalt have been 
 
 il aura 6te he shall have been 
 
 nous aurons 6t6 we shall have been 
 
 vous aurez ^t^ you shall have been 
 
 ils auront €i€ they shall have been 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 je serais I should be 
 
 tu serais thou shouldst be 
 
 il serait *■• -he should be 
 
 nous serions we should be 
 
 vous seriez- •• 
 ils seraient • • • 
 
 PAST 
 
 j' aurais 6t6 T should have been 
 
 tu aurais ^t6 • - • -thou shouldst have been 
 
 il aurait 6t6 he shouid have been 
 
 nous aurions 6t6 we should have been 
 
 •you should be vous auriez 6t6 you should have been 
 
 they should be ils auraient 6t6 they should have been 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD, 
 
 sois be (thou) 
 
 qu' il soit let him be 
 
 soyons let us be 
 
 soyez be (you) 
 
 qu' ils soient let them be 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 que je sois • • -that I may be que j' aie ^t6 that I may have been 
 
 que tu sois that thoumayst be que tu aies 6t6that thou mayst have been 
 
 qu' il soit that he may be qu' il ait ^t^ that he may have been 
 
 que nous soyons that we may be que nous ayons €x€-1hat we may have been 
 
 que vous soyez- • • -that you may be q>ie vous ayez 4tt€that you may havt been 
 
 qu' ils soient that they may be qu' ils aient 6t6 • -that they may have been 
 
92 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 
 
 que je fiisse that I might be que j' eusse 6te that I mighty _^ 
 
 que tu fusses- -that thou mightst be que lu eussfs et6- ■•that thou viightst S 
 
 qu' il fut that he might be qu' il eut ete that he might [M 
 
 que nous fussionsthat we might be que nous eussions ^t6- -that we viight j § 
 
 que voiis fussiez- that you might be que vous eussiez et6- that jjou might | _s 
 
 qu' lis fussent- • ■ that they might be qu' ils eussent 6t6 that they might) "^ 
 
 157. The scholar will observe that the adverb, in the 
 following exercise, is to be placed before the adjective. 
 
 (J58j Whenever, in interrogative sentences, a substan- 
 tive is the subject, it is to be placed at the beginning of 
 the sentence, adding a pronoun for the interrogation im- 
 mediately after the verb : SiS,monfrere est-il venu? is my 
 /brother come ? instead of, est monfrere venuf 
 
 l§^ In interrogative sentences, when the third person 
 singular of any tense ends with a vowel, for euphony, a /, 
 with a hyphen before and after it, thus -^, is introduced 
 between the verb and the pronoun : as, parle-t-on, aura- 
 t-elle, a-t-il, &c. 
 
 EXERCISE XXVI. 
 
 I am very glad to see you. Are your friends still in Philadelphia? 
 
 bien aise de encore h Philadelphie ? 
 
 Have not I been constant] Have we not been firm and cou 
 
 ferme 
 rageous 1 Have those men always been good and benevolent ] 
 
 bienfaisant 1 
 I was too busy to see you. Were we not too uiitractable 1 
 
 occupe pour recevoir indocile? 
 
 I had hitherto been very indifferent. Have you not been too 
 
 jusqu' alors insouciant. 
 
 imprudent 1 Had his wife been sufficiently modest and re- 
 
 ^pouse assez 
 
 served? Was not that princess too proud 1 Were you not 
 
 princesse fieri 
 
 too hasty? To-morrow I shall be at home till twelve o'clock. 
 
 prompt? chez-moi jusqu' A midi 
 
 Will your father be at home this evening? Will 2you 
 
 Monsieur chez-lui soirl m. 
 
 ^always ^then ^be capricious, obstinate and particular? Shall 
 
 done quinteux, opini^tre pointilleux 1 
 
 I not have been too severe? Will not his sister have been 
 
 whimsical and capricious? Shall we not have been -eager 
 fantasque em^rfss^ 
 
1 
 
 ' GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 93 
 
 ! 1, 
 
 enough'? I would not be so rash. Would not his son 
 I tdm^raire. 
 
 joe ready in time"? But for your instructions, I should have 
 
 pr6t k --Sans-' conseil, 
 
 I been proud and haughty. Would that man have been 
 
 d^daigneux hautain. 
 
 I so • destitute of common sense 1 Do not be so lavish, 
 tenement d^pourvu bon sens ? prodigue. 
 
 j Is it possible I can be so credulous] They wish us to be more 
 
 cr^dule 1 
 j assiduous. That you should have been so avaricious. That 
 ! assidu. avare. 
 
 j she might not be so arrogant. That I might have been more studious. 
 j That she might have been neater. 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION— IX ER. 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST 
 
 parler to speak avoir parl6 to have spoken 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PHESENT. 
 
 parlani speaking past. 
 
 PAST. ayant parl6 having spoken 
 
 parl6 spoken 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT.* PRETERIT INDEFINITE.f 
 
 Je parle T speak j' ai parl6 T have spoken 
 
 tu paries thou speakest fu as parl6 thou hast spoken 
 
 il parle he speaks il a parl6 he has spoken 
 
 nous parlons we speak nous avons parl6 we have spoken 
 
 vous parlez you speak vous avez parl6 you have spoken 
 
 ils parlent they speak ils ont parl6 they have spoken 
 
 * Also, I do speak, or am speaking; thou dost speak, or art 
 speaking, &c. 
 
 Remark. The additional meanings to the different tenses given 
 in these notes, are as correct as those used in the text, and apply 
 equally to every verb in the French language ; but are not so fre- 
 queully used. The scholar, when reviewing the verbs, should re- 
 hearse each tense with the meanings in the text and notes united, in 
 each of the four forms. 
 
 t Also, I have been speaking, thou hast been speaking, &c. 
 
94 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 IMPERFECT.* PLUPERFECT.I 
 
 je parlais I was speaking j' avais parl^ I had spoken 
 
 tu parlais thou wast speakivg tu avais parle thou, hadst spoken 
 
 il parlait he was speaking il avail parl6 he had spoken 
 
 nous parlions- • • wc tcere speaking nous avions parle we had spoken 
 
 vous parliez- • • -you were speaking vous aviez parle you had spoken . 
 
 ils parlaient • • • they were speaking ils avaient parl6 they had spoken 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE.t PRETERIT ANTERIOR. $ 
 
 je parlai I spoke j' eus parl6 1 had spoken 
 
 tu parlas thou spokest tu eu parl6 thou hadst spoken 
 
 i\ parla he spoke il eut parl6 he had spoken 
 
 nous parlames we spoke nous eumes parl6 we had spoken 
 
 vous parlates you spoke vous eutes parle you had spoken 
 
 ils parl6rent they spoke ils eurent parI6 they had spoken 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE II FUTURE ANiERIOR.^ 
 
 je parlerai I shall speak j' aurai parl^ I shall hace spoken 
 
 tu parleras tho7i shalt speak tu auras parl6- • • • thou shall have spoken 
 
 il parlera he shall speak il aura parle he shall have spoken 
 
 nous parlerons ice shall speak nous aurons parle- we shall have spoken 
 
 vous parlerez you shall speak vous aurez parl6- - you shall have spoken 
 
 ils parleront they shall speak ils auront parl6- • • they shall have spoken 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT.** PAST.T+ 
 
 e parlerais Ishovld speak j' aurais parl6 I shouiu have spoken 
 
 tu parlerais- •• thoushouldst speak tu aurais ppirl^thou shouldst have spoken 
 
 il parlerait he should speak il aurait parl6 he should have spoken 
 
 nous parlerions- •■ we should speak nousaurions pdiTl6we should have spoken 
 
 vouS parleriez- • you should speak vousauriez parl6- you should have spoken 
 
 ils parleraient- • ikey should speak ils aurient parl6- they should hace spoken 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD.JJ 
 
 parle speak or do speak (thou) 
 
 qu' il parle let him fpeak 
 
 parlous let us speak 
 
 parlez speak or do speak {nou) 
 
 qu' ils parlent let them speak 
 
 * Also, I spoke, thou spokest, &c. 
 
 f Also, I had been speaking, thou hadst been speaking, &c. : 
 
 i Also, I did speak, thou didst speak, &c. 
 
 § There is a fourth ^relent, called preterit anterior inde^nite. which. 
 is used, instead of the preterit anterior, when speaking of a time not 
 entirely elapsed : as f ai eu acheve mon ouvrage ce matin, cefte 
 semuine, &c., and not f eus acheve. As it is found in every conju- ' 
 gation, it will be inserted here : f ai eu parte, tu as eu parle, il a eu ' 
 •narle, nous avons eu parle, vous avez eu parle, ils ont eu parle. 
 
 il Also, / will speak, thou wilt speak, &c. 
 
 t Also, I will have spoken, thou wilt have spoken, &.c. 
 
 ** Also, I would, could, or might speak ,- thou wouldsf, couldst^ 
 or mightst spatk, &c. 
 
 If Also, / would, could, or might have spoken ,• thou wouldst, 
 touldst, or mightst have spoken, &.c. 
 
 ^■^ The second person singular of the imperative of this conjugation, 
 tnd likewise of some verbs of tlie second, takes s after e, before the 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 95 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT.* PRETERIT. f 
 
 que je parle that I may speak que j' aie parle that Imay^ 
 
 que lu paries • that thou mayst speak que tu aies parl6 that thou mayst e 
 
 i|u' il parle that he may speak qu' 11 ait parl6 that he may \ ^. 
 
 que nous parlions that we may que nous ayons parl6- • • that we may 
 
 [speak 
 
 que vous parliez that youmay que vous ayez parl6- • -that you may 
 
 [speak 
 
 qu' lis parlent-fftat they may speak qu' Us aient parl6 that they may 
 
 IMPERFECTt PLUPERFECT. $ 
 
 que je parlasse that /"] .« que j' eusse parl6 that Imight'] 
 
 1 que tu parlasses thatthotil « que tueusses parl^- that thou miff htst \ 
 
 I <iu' il parlat that he [^ qu' il eut parl6 that he might \ 
 
 \ que nous parlassions- that we [5 que nous eussioT\spar\€.that we might 
 
 j que vousparlassiez- -i/iflt you .^0 que vous eussiez-paTl^.thatyouviight 
 
 j qu' ils parlassent- •• -t/tat tAcj/J S qu' ils eussent parl6- -f/iaif/tej/mi^At 
 
 5 
 
 
 de 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON SOME VERBS OF THE FIRST 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 160. 1. In verbs ending in ger^ in those tenses where 
 g is followed by the vowels a or o, the e is preserved, in 
 order to prevent the g from taking its hard sound : as. 
 'j mangeani^ jugeons^ je negligeai. 
 
 [i 2. In verbs ending in cer^ for a like reason, a cedilla ia 
 I put under c, when followed hy a or o : as, sugant^ pla- 
 i^ons, / effagai. 
 
 \^ In verbs ending in ayer, eyer^ oyer, uyer^ the y ia 
 changed into i before a mute e : as, il paie, il grasseie^ 
 f emploie, il essuie, f appuierai. 
 
 4. In some few verbs ending in eler and eter, the Zand i 
 are doubled in those inflections which receive an e mute 
 after these consonants : as, from appeler, il appelle ; from 
 Jeter, je jetterai. 
 
 words y and en, for the sake of euphony: sls, portes-en a tonfrere, 
 
 carry some to thy brother ; offres-en a ta soeur, offer some to thy sis 
 j ter ; apportes-y tes livres, convey thy books there. But when the 
 I word en is a preposition, the letter s is not to be added : as, demeuve 
 
 en France, remain in France. 
 •\ * Also, that I can speak, that thou canst speak, &c. 
 
 f Also, thai I can have spoken, that thou canst have spoken, &c 
 j t Also, that I should, could, or would speak; that thou shouldst^ 
 
 couldst, or wouldst speak, &c. 
 
 § Also, that I should, could, or would huve spoken; that thou 
 ti^ihouhlst, couldst, or wouldst have spoken, &c. 
 
96 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 161. The first person singular of the present of the 
 indicative, in verbs of the first conjugation, when used 
 interrogatively, takes, for the sake of euphony, an acute 
 accent on the e mute final : thus, parle-je^ prefere-je^ &c. 
 The same is also the case with some verbs of the second 
 conjugation, ending in -vrir^ -frir and -lir^ as, offre-je^ 
 cueille-je, &c. 
 
 EXERCISE XXVII. 
 
 I play sometimes, but I ^never 'win. We do not command; we 
 
 jouer gagner. 
 
 entreat. You ^always 'borrow ; you ^never Uend. I was desiring 
 
 emprunter; preter. prier 
 
 them to sing a song. We wept for joy when we found 
 
 de chanter chanson,/. pleurer de joie trouver 
 
 her. They will empty the bottle if you do not take it away. 
 
 vider bouteille,/. emporter — 
 
 Bridle my horse, and bring him to me. They have broken all the 
 Brider aniener On casser 
 
 panes of glass in their windows, because they had not illuminated" 
 carreau vitre fenetre,/. illuminer 
 
 as had been ordered. We would have sent them to 
 
 comn>e on le — ordonner. envo> er er 
 
 prison, if they had resisted. Do I prefer pleasure to my 
 
 r6sister. pr6f6rer. art. 
 
 duty 1 He does not propose Salutary ^advice to his friends, 
 devoir f m. proposer un avis, m. 
 
 We do not neglect any thing to please you. I have given up 
 
 n6gliger •••rien pour ••c^der- 
 
 my 2favourite ^horse to my cousin. We did not protect that bad 
 
 favori m. prot^^er m^chant 
 
 man. The bees were there sucking the cups of the flowers. I 
 
 abeille y sucer calice, m. 
 
 had drained an ^unwholesome hnarsh. i Had his father re- 
 
 dess6cher mal sain marais, m. 
 
 jected these ^advantageous 'offers 1 He judged lightly of my inten 
 rejeter avantageux /. juger 
 
 tions. I had soon wasted my money, and exhausted my resources, 
 manger ^puiser ressource,/ 
 
 We had not ^soon 'enough closed the shutters, and let down the 
 
 tot assez fermer volet, baisser- 
 
 curtains. In the twinkling of an eye, they had dispersed the 
 — un Clin — ceil, dispcrser 
 
 mob. We relieve the poor. Will he support you with all 
 popuUce,/. soulager pauvre, pZ. appiiyer dd 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 97 
 
 2We, ^perhaps, shall not 
 Wonia 
 
 his credit] We do not afflict them. 
 
 m. affligetr 
 
 nave 2rewarded 'enough the merit of this ^good 'man. 
 
 r^compenser "^de bien 
 
 not his attorney clear up that business 1 They would not unravel 
 
 procureur d^brouiller affaire 1 d6m6ler 
 
 the clue of that intrigue. Would those merchants have paid 
 
 fil, VI. f. marchand payer 
 
 their debts 1 In all thy actions, consult the light of reason. 
 
 dette? Dana /. consulter /. art. f. 
 
 Let us not cease to work. That you may pout incessantly, 
 cesser de travailler. bouder sans cesse. 
 
 That he might inhabit a hut, instead of a palace. That 
 
 habiter chaumi6re,/. wt 
 
 they would have struck their enemies with fear, 
 frapper de crainte. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION— IN IR, 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 finir to finish avoir fini 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 finissant -finishing 
 
 PAST. ayant fini- • 
 
 fini finished 
 
 ■ to have finished 
 
 • having finished 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 je finis I finish 
 
 tu finis thou finishest 
 
 il fip.'t he finishes 
 
 nous finissons we finish 
 
 vous finissez you finish 
 
 ilsfinissent they finish 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 je finissais I was finishing 
 
 in finissais thou wast finishing 
 
 il finissait he was finishing 
 
 nous finissions- --wc were finishing 
 vous finissiez- • -you were finishing 
 
 ils finissaient- • -they were finishing lis avaient fini- 
 
 PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 j' ai fini Ihavefinishei 
 
 tu as fini thou hast finishe-i 
 
 il a fini he has finished 
 
 nous avons fini we have finished 
 
 vous avez fini you have finished 
 
 ils ont fini they have finished 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 j' avais fini I had finished 
 
 tu avais fini thou hadst finished 
 
 il avait fini he had finished 
 
 nous avions fini we had finished 
 
 vous aviez fini you had finished 
 
 they had finished 
 
 PRETERIT 'lEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 je finis I finished j' eus fini I had finished 
 
 tu finis •' thou finishedsf, fu eus fini thou kadst finished 
 
 il finit • -^ he finished il eut fini he had finished 
 
 nous finimes we finished nous eumes fini we had finished 
 
 vous finites you finished vous eutes fini you had finished 
 
 ]i finirent they finished ils eurent fini they had finished 
 
 E 7 ■ 
 
98 
 
 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 je finirai J shall finish 
 
 tu tiniras thou shall finish 
 
 il finira he shall finish 
 
 nous tinirons ice shall finish 
 
 vous finirez you shall finish 
 
 .ils tiniront theij shall finish 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
 
 j' aurai fini I shall have finishei'- 
 
 tu auras fini thou shall have finishtij 
 
 il aura fini he shall havefinishti 
 
 nous aurons fini ice shall have finishu 
 
 vous aurez fini you shall havefinishei 
 
 ils aurout fini theij shall havefinishei^ 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 je finirais / should finish 
 
 lu finirais thou shouldst finish 
 
 il iinirail he should finish 
 
 npus finirions we should finish 
 
 vous finiriez you should finish 
 
 ijs finiraieut they should finish 
 
 PAST. 
 
 j' aurais fini /j 
 
 tu arais :' 
 il aurait 
 
 nous aurions fini we should \^ 
 
 vous auriez fini you should 
 
 ils auraient fini they should} 
 
 s fini lihould^ "3 
 
 fini thou shouMift ^ 
 
 L fini he should I g 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 finis finish (thou) 
 
 qu' il finisse let him finish 
 
 finissons let vs finish 
 
 finissez finish (ijou) 
 
 qu' ils finissent let them finish 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 fne je finisse that I may finish 
 
 •^ » tu finisses that thou maystfinish 
 
 • ?' il finisse that he may finish 
 
 ~t e nous finissions that we may 
 
 \^finish 
 ye VOUS finissiez that you may 
 
 [finish 
 «tt' Us finissent -t/tat they may finish 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 '^ae je finjsse • that I") ^ 
 
 \u e tu finisses that thou -^ 
 
 qu' U finit that he [^ 
 
 que nous finissjons- •• -that we j ^ 
 
 que vous finissiez that you \ "^o 
 
 qu' ib finissent that they J g 
 
 PRETERIT. 
 
 que j' aie fini that Imay"\ , 
 
 que tu aies fini that thou mayst ■*" 
 
 qu' il ait fini that he may % 
 
 que nous ayons fini that we may \ g 
 
 que vous ayez fini that you may [ S^ 
 
 qu' ils aient fini that they may J j 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 que j' eusse fini that Imighf] % 
 
 que tu eusses fini- •■that thou mightst ■* 
 
 qu' il eut fini that he might j 
 
 que nousi eussions fini • -that tee might j 
 que vous eussiez fini- -that you might ». 
 qu' ils eussent fini that they might j 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON SOME VERBS OF THE SECOND 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 162. 1. The verb denir has two participles past:. 
 henit^ which means consecrated; as, pain lenity holy 
 bread ; eau henite^ holy water : and heni, which has all 
 ihe Other significations of the verb ; as, peupJe heni de 
 Dieu<f people blessed by God, &c. 
 
 163. 2. 1 Hair takes a diaresis on the i in the whole 
 conjugation: except irj the three persons singular of the 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 99 
 
 present of the indicative, je hais^ iu hais^ il hait; and in 
 the second person singular of the imperative, hals. 
 
 164. 3. \Flcurir^ when used figuratively, makes ^ori's- 
 sait in the imperfect of the indicative, and jlorissant in the 
 participle present: as, les sciences ^orissaient^ the sciences 
 were flourishing; un etat Jlorissant, a flourishing state. 
 Refieurir follows the same rule. 
 
 EXERCISE XXVIII. 
 
 Why do you hate him 1 They cure the diseases of the body 
 
 hair gu6rir maladie, /. 
 
 and not those of the mind. I was building my house, when you 
 
 bAtir /. quand 
 
 demolished yours. We hated him because he did not act 
 d6molir agir 
 
 kindly towards us. We leaped over the ditch, and seized the 
 honnfitement envers ••franchir-- foss^, m. saisir 
 
 guilty. This plant will soon blossom if you water it often. 
 
 plante,/. fieurir arroser 
 
 Let him enjoy the fruit of his labours. Does ho thus define that 
 
 jouir du travail. ainsi d^flnir 
 
 word % Do you not pity his sorrows % I fortified his sou! 
 
 TO. compatir &. mal 1 pr^munir 
 
 against the dangers of seduction. Did we not frequently 
 
 contre aTt. f. fr^quemraent 
 
 warn our friends of the bad state of their affairs 1 Did not the 
 avertir 
 enemy invade an 2immense 'country ! t softened my father by my 
 
 envahir pays 1 m. fl^chir 
 
 submission. He did not succeed through thoughtlessness. Did not 
 nouraission, /. r^ussir par 6tourderie,/. 
 
 Alexander sully his glory by his pride 1 We never betrayed that 
 
 ternir traliir 
 
 'important 'secret. Will he not embellish his country-seat 1 
 
 TO. erabellir maisoii de campagne I 
 
 Will those men enrich their country by their industry 1 I should 
 
 enrichir pays 
 
 still cherish life. Couldst thou soften that ^flinty iheartT 
 
 ch6rir art. f. attendrir de rocher 
 
 Would men always grow old without growing wiser, if they 
 
 art. vieillir devenir 
 
 reflected on the shortness of life ] Shudder with horror and 
 
 r^fl6chir brievet6 art. Fr6mir de 
 
100 
 
 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 terror. Let us feed the poor. ]\ ever submit to Sgo -Junjust 
 de effroi. nourrir vi. pi. fl^chir sous 
 
 •a 2yoke. That I may never blemish my reputation. That they 
 joug, »«. fl^trir /. 
 
 may establish ^wise ''and sjust ^aws. That I might stun ^thc 
 
 'des 6iourdir 
 
 'whole neighbourhood. That they might weaken the force of their 
 tout voisinage, m. affaiblir- • ■ • /. 
 
 reasons. That we might become younger, 
 raisonnement. rajeunir. 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION.— L\ EVOIR. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 recevoir to receive avoir regu • 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 fecevant receiving 
 
 PAST. ayantregu- 
 
 fegu received 
 
 'te have receiveu 
 
 •having received 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 je regois 
 
 tu regois 
 
 il regoit 
 
 nous recevons- 
 vous recevez- • 
 ils regoivent- • 
 
 I receive j' ai regu 
 
 thoureceivest tu as regu 
 
 • ■ he receives il a regu 
 
 ■ •■ -we receive nous avons regu- 
 
 • • -you receive vous avez re§u • 
 
 • -they receive ils ont re§u 
 
 / have received 
 
 ■ thou hast received 
 
 he has received 
 
 • • we have received 
 •you have received 
 
 ■ they have received 
 
 IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 
 
 je recevais I was receiving j' avals regu I had received 
 
 tu recevais- • • • thou wast receiving tu avals regu thou hadst receivea 
 
 ii recevait he was receiving il avait regu he had received 
 
 nous recevions • •we were receiving nous avions regu we had received 
 
 vous receviez- •you were receiving vous aviez regu you had received 
 
 ils recevaient- •they were receiving ils avaient regu they had received 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 jeregus 
 
 tu regus 
 
 il reqnt 
 
 nous regtimes 
 vous restates-. 
 !ls rejurent • •• 
 
 I received j' eus re^u I had received 
 
 ■thou receivedst tu eus regu thou hadst received j 
 
 ■ •• • he received il eut leqn he had received 
 
 we received nous euraes regu we had received 
 
 • • ■ you received vous elites r-equ you had received 
 
 • ■ -they received ils eurent regu they had received • 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 101 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
 
 je recevrai I shall receive j' aurairegu I shall have received 
 
 tu recevras thou shalt receive tu auras regu thou shalt havereceived 
 
 il recevra- •• •- he shall receive il aura regu he shall have received 
 
 nous recevrons we shall receive nous auroiis regu- zee shall have received 
 
 vous recevrez you shall receive vous aurez re§u -you shall have received 
 
 ils recevront they shall receive ils auront re§u- • they shall have received 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 je rccevrais J should receive j' aurais regu I shovld have received 
 
 tu rccevrais- -iftoM shouldst receive tn aurais Te<^u.thou shouldst havereceived 
 
 il recevrait he should receive il aurait regu- •• -he should have received 
 
 nous recevrions- -we should receive nousaurions Tequ.we should havereceived 
 
 vous recevriez- -you should receive vous aunezre<^u. youshouldhavereceived 
 
 ils recevraient- -they should receive ils aui&ientiequ.they should havereceived 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 regois 
 
 qu' 11 resolve 
 
 recevons 
 
 recevez 
 
 qu' ils re9oivent 
 
 • -receive (thou) 
 
 • let him receive 
 
 • • -let us receive 
 
 • - -receive (you) 
 -let them receive 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 que je regoive thatl^ « que j' aie regu that Imay'^ *« 
 
 que tu regoives that thou g que tu ales regu that thou mayest , -g 
 
 qu' il regoive that he [^ qu' il ait regu that he may I ^ 
 
 que nous recevions--- that ice T ^ que nous ayons re§u--- that we may j ?~ 
 
 que vous receviez that you ^ que vous ayez regu- • • -that you may \ p 
 
 qu' ils regoivent that they j S qu' ilsaient regu that they may j 4 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 que je regusse that I~\ § 
 
 que tu recusses that thou [ "S 
 
 qu' il regut that he\^ 
 
 que nous regussions- • -that we j « 
 que vous regussiez- • -that you "So 
 qu' ils regussent that they j '| 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 que j' eusse regu thatlmi^ht'] "g 
 
 que tu eusses regu . that thouviightst .g 
 qu' il eut ^egu that he might i S 
 
 que nous eussions regu. «Aatit'e7/n^)^ /if 
 que vous eussiez xe^u-that youm 
 qu' ils eussent regu- that they m 
 
 REMARKS ON THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 165. This conjugation contains only seven regular 
 verbs : which are, 
 
 percevoir, to receive; decevoir, io deceive; 
 apercevoir, to perceive ; devoir, to owe ; 
 concevoir, to conceive ; rede voir, to owe again ; 
 
 and recevoir^ the model verb, which has just been con- 
 jugated. 
 
 166. In verbs ending in cevoir^ the c, to preserve its 
 soft sound, takes a cedilla, when followed by o or u. 
 
102 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 EXERCISE XXIX. 
 
 I perceive the summit of the Alps covered with 2perpetual 
 apercevoir sommet Alpes de' 6ternel 
 
 'snow. What gratitude dost thou not owe to her who, in 
 neige, /. pi. reconnaissance, /. devoir 
 
 thy infancy, has discharged to thee the duty of a mother] Do 
 
 remplir prfes de 
 you not perceive the snare] Did I not receive him kindly 1 
 
 pi6ge ? m. avec amiti6 ? 
 
 We did not receive our income. I perceived him walking by 
 
 qui s€ promenait k 
 moonlight. Shall men always owe their misfortunes 
 art. clair, m. de la lune. art. malhcur 
 
 to their faults 1 -^Should 'a ^wise^man give himself up thus to 
 
 faute ? Devoir • -s'abandonner-- art. 
 
 despair 1 You would easily perceive 3so ^gross 'a ^rick. Do not 
 
 m. grossier ruse, /, 
 
 receive that mark of confidence with indifference. Let us entertain a 
 
 •••Concevoir — 
 
 horror of vice. That they may not collect 
 
 de art. pour art. m. percevoir de 
 
 ^unjust itaxes. That you could not conceive the depth of this 
 
 /. profondeur,/. 
 
 book. I am to write to your brother to-morrow, to ^let 'him 
 devoir ^crire pour faire lui 
 
 know that your father is arrived. Were you not to siet 2them ■^know 
 savoir Devoir — 
 
 Ut sooner ] Receive this small present as a token of my friendship, 
 
 marque, /. 
 When did you hear from your sister ? We have not 
 
 avez-vous regu des nouvelles 
 
 heard from her since her departure. That they might not per- 
 re^u de ses nouvelles depart, m. 
 
 ceive the masts of the ship. 
 
 m&t vaisseau, m. 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION— IX RE. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 vendre to sell avoir vendu to have soli 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 vendant selling ' past. 
 
 PAST. ayant vendu \avvng »M 
 
 ▼endu sold 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 103 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT * 
 
 je vends / sell 
 
 tu vends thou sellest 
 
 il vend he sells 
 
 nous vendons we sell 
 
 vous vendez you sell 
 
 ila vendent they sell 
 
 IMPERFECT, 
 
 je vendais Iicas selling 
 
 tu vendais thou wast selling 
 
 il vendait he was selling 
 
 nous vendions we were selling 
 
 vous vendiez you were selling 
 
 Us vendaient they wire selling 
 
 PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 j' ai vendu I have sold 
 
 tu as vendu thou hast sold 
 
 il a vendu he has sold 
 
 nous avons vendu we have sold 
 
 vous avez vendu you have sold 
 
 ils ont vendu they hace sold 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 j' avals vendu I had sold 
 
 tu avais vendu than hadstsold 
 
 il avail vendu he had sold 
 
 nous avions vendu we had sold 
 
 vous aviez vendu you had sold 
 
 lis avaient vendu they had sold 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOB. 
 
 je vendis I sold j' ens vendu I had sold 
 
 tu vendis thou soldest 
 
 il vendit he sold 
 
 nous vendJmes we sold 
 
 vous vendites you sold 
 
 Us vendirent they sold 
 
 tu eus vendu thou hadst sold 
 
 il eut vendu he had sold 
 
 nous eumes vendu we had sold 
 
 vous eutes vendu you had sold 
 
 ils eurent vendu they had add 
 
 ^ vendrait he should sell 
 
 Qous vendrions we should sell 
 
 'ous vendriez- 
 \s vendraient- • 
 
 sold 
 sold 
 sold 
 sold 
 sold 
 sold 
 
 sold 
 sold 
 
 SK)ld 
 
 sold 
 sold 
 sold 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. FURUUB ANTERIOR. 
 
 je vendrai T shall sell j' aurai vendu I shall have 
 
 M vendras thou shalt sell tu auras vendu thoti shalt have 
 
 X vendra he shall sell il aura vendu he shall have 
 
 nous vendrons we shall sell nous aurons vendu- • • -we shall have 
 
 v^ous vendrez you shall sell vous a,inez vendu you shall have 
 
 Us vendront they shall sell ils auront vendu they shall have 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 je vendrais T should sell j' aurais vendu I should have 
 
 Ui vendrais thou shoiddst sell tu aurais vendu- -thou shoiddst have 
 
 il aurait vendu he should have 
 
 nous aurions vendii- we should have 
 they should sell vous auriez vendu -7/0?^ should have 
 they should sell Us auraient vendu- -they shotUd h^ive 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 vends sell (thou) 
 
 qu' U vende let him sell 
 
 vendons let vs sell 
 
 vendez sell {you) 
 
 qu' Us vendent let them sell 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 lue je vende that I may sell que j' aie vendu that I may 
 
 lue tu vendes-t/iot thou mayst sell qiie tu aies vendu- --that thou viayst 
 
 ■in' il vende thai he vtay sell qu' U ait vendu that he may 
 
 que nous vendions thatweviay sell que nous ayons vendu- -fhat ve way 
 
 que vous ver\d\ez- that you way sell que vous ayez vendu- • that you may 
 
 qu' ils vendent- that they may sell qu' ils aient vendu • • • that they may 
 
 * The first person singular of this tense, in verbs of all the conju- 
 j gations in which it has only one syllable, is used thus, interrogatively : 
 I instead of vends-Jf), we say, est-ce qne je vends ? The only excep- 
 . Uons that custom authorizes are: /aiS;/>.? dis-je? dois-Je P vais-je? 
 I d'jt P vois-je P 
 
104 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 IMPEBFECT. PLUPERFECT. 
 
 que je vendisse that I^ ^ que j' eusse vendu that I mighty 
 
 que tu vendisses that thou | "« que tu eusses vendu that thou mightst 2 
 
 qu' il veiidit that he \Z qu' il eut vendu that he might I 5 
 
 que nous vendissions-tAa« we [ "^j que nous eussions vendu f/iai?ce77//|'/t« | § 
 
 que vous vendissiez iAat you 'a que vnus en psiez vendu ^Aa«7/0M?n?^At S 
 
 qu' ils veiidissent- • • that they] " qu' ils eussent vendu that they viightj "~ 
 
 EXERCISE XXX. 
 
 I wait his return with impatience. Do you not confound these 
 
 attendre confondre 
 
 notions one with another 1 Do not those workmen waste 
 /. art. art. ouvrier perdre 
 
 their time about trifles ? Did those orators throw the graces 
 
 ^ des bagatelles 1 r^pandre 
 
 of expression into their speeches? I aimed at an %onest 
 
 art. discours ? tendre & 
 
 'end. Did we offer our incense to the pride of a blockhead? 
 
 "rut, TO. vendre encens sot 1 
 
 Did not the children comedown at the first summons? Shall 
 
 descendre ordre?OT.s. 
 
 I hear the music of the new opera ? Will you not new-model a 
 
 entendre /. to. refondre 
 
 work so full of ^charming 'ideas ? They will assiduously correspond 
 /. assidument correspondre 
 
 with their friends. Should we sell our liberty ? Expect not 
 
 Attendre 
 happiness from ^external 'objects ; it is in thyself. Let us 
 
 art. art. ext^rieur vi. 
 
 not descend to 2useless 'particulars. Ye sovereigns, make 
 
 descendre dans des particularite. — rendre 
 
 the people happy. That he may not reply to ^gydi Sabguj-jj 
 
 r^pondre un 
 'criticism. That we may have aimed at the same end. That they 
 critique,/, 
 may not depend on anyoody. That she might not melt into 
 
 d^pendre de personne. fondre en 
 
 tears. That they might wait for the opinion of ^sensible 'persons. 
 larmes. •••attendre"- sens6 /. 
 
 Did I not interrupt him, while he was answering themi 
 
 interrompre pendant que • •r^pondre- • • 
 
 As soon as I had received my money, I returned them what they 
 ••Des que- • rendre 
 
 nad lent me. I shall shear my flock in the month of May. 
 
 I)r6ter "tondre^^ troupeau, m. 
 
 If you do not take care, the dog will bite you. Speak loud, 
 prendre garde, mordre haul, 
 
 that I may hear what you say. 
 entendre 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 105 
 
 OF THE NEUTER VERBS. 
 
 167. There are, in the French language, about six 
 nundred neuter verbs, the larger portion of which, like 
 the active verbs, take the auxiliary avoir, to form their 
 compound tenses. The exceptions, given belovv^, are 
 some few which take etre; and others which take avoir 
 or etre, according to the sense. The latter are marked 
 with an asterisk, *. 
 
 iborder* to land 
 
 iccoucher* to be brought to bed 
 
 accourir to run to 
 
 accroitre* to increase 
 
 aller to go 
 
 apparaitre* to appear 
 
 arriver to happen 
 
 avenir to happen, to chance 
 
 cesser* to cease, to leave off 
 
 changer* to change 
 
 choir to fall 
 
 convenir* to agree, to suitf 
 
 croitre* to grow 
 
 decamper*- • to decamp, to run away 
 
 ddc^der to decease 
 
 d6choir* to decay 
 
 decroitre* to decrease 
 
 domeurer* to remain, to stay 
 
 descendre*- • • -to go doion, to descend 
 
 devenir to become 
 
 disconvenir to deny, to disown 
 
 disparaitre* to disappear 
 
 ^chapper* to escape 
 
 ^choir to become due 
 
 6chouer*-fo run aground, to miscarry 
 
 Colore to be hatched, to bloio 
 
 embellir* to embellish 
 
 einpirer* to grow worse 
 
 entrer* to enter, to go in 
 
 expirer* to expire 
 
 intervenir to intervene 
 
 m^savenir to succeed ill 
 
 monter* to ascend, to go up 
 
 mourir to die 
 
 naitre to be born 
 
 partir to depart, to set off 
 
 parvenir to attain, to reack 
 
 passer* to pass 
 
 p6rir* to perish 
 
 provenir to proceed 
 
 rajeunir* to become young 
 
 redescendre* to go down again 
 
 redevenir to become again 
 
 remonter* to go up again 
 
 rentrer*- • • -to re-enter, to go in again 
 
 repartir to set off agaiv% 
 
 repasser* to pass again 
 
 ressortir* to go out again 
 
 rester* to remain, to stay 
 
 r^sulter* to result, to follow 
 
 retomber to fall again 
 
 retourner to return, to go back 
 
 revenir to come back again 
 
 sortir* to go out 
 
 survenir to befall, to happen 
 
 tomber to fall 
 
 venir -to come 
 
 vieillir* to become old 
 
 168. The verb avoir is used to form the compound 
 tenses of those verbs which express the action of the 
 subject; and the verb etre, the compound tenses of such 
 verbs as express the state of the subject. 
 
 169. The participle of those neuter verbs which take 
 etre for their auxiliary, must agree, both in gender and 
 number with its subject. 
 
 f Convenir, to agree, takes etre ; and convenir, to suit, to become, 
 takes avoir. 
 
 ^ Repartir, to set off again, takes etre ,- but repartir, to reply, takes 
 woir. 
 
106 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 The following are examples : 
 
 state: Elle es^ sortie. ., She is out. 
 
 action : EUe a sorti ce matin, et She went out this morn* 
 elle est de retour. ing, and she hus returned. 
 
 state: Elle est montee dans sa She is gone up to her 
 
 chambre, et elle y est restee. room, and has remained 
 there. 
 
 action : Elle a monte quatre fois She went up to her room 
 a sa chambre pendant la four times in the course of 
 joumee. the day. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXI. 
 
 They came to see us with the greatest haste. When 
 
 — voir empressement. Quaiid 
 
 did they arrive 1 That estate fell to his lot 
 
 est-ce que arriver? terre,/. lui est 6chu en — partage 
 
 He fell from his horse, but happily received only a slight 
 
 tomber — il ne 16ger 
 
 contusion on the knee. That thing escaped from my 
 
 /. k genou, m. m'est — 
 
 memory. She expired in the arms of her mother. All those 
 
 art. a 
 
 that were on board of that ship have perished. He is gone up to his 
 
 room, and has remained there. 
 
 OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 170. The pronominal verbs are those in which each 
 person is conjugated through all the tenses with a double 
 personal pronoun : as, 
 
 Subj. 
 
 Obj. 
 
 Subj. 
 
 Obj. 
 
 Subj. 
 
 Obj. 
 
 Subj. 
 
 Obj. 
 
 je 
 
 me, 
 
 I 
 
 myself; 
 
 nous 
 
 nous. 
 
 we 
 
 ourselves; 
 
 tu 
 
 te, 
 
 ih(ni 
 
 thyself; 
 
 vous 
 
 vous, 
 
 you 
 
 yourselves ; 
 
 il 
 
 se. 
 
 he 
 
 himself,- 
 
 ils 
 
 se. 
 
 they 
 
 themselves ; 
 
 elle 
 
 se, 
 
 she 
 
 herself ; 
 
 elles 
 
 se. 
 
 they 
 
 themselves. 
 
 171. There are four kinds of pronominal verbs. 
 
 172, 1. The pronoviinal verb active, which expresses 
 an action of tlie subject falling, or reflected, upon the ob- 
 ject: as,j'e mejlaite, I flatter myself. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. lO: 
 
 173. The participle past of these verbs must always 
 agree in gender and number with the objective pronoun : 
 as, elles se sont Jlatlees^ they have flattered themselves. 
 
 Almost all the active verbs are susceptible of being re- 
 flected. 
 
 174. 2. The pronominal verb neuter^ which indicates 
 only a state or disposition of the subject: as, se rej^entir, 
 to repent. 
 
 n75. 3. The reciprocal verb, which expresses a re- 
 ciprocity of action between two or more subjects : ^s.'^'*"'^*^ 
 s' entr'^ aider, to help one another, pi-- ,.^ *. )v"ti.''{3i>*-*^*3:^Alo 
 
 176. 4. The pronominal verb impersonal, which is 
 only used in the third person singular. Active verbs fre- 
 quently assume this form for the sake of brevity and 
 energy : as, il se faisait, there was doing ; il s' est dit it 
 has been said. 
 
 177. All the compound tenses of the pronominal verbs 
 are formed by means of the auxiliary verb etre. 
 
 178. The inflections of all the tenses of these verbs 
 follow the conjugations to which they belong. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE PRONOMINAL VERB SE 
 LEVER, TO RISE, IN THE FOUR FORMS. 
 
 1. AFFIRMATIVE FORM. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 se lever to rise s' 6tre \ev€ to have rieen 
 
 PARTICIPLES 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 66 levant rising past. 
 
 PAST. s' ^tant lev6 having risen 
 
 lev6 risen 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 je me 16ve I rise je me suis lev6 1 have risen 
 
 tu te 16ves thou risest tu t' est lev6 thou hast risen 
 
 A se 16ve he rises il s' est lev€ he has risen 
 
 nous nous levons we rise nous nous sommes lev^s- •ice have risen 
 
 vous vous levez you rise vous vous 6les lev^s you have risen 
 
 il se 16vent they rise ils se sont lev^s they have risen 
 
108 
 
 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRE^CH 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 je me levais / was rising- 
 
 tu te levais thou tcast rising- 
 
 il se levait he was rising 
 
 noHs nous levions- -we were rising 
 vous vous leviez- -you were rising 
 ils se levaient they were rising 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 je me levai I rose 
 
 tu te levas thou rosest 
 
 il se leva he rose 
 
 nous nous lev&mes we rose 
 
 vous vous lev3.tes yuu rose 
 
 11 se lev6rent they rose 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 je me leverai I shall rise 
 
 tu te le veras thou s halt rise 
 
 il se levera he shall rise 
 
 nous nous le verons • • • we shall rise 
 vous vous leverez- • -you shall rise 
 ils se leveront they shall rise 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 je m' ^tais lev6 1 had rietn 
 
 tu t' 6tais leve thou hadst risen 
 
 il s' 6tait leve he had risen 
 
 nous nous etions lev6s we had risen 
 
 vous vous 6tiez lev6s you had risen 
 
 ils s' 6taient leves they had risen 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 je me fus lev6 1 had risen 
 
 tu te fus lev6 thou hadst risen 
 
 il se fut leve he had risen 
 
 nous nous fumes lev6s we had risen 
 
 vous vous futes lev6s you had risen 
 
 ils se furent le v^s they had risen 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
 
 je me serai leve I shall have risen 
 
 tu te seras leve thou shall have risen 
 
 il se sera leve he shall have risen 
 
 nous nous serons lev^s tee shall have risen 
 vous vous serez leves you shall have risen 
 ils se seront lev6s- -they shall have risen 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 je me leverais T should rise je me serais \ev€- •• I should^] 
 
 tu te leverais thou sitouldst rise tu te serais leve thou shouldst » 
 
 il se leverait he should rise il se serait lev6 he shLiild [x 
 
 nous nous leverions -we should rise nous nous serions lev^s- -we should j g 
 
 vous vous leveriez- youshouldrise vous vous seriez leves- -you should \ a 
 
 ils se leveraient- --they should rise ils se seraient leves they should j "^ 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 16ve-toi rise (thou) 
 
 qu' il se 16ve let him rise 
 
 levons-nous let us rise 
 
 levez-vous rise (you) 
 
 qu' ils se 16vent let them rise 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PRETERIT. 
 
 que je me I6ve that /I que je me sols lev6 that 
 
 que tu te 16ves that thou \ J que tu te sois lev6 that thou 
 
 qu' il se 16ve that he I S qu' il se soit lev6 that he 
 
 que nous nous levions that xce j g> que nous nous soyons lev6s that we T "• j. 
 que vous vous leviez that you j g que vous vous soyezlev6sfAa« j'ou j g 
 
 )ient lev6s- -tAat tAcyJ 
 
 qu' ils se I6vent- 
 
 •that they 
 
 u * 
 
 que' ils se soient 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 que je me levasse that r\ 
 
 que tu te levasses- •• •that you 
 
 qu' il se .e v&t that he 
 
 que nous nous levassions that 
 
 [tee 
 
 quv. vous vous levassiez- •that 
 
 [you 
 
 qu' il.s se levassent- -that they^ 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 que je me fusse lev6 that F 
 
 que tu te fusses lev6 that you 
 
 qu' il se fiut lev6 that he 
 
 que nous nous fussions lev6s- • 'that 
 \we 
 
 que vous vous fussiez lev^ that 
 
 [you 
 qu' ils se fussent lev^s- • • •that they 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 109 
 
 2. NEGATIVE FORM* 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 ne se levant pas 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 na pas se lever not to rise ne s' 6tre pas leve not to have risen 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PAST. 
 
 •not rising ne s' 6tant pas lev6 not to have risen 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 'e ne me 16ve pas Irise not je ne me suis pas lev6 T") ^ 
 
 in ne te 16ves pas • -thou risest not tu ne t' es pas lev6 thou 2 
 
 il ne se 16ve pas he rises not il ne s' est pas lev6 he ! ~ 
 
 nous ne nous le vons pas we rise not nous ne nous sommes pas lev^s • -we f e 
 
 vous ne vous levez pas you rise not vous ne vous 6tes pas lev6s you -S 
 
 ilane se 16 vent pas- ••they rise not ils ne se soiit pas laves they J ^ 
 
 &c. 
 
 &c. 
 
 &c. 
 
 &c. ♦ 
 
 3. INTERROGATIVE FORM. 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 me lev6 je do Irise 
 
 te 16ves-tu dost thou rise 
 
 se 16ve-t-il does he rise 
 
 nous levons-nous do -we rise 
 
 vous levez- vjOus do you rise 
 
 se Idvent-ils do they rise se sont-ils lev6s 
 
 &c. &c. &c. 
 
 PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 me suis-je lev6 have F risen 
 
 V es-tu lev6 Jtast thou risen 
 
 s' est-illev6 has he risen 
 
 nous sommes-nous lev^s- •have we risen 
 
 vous fites-vous lev^s have you risen 
 
 • '-have they risen 
 
 &.C. 
 
 4. NEGATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE FORM. 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 ne me lev6-je pas do I^ 
 
 netel^ves-tupas^ •• •dostthou \ ; 
 
 ne se 16ve-t-il pas does he t •; 
 
 ne nous levons nous pas do we ( ■ 
 ne vous levez-vous pas do you 
 
 ne se 16vent-iis pas do theyj 
 
 Sec. &.C. 
 
 Dost thou not 
 
 when he is doing 
 k faire de art 
 
 PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 ne me suis-je pas lev6 have 
 
 n« t' es-tu pas lev6 hast thou 
 
 ne s' est-il pas lev6 has he 
 
 nenoussommes-nouspaslev6s/iaue?oe 
 ne vous etes vous pas lev6s have you. 
 ne se sont-ils pas lev^a- • -have they 
 &c. &,c. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXII. 
 
 deceive thyself? He is never happy but 
 
 • • -se tromper ■? • -ne se plaire-- que 
 
 wrong ! Do we not nurse ourselves too 
 
 mal!m. •••s' 6couter-'> 
 
 * It is not deemed necessary to give an example of more than two 
 or three tenses of the negative, interrogative, or negative-and-inter- 
 rogative forms of the pronominal verb ; as the scholar is already fami- 
 liar with these forms in preceding verbs If he should lind any 
 difficulty in conjugating them, he will readily surmount it by refer- 
 Lng to pages 85, 86, and 87, taken in connexion with page 108, anto 
 
110 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 much 1 They mean to travel in the spring. Didst thou not ' 
 
 se proposer de & m. 
 
 lose thyself in the wood 1 It is said that he killed himself from 
 ••s'^garer-' -On dit- ••••se tuer- •• • 
 
 despair. Wast thou not laying the foundation for much sorrow 
 
 se preparer bien regret, pi. 
 
 by thy foolish conduct! Did you not laugh at us? They ' 
 
 se moquer de 
 ruined themselves wantonly. Didst thou not confide too 
 
 se perdre de gait6 de coeur. se confler 
 
 inconsiderately in this man 1 Had you not been engaged in 
 I6g6reinent k • -s' occuper •• de 
 
 trifles 1 Had those travellers gone out of the right way 1 I 
 bagatelle 1 se d^tourner droit chemin 1 
 
 ^ repent-ed, but too late, of having taken ^such 'a step. Did 
 
 Be repentir, tard, avoir fait d-marche,/, 
 
 not those ^rash 'children applaud themselves for their folly 1 
 
 t^m^raire s' applaudir * • • • de sottisel 
 
 As soon as I discovered that they sought to deceive me, I was 
 ••Ddsque^' s' apercevoir chercher se teirir 
 
 on my guard. When he had rejoiced sufficiently, we parted. 
 
 pi. se r^jouir assez, se s^parer. 
 
 When they had walked enough, they sat down at the foot 
 
 se promener s' assirent ^ 
 
 of a tree. I will yield if they convince me. We shall not f 
 
 se rendre on convainc 
 forget ourselves so far as to be wanting in respect to him. Will fi 
 
 • • • s' oublier • • • -jusque- -manquer-- de 
 
 you employ the means I point out to you 1 He will have 
 
 se servir de indiquer — 
 
 been proud of this trifling advantage. Should I suffer myself 
 B'enorgueillir faible m. • • se laisser • • 
 
 to be drawn into the party of the rebels 1 We should not rejoice 
 
 • •entraiiier- • m. se plaire 
 to see the triumph of guilt. Would those lords avail 
 
 triomphe art. crime, m. seigneur •••se 
 
 themselves of their birth and fortune, to do violence to our 
 
 prevaloir • • /. richesses, pour 
 
 feelings "? Would this pleasing hope have vanished so soon ? 
 
 Bsntimenti doux espoir s' ^vanouir 
 
 Let us take an ^exact 'account of our actions. It is time that they. 
 
 • Se rendre- compte 
 
 should have relaxation from the fatigue of business. Did they 
 
 se d^las^.er /. art. pi. on 
 
 not wish that he sh )uld practise fencing 1 They required 
 
 voulait • • s'exercer-- a. faire des armes 7 On exigeail 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. Ill 
 
 that I should go to bed at ten o'clock. Would they have wished 
 
 a: coucher k vouloir 
 
 that I had revenged myself 1 We could have wished that they had 
 
 • •• -se venger 1 
 
 extricated themselves more skilfully from the difficulties in which 
 
 se tirer adroitement embarras • oil • • 
 
 ""* they had placed themselves, 
 •••se mettre. 
 
 OF THE PASSIVE VERBS. 
 179. There is but one mode of conjugating passive 
 verbs : it is by adding to the verb etre^ through all the 
 moods and tenses, the participle past of the verb active ; 
 which must agree in gender and number with the sub- 
 ject : as, 
 
 Je suis aime. I am loved. 
 
 Hon pere fut respecte. Mi/ father was respected. 
 
 Ma mere fut reveree. Mi/ mother was revered. 
 
 Nous serons loues. We shall be praised. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIII. 
 
 That young lady is so mild, so polite, and so kind, that she 
 
 jeune demoiselle doux, (;. honn^te, bon, 
 
 is beloved by every body. He performed with so much 
 
 aimer.; de jouer. tant dfe 
 
 ability that he was universally applauded. He is known by no- 
 intelligence applaudif. ' de 
 body. How many countries, unknown to the ancienjsj bave been 
 
 Que de pays, inconnu 
 
 discovered by 2modern ^navigators ! If they had got into it 
 
 - ■ art. navigateur I 
 
 through the door, they should have come out of it through the window. 
 
 To be happy and to be praised are two very different things. 
 
 - .. art. 
 Men are too often exposed to lose their life in order to get their 
 : — art. 
 
 livelihood. 
 
 OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 180. Verbs that are conjugated only in the third per- 
 son lingular are called impersonal verbs ; and are gene- 
 
il2 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 rally preceded by the pronoun il. Observe that the il has 
 no relation to a substantive, as may be seen by the im- 
 possibility of substituting a noun for it in the following ; 
 examples . 
 
 iLpleut it rains il convient it heccrmes 
 
 trSfed. it is becoming il s' ensuit it follows 
 
 il messied it is unbecoming i Lest a propo s it is proper 
 
 il semble it seems il faut it is necessary 
 
 irparait it appears il y a there is, or are 
 
 il suffit it suffices il importe it matters 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERB NEIGER, 
 
 TO SNOW. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 neiger to snow avoir neig6 to have snowed 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 nel»eant snowing past. 
 
 PAST. a yant neig6 having snoiced - 
 
 ne\g6 snoiced 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 il neige if snows il a neig6 it has snowed 
 
 IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 
 
 11 neigeait it was snowing il avail neig6 it had snowed 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 il neigea it snowed il eut neig^ it had snowed 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
 
 li neigera it will snow il aura neig6 it will have snowed 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 11 neigerait it should snow il auraijt neig6- -it should have snowed ;, 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESEA^T. PRETERIT. 
 
 qj a neige that it may snow qu' H ait neisi.that it may have snowet 
 
 IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 
 
 qu' il neige&t that it might snow qu' il eut neig6. that it might hart 
 
 [snoices 
 
 Conjugate in like manner the following verbs. 
 
 il arrive if happens il regele it freezes again 
 
 il bruine it drizzles il grele it liaib 
 
 il degele if thaws il gresille if rimes 
 
 il edaire // liii^hte7is il rosolte it follow f 
 
 il gele if freezes il tonne ..it Thunders 
 
I GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 113 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIV. 
 
 Does it rain this morning "? Did it hail 2 last 'night? I thought 
 pie u voir m. greler /. croyais 
 
 it had thundered. Does it not lighten 1 Do you think 
 que toiiner. croyez 
 
 it freezes 1 It was not my friend's fault that it was net 
 que geler 1 • n' a pas tenu k mon ami- • la chose fut 
 
 so. It was of great importance to succeed. Would it be proper to 
 insi. •••importait beaucoup-" de Apropos dn 
 
 vrite to your friends'? It appears that he has not attended to that basi- 
 s' occuper de 
 less. Perhaps it would be better to abandon the undertaking. It 
 
 vaudrait entreprise. 
 
 tvas sufficient to know his opinion. T advise you not to go out 
 
 • •suffisait- de conseiller de 
 
 this mof ning ; I think it will soon rain. It matters little whether 
 
 que que 
 
 you do your exercise now or later, provided it be well done. 
 
 fassiez ponrvu que 
 
 »You 'must speak to him about that affair. It was necessary 
 
 II faut que sub. pr. de a fall u 
 
 for him that he should consent to that bargain. How much do you 
 — march^, m. Combien 
 want 1 He does what is requisite. Do that as it should be. What 
 falloir? •••fclloir faut Que 
 
 must 'he have for his trouble 1 I could not suspect that I 
 falloir lui — peine 1 f. pouvais soupyonner 
 
 ought to ask pardon for a fault I have not committed, 
 dusse — de /. que commise. 
 
 Observe that the impersonal verb falloir can be used 
 in two different ways, thus : 
 
 II me faudra payer les frais ; or, il faudra que je paie les frais. 1 
 must par/ the costs. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERB Y AVOIR, 
 THERE TO BE. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 PAST. 
 
 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 
 y ayanl- 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 • ■ there being y ayant cu- • 
 
 PAST. 
 
 there having been 
 
114 COLLOT'S PROGRESSRE FRENCH 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 il y a there is, or there are il y a e\i..there has heen,oi there hare been 
 
 IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 
 
 il y avail- • • there was, or there were il y avail eu there had been 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 il y eut there was, or there were il y eul eu there had been 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
 
 lI y axrra there will be il y aura eu there will have been 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 il y aurait there should be il y aurait eu there should have been 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 qu' il y ait let there be 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PRETERIT. 
 
 qu' fl y dit' • that there maij be qu' il y ail eu • that there may have been 
 
 IMPERFECT. PLITPERFECT. 
 
 qu' 11 y eut Hhat there might be qu' il y eut e\i.that there might have been 
 
 181. Y avoir ^ in En;^lish, is used in the plural, when 
 followed by a substantive plural ; in French it remains 
 always in the singular. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXV. 
 
 2There imust be a great difference of age between these two persons. 
 
 II doit /. 
 
 There being so many Svicious 'people in this world, is it 
 
 • • -tant- • • de gens, m. 
 
 astonishing that there are so many persons who become the \-ic- 
 
 ^tonnant ail deviennent 
 
 tims of the corruption of the age 1 It is a thousand to 
 
 perversity si6cle ? m. — mille ^ parier contre 
 
 one that he will not succeed. There would be more happiness 
 
 de bonheur 
 if every one knew how to moderate his desires. I did not think 
 ••chacun-' savait — — croyais 
 
 that there would be any thing to blame in his conduct. There 
 
 rien reprendre 
 
 would not be so many duels, did people reflect that one of the first 
 
 si r on 
 obligations of a Christian is to forgive injuries. Could 
 
 /. Chretien de pardonner art. Pourrait-il 
 
 there be a king happier than this, who has always been the father 
 
 celui-ci, 
 of his subjects 1 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 115 
 
 OF THE FORMATION OF TENSES, 
 
 182. The tenses of the verbs are divided into primi- 
 iive and derivative. 
 
 183. The 'primitive tenses are those which form all the 
 other tenses, ai.d are five in number, viz. : 
 
 The present of the infinitive, 
 i The participle present, 
 I The participle past, 
 I The present of the indicative, and 
 j The preterit definite. 
 
 184. The derivative tenses are those which are formed 
 by the primitive tenses. 
 
 185. The present of the infinitive forms two tenses : 
 
 186. 1. The future absolute, by changing r, re, or oz>, 
 into rai : as, parler, je parlerai ; jinir, jejinirai ; vendre, 
 je vendrai ; recevoir, je recevrai. 
 
 187. 2. The conditional present, by changing r, re, or 
 oir, into rais : as, parler, je parlerais ; jinir, je Jinirais ; 
 vendre, je vendrais ; recevoir, je recevrais. 
 
 188. The participle present forms two tenses : 
 
 189. 1. The imperfect of the indicative, by changing 
 ant into ais : as, parlant, je parlais ; finissant, je finissais. 
 
 190. 2. The present of the subjunctive, by changing 
 ant into e : as, parlanf, que je parle ; finissant, que je 
 fmisse ; vendant, que je vende : 
 
 191. Except the verbs of the third conjugation, which 
 change evant into oive : as, recevanf, que je regoive. 
 
 192. Observe, that the first and second persons plural 
 of these two tenses, which end in ions and iez, make iions 
 and iiez, when the participle ends in iant ; and make 
 yions and yiez^ when the participle ends in yant : as, 
 priant, nous priions, vous priiez ; pay ant, nous pay ions, 
 
 ous payiez. 
 
116 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 193. The participle past forms all the compound tenses 
 with the help of the verb avoir, or etre : as, f ai estime, 
 je suis estime ; il avail Jini, il elait jini. 
 
 194. The present of the indicative forms the impera- 
 tive^ by suppressing the pronouns which serve as subjects : 
 as, tu paries, paries ; nous parlous, parlous ; vous parlez, 
 parlez. 
 
 195. Observe, that in the first conjugation only, the 
 second person singular of the imperative does not take the 
 s final of the same person of the indicative. 
 
 J 96. The preterit definite forms the imperfect of fhe 
 subjunctive, by changing i into sse, for the first conjuga- 
 tion, and by adding se, for the three others : as, je parlai, 
 que je parlasse ; je finis, que je fiuisse ; je regus, que je 
 regusse ; je vendis, que je vendisse. 
 
 TABLE OF THE TERMINATIONS OF THE SIMPLE 
 TENSES OF THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 
 
 
 pari 
 
 er 
 
 fin ir 
 
 rec evoir 
 
 vend re 
 
 
 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 
 
 
 pari 
 
 ant 
 
 fin issant 
 
 PAST. 
 
 rec 
 
 evant 
 
 vend aHt 
 
 
 pari 
 
 6 
 
 fin t 
 
 reg 
 
 u 
 
 vend « 
 
 
 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 
 
 je 
 
 par! 
 
 e 
 
 fin is 
 
 re 5 
 
 OlS 
 
 vend 3 
 
 ta 
 
 
 es 
 
 is 
 
 
 ois 
 
 8 
 
 U 
 
 
 e 
 
 it 
 
 
 oil 
 
 
 nous 
 
 
 ons 
 
 issons 
 
 
 evons 
 
 ons 
 
 vous 
 
 
 ez 
 
 issez 
 
 
 evez 
 
 ez 
 
 Us 
 
 
 ent 
 
 issent 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 
 oivent 
 
 ent 
 
 je 
 
 pari 
 
 ais 
 
 fin issais 
 
 rec 
 
 evais 
 
 vend ais 
 
 tu 
 
 
 ais 
 
 L'ssais 
 
 
 erais 
 
 ais 
 
 il 
 
 
 ait 
 
 usait ' 
 
 
 erait 
 
 ait 
 
 nous 
 
 
 ions 
 
 issions 
 
 
 evions 
 
 ions 
 
 vous 
 
 
 iez 
 
 issiez 
 
 
 eviez 
 
 iez 
 
 ils 
 
 
 aieiU 
 
 issaient 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE 
 
 
 evaient 
 
 aieiU 
 
 je 
 
 pari 
 
 ai 
 
 fin is 
 
 re 9 
 
 W5 
 
 vend is 
 
 tu 
 
 
 as 
 
 is 
 
 
 us 
 
 is 
 
 il 
 
 
 a 
 
 It 
 
 
 ut 
 
 it 
 
 nous 
 
 
 Ames 
 
 imes 
 
 
 Unus 
 
 imes 
 
 vous 
 
 
 dies 
 
 hes 
 
 
 ittts 
 
 ites 
 
 iSs 
 
 
 irejU 
 
 irent 
 
 
 urent 
 
 irsnt 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 117 
 
 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTK. 
 
 
 
 Je 
 
 pari erai 
 
 fin irai 
 
 rec evrai 
 
 vend 
 
 rat 
 
 tu 
 
 eras 
 
 iras 
 
 evras 
 
 
 ras 
 
 il 
 
 era 
 
 ira 
 
 evra 
 
 
 ra 
 
 nous 
 
 erons 
 
 irons 
 
 evrons 
 
 
 rons 
 
 VOUB 
 
 erez 
 
 irez 
 
 evrez 
 
 
 rez 
 
 ila 
 
 eront 
 
 iront 
 
 evront 
 
 
 ront 
 
 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. , 
 
 
 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 '■ ' 
 
 
 
 je 
 
 pari erats 
 
 fin irais 
 
 rec evrais 
 
 vend 
 
 rats 
 
 tu 
 
 erais 
 
 irais 
 
 evrais 
 
 
 rais 
 
 il 
 
 erait 
 
 irait 
 
 evrait 
 
 
 rait 
 
 nous 
 
 erions 
 
 irions 
 
 evrions 
 
 
 rions 
 
 V0U8 
 
 eriez 
 
 iriez 
 
 evriez 
 
 
 riez 
 
 lis 
 
 eraient 
 
 iraient 
 
 evraient 
 
 
 raient 
 
 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 
 pari e 
 
 fin is 
 
 re 5 ois 
 
 vend 
 
 8 
 
 qu'il 
 
 e 
 
 isse 
 
 Give 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 OTIS 
 
 issons 
 
 evons 
 
 
 ons 
 
 
 ez 
 
 issez 
 
 evez 
 
 
 ez 
 
 qu* ils 
 
 ent 
 
 issent 
 
 oivent 
 
 
 ent 
 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 
 
 
 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 
 
 queje 
 
 pari e 
 
 fin is»e 
 
 re§ oive 
 
 vend 
 
 e 
 
 que tu 
 
 es 
 
 isses 
 
 oives 
 
 
 ei 
 
 qu' il 
 
 e 
 
 isse 
 
 oive 
 
 
 e 
 
 que nouR 
 
 ions 
 
 issions 
 
 evions 
 
 
 ions 
 
 que vous 
 
 iez 
 
 issiez 
 
 eriez 
 
 
 iez 
 
 qu' ils 
 
 ent 
 
 issent 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 oivent 
 
 
 ent 
 
 queje 
 
 pari asse 
 
 fin isse 
 
 req usst 
 
 vend 
 
 isse 
 
 que tu 
 
 asses 
 
 isses 
 
 usses 
 
 
 isses 
 
 qu'il 
 
 At 
 
 it 
 
 ^t 
 
 
 it 
 
 que nous 
 
 assions 
 
 issions 
 
 ussions 
 
 
 issiov-s 
 
 que vous 
 
 assiez 
 
 issiez 
 
 ussiez 
 
 
 issiez 
 
 qu' ils 
 
 assent 
 
 issent 
 
 ussent 
 
 
 issent 
 
 OF THE IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 197. Irregularities never occur but in the simple 
 tenses. 
 
 198. When a primitive tense is wanting, its derivative 
 tenses are also wanting. 
 
 199. The imperfect of the indicative is always regu- 
 larly formed by the participle present. 
 
118 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 200. The future, and conditional never change their 
 terminations, and the irregularity which they undergo is 
 always uniform ; so that, the first person of the future 
 being known, it is easy to form both tenses. 
 
 201. The preterit definite is always regular. 
 
 202. The imperfect of the subjunctive is always regu- 
 larly formed by the preterit definite. 
 
 203. The imperative is always regularly formed by 
 the present of the indicative, except in the verbs avoir, 
 etre^ and savoir^ for which see the following table. 
 
 204. The third person singular and plural of the 
 imperative being always the same as in the present of 
 the subjunctive, may be considered as belonging to that 
 tense. 
 
 205. By attending to these directions, and applying 
 them to the annexed " Table of the Irregular and Defec- 
 tive Verbs," and the " List of all the Irregular and Defec- 
 tive Verbs in the French Language not contained in the 
 Table," immediately following it, the study of the im- 
 portant branch of grammar here treated of may be mastered 
 certainly, and without difficulty. 
 
 206. In the " List," which consists chiefly of com- 
 pounds of verbs in the Table, reference is made from eac'i 
 verb to a model in the Table, conformably to which it is 
 to be conjugated. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 119 
 
 C aj C CO? 
 
 > c s 
 c <u « 
 
 c 0) c 
 
 ? CD. 
 
 i $ e 
 
 'o 'o 'o 
 
 > > > 
 
 c c c 
 0) V V 
 
 C.S.Q< 'S'Sw 
 
 2 ^ ^ 2 
 
 C U S C 
 
 <== g F 
 
 >S^ 
 
 <^«' 
 
 CO N t; 
 
 C 3 3 
 
 2 f^ ?J 
 
 C oj G 
 C »i w 
 
 o. a a i3 « : 
 
 .s s 
 
 «J3 
 
 •-" s: 
 5 « 
 
 
 •i.§° 
 
 C rt " 
 
 ^ 3 o 
 
 5 S 
 
 - a 
 
 '- if:!'": I 
 
 ^•s «^ » 
 
 2 c t -s %. - 
 
 si:-^ .= 
 
 g CO _-. -;2 .;x ofl 
 
 » aT *" -«^ O .S 
 
 j^ O 'S v;U rt ^ 
 
 ;S 2 l^r^= g- 
 
 B — — r. M tU 
 
 ^ o i « 2 S 
 
 a> L ■ ■ 2 o '^ 
 
120 
 
 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 
 o^^ 
 
 5 I 
 
 O S' 
 g I 
 
 §J 
 
 •s s 
 
 I-J 
 
 H II 
 
 c a> c c V s 
 
 'C ^9> ^ iS •" -"a 
 
 S crS CS 5« ai 
 
 O S O g « t3 
 
 <ns*e "Nri "ES*-" 
 
 CqjC POjC cok 
 
 _c s ^ o 'r; a> c •— ^ 
 
 3Co O'^- "^-^ 
 
 ID a> (u 
 
 o "(u -S 
 
 ^i?« S«S<i _ 
 
 QMoi'i, CSS P33 a>Do 
 
 ^ m VI SOOO OOO 333 
 
 3csc! cr^^ja uwo ««o 
 
 
 es 
 
 'e s 
 
 « ^ <u 
 
 2 S — "EN' 
 C U 3 C « 
 
 c i- <a c = 
 
 <a D QJ ~ ^ — _aj 
 "=.'=."1. ""S rt rt "> 
 
 « N Tj 
 
 C OJ 3 „ 
 
 lurs*- mN** ajNt: 
 3aiS co3 3ci3 
 
 « to K 
 
 »-lW"^ J-N^i/^ ^tJ^ ^(yi— >H 
 
 c::Ji ®b2^ — ~— — — S 
 
 S ■= •'3 s o 3 3: "S S -"S rt S S ^ 
 
 CUO <l>3<u,ci^,rt >;C 
 
 • • • ...'". "3 • • 
 
 sJrt cacSsS.-jSpCxi 
 
 m I» 4-9 t ;-i >a 
 
 3 3 3 S 3 3 
 ^ COO OOO 
 
 ; ~ XD "> 
 
 C .-3 
 
 
 s ^ 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 121 
 
 S V S B v S 
 O •-; 4> O T- « 
 
 
 to s! ♦; 
 C 0) C 
 
 0) o .« 
 
 *1^ 
 
 gsa 
 
 sss 
 
 > > 
 
 3 3 
 O O 
 
 s s 
 
 to S! *J 
 
 (3 <U C 
 O i- O) 
 
 O C S 
 
 a?s 
 
 I lis 
 
 M !D 4J a> 
 
 =3 Hag 
 
 =^ =! S 
 
 3 O 3 
 
 O 
 
 :?= « 
 
 5 2 
 
 3 4j « 53 
 
 •" i^ 2 o) 
 
 iig 
 
 5^.5 
 
 o 
 
 o a 
 
 a> ss^tw ■ 
 > ^ 52 o 
 
 .Si 05 2 K > >-• 
 a, 3 s M ^ i,^ 
 
 V, o 2 S - -p *^ 
 02-^ S2 2 S 2 
 
 « cu , <i> >tsg -2 
 
 " M -5 c :> '^ *- 
 
 «^ .. §--2 >>>» 
 
 30 >>" s'c « 
 3 S rt ^ S o o 
 
 
 •=, "^ 
 
 
 
 ; <D 3 & c3 
 
 
 « a> w a; 
 
 q; (U « <^ 
 
 is 
 
122 
 
 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 
 > ^ £: 
 
 0, <u a) -« -J 
 
 « « « ^ ^ 
 CSC C ^ ^ % 
 
 m en <n tb m cq c 
 
 C aJ S C 0) S 
 
 i^i 'r>f 
 
 V 0) V 
 
 u a> o ^<j <« 
 •S -a '3 > > > 
 
 0) OQ V O CiQ a^ 
 
 n K 
 
 c 1) ™ 
 
 M CS CS 
 
 S) CJ « 
 
 05 m M 
 EC » X 
 
 <n N ti m S3 w 
 
 32 g *>>« 
 
 O 
 
 "=5 ? 
 
 ■«'3 
 
 fi 
 
 33a) ^•S<4> r' ™ 
 
 ■Z'S'S > > > t*i — 
 
 c .s~- 
 
 cj cj d 
 
 ^•<i 
 o o 
 
 2 £ 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 123 
 
 " *> s 
 
 
 oo'S' 
 
 o o o 
 ^ no; *^ 
 
 D O aj 
 
 V a> a> 
 > > > 
 
 3 3 3 
 
 V (U (U 
 
 esa 
 
 m N ♦^ 
 
 C « 3 
 
 ■>.C p 
 
 2 o o 
 o ac- 
 o. . • 
 
 • m ■ 
 
 .- .2 .2 
 
 SSS ojojiu "rjTSr; 
 rrr osmm £5?? 
 
 3 3 3 
 O O O 
 
 CO. a, 
 
 3 3 3 
 
 ^y^ s^ \^ v<D 
 
 o^ 2 
 
 "o o o 
 
 
 3 C 
 
 ^§3 
 
 C Q,0 
 
 nQ N *; 
 c 4) a 
 
 « > 5 
 
 .■s.:^. ."3 
 
 sS 
 
 'o o 'o 
 
 
 X !«! « 
 
 3 3 3 
 Ri k3 nj 
 
 en m M 
 
 ^ > > > > > > 
 
 ^ a> a> k. k. iM 
 
 o-co, can, 
 
 
 .Is . 01 
 
 5 >. .S 
 
 f C CO 
 
 i2 >> V-. 
 
 *> (X> O) 
 & t3 E- 
 
124 
 
 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 1 
 
 
 «i 
 
 g 
 
 
 »^ 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 w 
 
 
 «< 
 
 > 
 
 -a 
 
 , 
 
 Ui 
 
 >§ 
 
 !■ 
 
 > 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 E^ 
 
 8 
 
 •rl 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 ^ 
 
 c^ 
 
 J 
 
 a. 
 
 P^ 
 
 k 
 
 
 H 
 
 5 
 
 
 P 
 
 f^ 
 
 
 ft 
 
 § 
 
 i 
 
 ?; 
 
 b 
 
 H 
 
 <i 
 
 i 
 
 •1 
 
 < 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 ■•3 
 
 
 £ 
 
 "ft. . 
 
 B 
 
 
 Is 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 H 
 
 
 ^ . 
 
 fe 
 
 
 1<S 
 
 o 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 •is 
 
 •sS 
 
 5 o s 
 
 g 5 « rs-- 
 
 S3 
 
 OSS;:? aiN*; "NrS ais»- 
 
 CajC sojC ccC ccjC 
 
 "^ii i?l '§•>> 111 
 
 Ei^3 'r:> >:: E>o 
 
 i = S 
 
 aj aj Qj 
 
 'c'oo « oj a) 
 
 w m m s — — 
 
 i: ii '3 —■—■■:" 
 
 %^ ^ iJ 
 
 05 S-- m 
 
 CO— c 
 
 c >..2i c 
 
 2 c > s 
 
 m X w 
 
 "c'c'S 
 
 > > > 
 
 £>2 
 
 _ = a 
 
 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 125 
 
 « *• s 
 
 .K o o 
 O a> m 
 
 I b 
 o 
 
 g 
 
 o 
 
 C5 o o 
 o « o 
 
 CSS 
 o o o 
 o o u 
 
 *S'3'3 
 
 
 d .a OS'S 
 
 m n ' 
 
 S 3 S 5? 5 S 
 
 o 9 o 5 is S 
 
 n m en m m <n 
 
 cd n cS d cS cd 
 
 
 B a> S c a; S 
 o2« o > « 
 S rt ^ > s > 
 
 I m • to oc ♦» ^ ja 
 
 .— <-,>-,« -o ,a jQ mS 
 
 A^o^a .a. 
 
 «=! « ?, 
 
 o 2 ^ 
 
 .a o -S 
 
 2 c S 
 
 s o s 
 
 o o o 
 
 u >> o 
 
 •3 ggg 
 
 a *S 3 « 
 . .ss 
 
 S ii 
 O ed 
 a>.2 
 
 •1§ « S.I 
 
 Is i lo 
 
 OS T* r; >- 
 
 CO >•«-« 
 
 £ . ^ o 'O •- 
 
 5:i=tt;t;= 
 
 2 *S 
 o is 
 
 
 s^ s 
 
 sM 
 
 — ©So. 
 
 g«-Srf s 
 
 S — . o 2 e 
 g-aaJ-S g 
 
 £t3S^ o 
 .« « "u S '5 c .2* 
 
 ,c 5^ e cs • • c o 
 c " ..-3 4,5- 
 
 <u . •- S ts ■^ 
 So«-.S s.S 
 
 3 C- S c ni tn m 
 
126 
 
 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 S ?; 5 5 P o 
 
 02 CO 
 
 « « « • m • 
 
 2 'K w o V o 
 
 etCG mSm <»S>» mmoo 
 
 o§§ §§§ Is 2 2 22 
 
 uuw uuu uuu wuu 
 
 o sj V 
 
 C 3 
 
 e 2S^ ""N-i "»s:ti "N 
 
 c Cos coC Ca)S Co 
 
 w C2^ oSo c>,a> oS 
 
 3 «HC.2 resm >, p-- ^ m 
 
 " "5 S C =53 C £ 2 Jo- 
 
 o P"S o-u «:• 25 
 
 00 X •• 
 C SJ C 
 <= - S 
 
 000 <c<C!n 'c-s'O 
 
 CCG see 333 
 
 poo 000 --- 
 
 u u u u u u 
 
 000 £ 2 2 
 
 u u u u u w 
 
 coo 
 www 
 
 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 c v a 
 
 C a3 c 
 c > s> 
 
 o -4> .S .- . 
 
 ns .— >« sK >« 
 
 3 M 
 
 C Q C 
 
 'm to tc 
 
 gs- 
 
 -^;=-- 
 
 0) <U V 
 
 c c c 
 
 bo SC SD 
 
 2 N ti 
 
 M s t; 
 
 c SJ C 
 
 O C «e O m <u 
 
 03 (» <j 
 
 *c o "o 
 
 127 
 
 s -S 
 
 
 III 
 
 
 J "S 
 
128 
 
 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 
 
 13 = s 
 
 = rt rf 
 
 i = s 
 
 eS es rt 
 
 "c sa Ku 
 
 £ c £ 
 
 155 
 "^ £ 2 
 
 •t; vu "^ 
 
 sss sss 
 
 s s 
 
 c u s C 9; 
 
 c -s « Or; 
 
 I2S ""BSg S-^.2 
 
 a^s^c cc- •::2=! 
 
 « « o w_2 « ~ 5 3g 
 
 o a> o ceo 'P '5 'rt 
 
 SSS sss SHc 
 
 s^ 
 
 1=1 
 
 01 m 
 
 « 4) « O C C 
 
 sss sss 
 
 ^ 5 
 
 s s 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 129 
 
 5 5c 
 5km 
 
 .S .S cS d 
 
 m m xfk ttj 0^ 03 
 0,0.0. P«0-Q. 
 
 oj « •; 2 "^ 1:5 
 
 e5 oj fl C2 QJ C 
 
 2 «J 
 p'3 
 
 C IJ S 
 
 o :3 « 
 
 ii . qj >- fc. >- 
 
 VQJ vflj 
 
 flituai «S« Smm «a>w 
 
 2 g Q .2 .2 .S- J2 .2 .2 ^ ^ ^ 
 
 BOG "S's's rt'cd'cS "OOO 
 
 SSS ra-a-^ &a-C oaoim 
 
 U)«hl ^4)^4)^q) OJOJOJ v^)^^)^ 
 
 C-Q-O, 1-fc.*- »->->- h.)-i»- 
 
 C aj fl d 0) « 
 O ^ aj 5 tp a> 
 W.2 2 S.2 2 
 
 OS CD -«-? Cd C4 CQ 
 
 ,S .S v>H M »H H 
 
 cd e^ cc cd cd c3 
 
 
 C 93 S 
 O C <^ 
 e CI C 
 
 aj s tj 2 N ■§ 
 C OJ S C U C 
 3 tn o o * *3 
 
 
 KJ rt rt 
 
 0.0.0. 
 
 aj {» « 
 
130 
 
 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FREXCH 
 
 6- «^ 
 I 
 
 i I 
 
 § I 
 
 O 1 
 
 
 ££2 
 
 III 
 
 o »- o 
 
 00 01 . 
 
 CCQ, 
 
 g£S 
 
 2 £ £ 
 
 i» N ♦^ 50 S -J 
 
 C c C p aj c 
 
 III :m 
 
 C a; — <- n. 
 
 S|| !>_> Ill _S£| 
 mSloo aoiS iisi >>> '> > > 
 
 SS| SgS £g^ 
 
 S'lJ >-^- ?^-2i 
 
 Sg' 
 
 z i 
 
 
 m a: <o 
 
 "= 3 3 
 
 'eS '5 's 
 
 i S > > > 
 
 
 § §3 1 
 ^2 S 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 131 
 
 u 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 Ui 
 
 >-A 
 
 K 
 
 W 
 
 H 
 
 <tj 
 
 ^ 
 
 H 
 
 1— 1 
 
 O 
 
 r/^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 >- 
 
 C 
 
 W 
 
 o 
 
 > 
 
 p^ 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 w 
 
 o 
 
 K 
 
 w 
 
 H 
 
 s -i^ .'S b -S -S 
 
 1^^ 
 ?>.??. 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 •~ s S .5 
 
 o £ f • "" «■" -^ 
 
 S.2 
 
 ^2 
 .2 
 
 3 I 
 
 Hi 
 
 
 9-tr.-^ L V 
 
 Ut3 « S C £ 
 
 c-'^sg't: 
 
 CCk.k.wixU'j^ 
 
 « « OJ O) o 
 
 -c 0) e. 1 
 
132 
 
 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 •^Iti sli^ ^' III I * 
 
 s^s 
 
 p o s s 
 
 5" 
 
 i':?^ ^ 
 
 
 
 to a CD > "w OQ I. 
 
 rsi-3 >2 
 
 .. K O o -^ - 
 K h. QQ ^ '^ at 
 
 alps. 
 
 > h 
 £ = o 
 
 > « ■S i = -S g = > .= •= c ii c 5^ S-' ■- = = c c- .h c — X - e 
 
 Z f E:.h g c § §>£■- t-.N,-^^ =3 ^^ £r r 1 1 : « 3 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 133 
 
 <i)-r t, o I, . v.-r 
 
 10 o 
 
 = J^ -2 S 
 
 >i, ii I _ '^ - - 
 
 •a .5 to C « C. i 
 
 
 — < M t; .S ^ ~ C C fc. — .— 
 
 1 O o 
 
 
 2 o « »- 
 
 s ,s • « -2 to R-v. K !> =s « - ~ •« 
 
 
 £ • i: « M : i 
 
 ili|jlll|i| I lull 11 
 
 "2 o4j S 3 
 
134 
 
 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 § g S 
 
 o 
 
 S 
 
 § < 
 O P 
 
 o 
 
 '2 2 i. ^"S -a 
 
 
 ^ rage's s 
 
 ■S S 8 .^ -S S ^f 
 
 a. a e J; a 
 
 2ii--5 
 
 
 ^^S-ai'S S S S S S^ 2^ S " S 5 = £ S :^ 5 
 
 
 O 2 
 
 IS 
 
 « V. s ■s ?^ ? S ' 
 
 «i -S ^ S 
 
 
 ' S fc« S ■» -2 -~ 'S 'a a 'e .^ 
 
 „||i|tHl||t| 
 
 
 22 
 
 
 D<*i^^o%_. — li-ajilS-Cc— '(«»<. ii. Cms '->aj-4)'J3 ^ 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 
 
 135 
 
 
 
 •w ^ f- -a s o 
 
 o* 
 
 
 £■=£■55 
 
 > 2; P <u S 
 
 Bt 
 
 O o O O C O-TS -j ^ 
 
 
 S5 ^-Sl ^o 
 
 -^^ ^■S'^''' -^^^^ ^ "iH 
 
 ~ 15 ^ »; ». . - „^ ._, !S 
 
 2^ s w-o 1; fc 
 
 
 .2 ^ « 
 
 i: ^^ c c 3 ,::; ~ a. aj "5 
 
 li|iiliiils= 
 
 C •- c « <u P C i- ^ aj c- aj 
 
 5"^ feci n -=* -« -E "^ « .2 e -"S 
 
 2^ 
 
 "s 2 s" 
 
 2 S tj o s "3 
 ■2 ? tS o s ^ 
 
 c ?; = c c^ c o 
 
 w ao "3 tc « 
 
 
 
136 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS OF THE FIRST 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVI. 
 
 SVill you go this evening into the country? I am going 
 
 soir k campagnel /. 
 
 to pay some visits, and if I be at liberty early I 
 
 — faire suis libre- de bonne heure 
 
 shall certainly go home. Go there with thy brother. Go 
 
 chez moL 
 and do that errand. Go there and put every thing 
 
 — commission,/. — mettre 
 
 in order. Let him go to church on holidays, 
 
 en art. f. — art. jours de fite. 
 
 By being loaded with scents, and particularly amber, he 
 & force d' dtre de odeur, surtout ambre, 
 
 offends the smell. They have woven silk and 
 
 • ■ -sentir mauvals- • de art. 
 
 cotton together, and made a very pretty 
 
 de art. en ont fait 
 
 stuff. I shall send ^spring 'flowers to those ladies. I 
 
 <^rnffe/. des printanier /. 
 
 would go to Rome if I could. We would send back our horse*. 
 
 pouvais. 
 Why do you go away so soon ? My brother and sister weit 
 
 yesterday to Boston. I will not go any more a-hunting. 
 
 pins & art. chasse,/. 
 
 Are tj:ey not going away ? I would go with them, if I was lot 
 
 engaged. 
 occup6. 
 
 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS OF THE ^- 
 COND CONJUGATION. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVII. 
 
 May the name of that good king be blessed from generation to 
 
 generation ! These trees blossomed twice every yeai. 
 
 deux fois tout art. an, pi. 
 The arts and sciences flourished at Athens in the time of Perides. 
 a Ath6nes P^riil^. 
 
 HcrAce and Virgil flourished under the reign of Augustus. We 
 
 Virgile m. Auguste. 
 
 discovered from the top of the mountain a vast plain full of 
 d^couvnr ham /. rempli 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 137 
 
 2flowery 'meadows. The empire of the Babylonians was long 
 
 fleurissant m. Babylonien 
 
 a flourishing one. We did not hate the man, but his -vices. 
 
 Does she really hate that vain pomp, and all the parade of 
 
 pompe,/. appareil art 
 
 grandeur. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVIII. 
 
 j Take that water off the fire, it boils too fast. Do not 
 j Retirer /. de dessus m. fort. 
 
 j let 2the Sgoup '•boil-away so much. That sauce has 
 
 ' laisser pot •••'tant-- /. est 
 
 I 2ijoiled-away too much. Boil that meat again, it has not 
 
 • • itrop--' Faites viande,/. 
 
 boiled 21ong 'enough. He runs faster than I. t ran about use- 
 
 vite moi. — 
 
 Icssly all the morning. We ran at the voice of that honest man, 
 
 matinee, 
 and assisted him. The moment he saw us in danger, he ran 
 
 • -Dds que- • • en 
 
 to us and delivered us. By conduct so whimsical, should 
 
 un /. bizarre, 
 
 we not contribute to our destruction 1 He discoursed so long on 
 
 concourir pertel 
 
 the immortality of the soul, and the certainty of another life, that 
 
 certitude,/, 
 he left nothing unsaid. If we were to act thus, we should 
 
 en arri^re. agir 
 
 certainly incur the displeasure of our parents. I would not have 
 
 disgrace, /. 
 recourse to ^so ^base 'a ^method. Will men always run 
 
 moyen,™. art. 
 
 after shadows 1 
 
 de art. chim6re 1 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIX. 
 
 He was near losing his life in that encounter. He was 
 
 faillir perdre — art. rencontre,/, 
 
 near falling into the snare which was laid for him. His 
 donner on avait tendu — lui. — 
 
 strength 2fa[is ihim every day. Let us have something ^to 
 art. d^'faillir Donnez-nous — 
 
 'eat 'directly ; we are fainting with fatigue and hunger. I 
 vite ; de faim. 
 
 cannot meet him; he shuns me. When we know not b>w to 
 le : Shi' 
 
38 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 employ oui time, we endeavour to fly from ourselves. WouJ'* 
 
 chercher se — soi-m6me. 
 
 he not avoid flatterers, if he knew all their falsehood! He 
 
 fuir art. f. 
 
 died by a 2very ^painful 'disease. She died of grief for the 
 de cruel maladie,/. chagrin de avoir 
 
 loss of her son. He is dying. She was expiring with grief, 
 perdu se mourir. • -se mourir- • de 
 
 when the fear of death at last wrested her secret from her. 
 crainte/. art. enfin arracher m. — luL 
 
 EXERCISE XL. 
 
 Send for the physician and follow exactly his advice. Go 
 
 and fetch my cane. Every day he acquired celebrity by 
 
 — canne,/. de art. f. 
 
 works calculated to fix the attention of an 2enlightened 'public, 
 des fait pour 
 
 That I would acquire riches at the expense of my honesty ! 
 
 des depens probity : /. 
 
 He had acquired by his merit great influence over the opinions 
 
 VI. un /. sin^ 
 
 of his contemporaries. I have inquired about that man every where, 
 
 contemporain. de -Ik partout, 
 
 and have not been able to hear any thing of him. Who ^has 
 
 je . ■ ■ pu_. . . avoir de nouvelles •••en--- 
 
 ^requested -it of 'yo^W- Sesostris, king of Egv'pt, conquered a 
 
 en — •^ 
 great part of Asia. The 2formidable 'empire which Alexander 
 art. Alexandre 
 
 conquered, did not last longer than his life. I have heard that 
 
 oui dire 
 ^important 'news. He dressed himself in haste, and 
 
 /. • • • se v6trr S. art. h asp. hS-te, /. 
 
 went out immediately. I wish she would dress the children 
 
 Eortir sur-le-champ. voudrais que •••vfetir 
 
 with more care. If his fortune permitted him, he would clothe 
 
 le lui, 
 all the poor of his parish. Two servants clothed him with his 
 
 domestique rev6tir de 
 
 2ducal 'mantle. He passed only for a traveller ; but lately 
 
 nianteau. ne depuis peu 
 
 he has assumed the character of an envoy. It begins to be very 
 
 revetir — envoye. 
 
 warm ; it is time to throw off some clothing. 
 
 de se ddvetir. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 139 
 
 EXERCISE XLI. 
 
 [ will gather, with pleasure, some of these flowers and fruits, since 
 
 vou wish to have some. Do not gather these peaches before 
 en. . /• 
 
 they are ripe. That is a country where they ^neither 
 
 que ne soient Ce pays on ni 
 
 2reap corn, nor gather grapes. We shall collect in Can- 
 ine recueillir bl6, ni — vin. recueillir 
 
 cient 'history ^important %nd ^valuable ^facts. He received us in 
 
 pr^cieux accueillir de 
 
 3the ''most ^polite 2nianner. Poverty, misery, sickness, perse- 
 
 iart. 
 cution, in a word, all the misfortunes in the world have fallen upon 
 en malheur de -accueillir • 
 
 him. If you give six inches to that cornice, it will project too 
 
 corniche,/. 
 much. That balcony projected too much ; it darkened the dining 
 
 balcon, m. obscurcir 
 
 room. When Moses struck the rock, there gushed out of it 
 Moi'se rocher, 771. il -en- 
 
 a spring of 21iving 'water. The blood gushed from his vein 
 
 source veine,/. 
 
 with impetuosity. We shall assault the enemv to-morrow in their 
 
 intrenchments. Were we not overtaken by a horrible storm ? 
 retrancliement. assailli temp^te ? /. 
 
 At every word that they said to him concerning his son, the good 
 a. chaque de 
 
 old man leaped for joy. Will you not shudder with fear? 
 vieillard tressaillir de tressaillir de peurl 
 
 You may set out this morning, but remember to come back at night. 
 
 06 soir 
 
 EXERCISE XIJI. 
 
 Tell me what she has done to you;- but, above all, do not lie. 
 
 2 Were 'I in your place, I would not offer her any money. Why 
 Si k de 
 
 do you not open the door for your sister 1 Your actions never belie 
 
 your words. Your brother repents much of having sold his books, 
 parole. avoir 
 
 I would serve him with all my heart, if I could. The more we 
 de — 
 
140 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 are above others, the more it becomes us to be modest and 
 
 au-dessus des 
 humble. My aunt and 1 came yesterday to see you, but 
 
 nou? pour 
 
 \ou were not at home. I hope that you will keep your word 
 
 and come to-morrow. At last she has agreed to pay her an 
 
 que Enfln de 
 
 annual pension of two hundred francs. Come on Friday morning 
 
 at nine o'clock. You will obtain leave to go out another 
 
 art. permission 
 time, if you come back soon. The first time you come to see me, 
 
 que fut. — 
 
 I will keep you two or three days. He is so prepossessed against me, 
 
 that he will not agree that he is in the wrong. The first time I go 
 
 a tort 
 
 out, remind ^me to call on your brother. That hat 
 
 ifaire ^souvenir de passer chez 
 
 would suit you very well, if you were a Uttle taller. I should not 
 
 suffer so much if it were fine weather, 
 faisait 
 
 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS OF THE 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 EXERCISE XLTII. 
 
 I had apartments that I liked ; I will endeavour to have them again. 
 
 un logement de 
 
 Beware of falling. Since the publication of his last work, he has 
 
 much fallen in the esteem of the public. If he do not alter his 
 
 d^choir changer de — 
 
 conduct, he will decline every day in his reputation and credit. 
 
 • • d^choir • • de jour-en-jout de /. m. 
 
 He has put in the lottery, and he hopes that a capital prize 
 
 mis k loterie,/. — art. gros lot 
 
 will fall to him. That bill of exchange has expired. The 
 ^hoir lettre,/. change ^tre ^choir. 
 
 first term expires at midsummer. You have drawn on me a bill 
 
 terme k la Saint-Jean, 
 
 of exchange ; when is it payable 1 I did not believe that I must 
 • • 6choir in • • devoir 
 
 so soon take that journey. He must have sunk under 
 
 faire voj'age. qu' il — succomb4t 
 
 the efforts of so many enemie.*!. 
 • • tant • • de 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 141 
 
 EXERCISE XLIV. 
 
 The spring which moves ^the ^whole machine is very ingenious, 
 
 ressort, m. tout /. 
 
 though very simple. Can you doubt that the soul, though it is 
 
 spiritual, moves the body at pleasure? That is a man 
 
 lie subj.pr. h. sa volenti ■» 
 
 whom nothing moves. We were moved with fear and pity. 
 
 ne ^mouvoir. ^mu de 
 
 When the famous D'Aguesseau was promoted to the dignity of 
 
 c616bre 
 chancellor, all France showed the greatest joy. That bishop 
 chancelier, art. en t^moigner /. 
 
 well deserved, by his talents and by his virtues, that the king should 
 
 mdriter, 
 promote him to the dignity of primate. The people think that it 
 
 primal. sing, croit 
 
 lains frogs and insects at certain seasons. It will not rain to- 
 
 de art. en temps, 
 
 day, but I fear that it may rain to-morrow. Let us sit down upon 
 
 ne 
 the grass. Do not make so much noise, I cannot learn my 
 
 herbe,/. •••tant-" 
 
 lesson. Do you know what has happened to her? No; I do 
 
 est 
 not know. 
 
 EXERCISE XLV. 
 
 When he arrived at home, he was quite exhausted. The minister 
 
 Chez lui, • -n' en pouvoir plus- • 
 
 had so many people at his levee that I could not speak to him. Are 
 
 monde k audience 
 you afraid that he will not accomplish that affaii 1 I 
 
 pouvoir, subj. pr. venir k bout de 
 
 know that he is not your friend, but I know likewise that he is 
 
 de pi. aussi ce 
 
 a man of probity. Let them know that their pardon depends on 
 bien. gr^ce de 
 
 Ifteir submission. I could wish that he knew his lessons a little 
 
 soumission. 
 better. Let us see if this ^new-fashioned igown becomes you, or 
 
 d' un nouveau gout robe,/, 
 not. Be assured that 2too 3gaudy 'colours will not become you. 
 
 Hon. art. voyant /. 
 
 f he head-dress which that lady wore became her very ill. These 
 
 I coiffure * !uj 
 
142 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 colours become you so well, that you would do wrong to wear 
 
 ...avoir tort de en porter 
 
 any others. Set that child in this arm-chair, and take care lest 
 de prendre garde que 
 
 he fall. I will sit down on the top of that hill, whence I 
 ne sommet 
 
 shall discover a prospect no less magnificent than diversified. We 
 — d^couvrir-- sc6ne,/. aussi vari6. 
 
 were seated on the banks of the Thames, whence we were contem- 
 bord Taniise,/. 
 
 plating myriads of vessels, which carry every year the 
 
 de art. millier apporter art. pi 
 
 riches of the two hemispheres. 
 
 EXERCISE XLVI. 
 
 See the 2admirable 'order of the universe : does it not announce a 
 
 ^supreme 'architect 1 Has he again seen with pleasure his country 
 artisan ? 
 
 and his friends'? Had he had a glimpse of the dawn of this fine day ? 
 
 aurore 
 To finish their affairs, it would be necessary for them to 
 
 Pour falloir que — — — 
 
 see one another. I clearly foresaw, from that time, all the 
 
 ils s'entrevoir, sM&j. m. bien d6s-lors 
 
 obstacles he would have to surmount. Would you wish that 
 
 m, qjie surmonter. 
 
 the judge should put off the execution of the sentence that he had 
 
 arr^t 
 pronounced 1 I shall not put off the pursuit of that affair. If 
 
 rendu 1 poursuite art. 
 
 men do not provide for it, God will provide for it. Would this book 
 
 •y 
 be good for nothing 1 You have not paid for this ground more than 
 valoir — — terre,/. 
 
 it is worth ; are you afraid that it is not worth six hundred 
 ne • -ne suhj. pr.- • 
 
 pounds 1 One ounce of gold is equivalent to fifteen ounces of 
 livres sterling'? once,/. 
 
 silver. Doubt not that reason and truth will prevail 
 
 art. art. ne •■subj.pr. 
 
 at last. I can and will tell the truth. If you are willing, he 
 la longue. le 
 
 will be willing too. Be so good as to lend me your grammar, 
 .e Vouloir — 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 143 
 
 EXERCISE XLVII. 
 
 If I would, I could soon know whether Mrs. D. has seen your aunt, 
 
 si 
 or not. The last time I was in the park, I could not distinguish her, 
 on account of the trees that were between her and me ; I have only 
 ■ •a cause" 
 been able to have a glimpse of her. When you know your lesson, 
 
 saurez 
 come and repeat it to me. Did you not know that Mr. A. was to 
 — ' r^p^ler — 
 
 marry Miss B. ? I knew it, but was not willing to tell your brother of 
 6pouser parler & 
 
 it. He who cannot command himself, is incapable of commanding 
 se 
 others. We ought to make a ^judicious 'choice of those 
 aux devoir judicieux choix, m. — 
 
 friends, to whom we intend to give our confidence. Do you know 
 
 vouloir 
 where Miss B. lives ? Yes, I do ; and I see her every 
 
 demeurer ? — le sais ; 
 
 day at her window. Why will you not tell it me ? Some told me 
 that your brother could not pay me ; others told me that he would 
 not. We regularly pay all that we owe; but he says that he will pay 
 nobody. You saw with what goodness she received him. Every 
 
 body thinks, that, if they had pursued the enemy briskly, they 
 
 vigoureusement, 
 might have ended the war on that day. If you want 
 
 finir — La, avoir besoin de 
 
 that book you may take it ; it is at your service. May I go and seo 
 
 him ] Yes, you may ; but come back as soon as you can. 
 le aussitdt que fut 
 
 'IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS OF THE 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 EXERCISE XLVIII. 
 
 Wood which is burned resolves itself into ashes and smoke. 
 Jirt. on bruler se r^soudre en en 
 
 Have they resolved on peace or war? The fog has resolved 
 on — art. f. art. f. m. 
 
144 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 itself into rain. Could that judge so lightly absolve the guilty? 
 
 I6g6rement coupable ? pL 
 
 ^Strong ^waters dissolve metals. Those drugs were I 
 
 Jlrt. art. On drogue 
 
 dissolved before they were put into that medicine. My 
 
 avant de les — infin. pr. remade, m. 
 
 sister was sewing ^all ^day ^yesterday. That piece is not * 
 
 ^la journ^e 
 well seWed, it must be sewed over again. Unstitch that lace, 
 
 la inf. pr. dentelle, /. 
 
 and sew i,* again very carefully. Does he set a great 
 
 avec beaucoup de soin mettre 
 
 value upon riches'? I never admitted those principles. Has he 
 priXj m. h art. 
 committed that fault 1 If he would take my advice he would resign 
 
 fautel/. me en croyait se demettre de 
 
 his charge in favour of his son. His ^arm ^he put out of joint 
 
 /. en *Le — "Sse 'demettre- 
 
 yesterday. I will omit nothing that depends on me, to 
 
 de ce de pour * 
 
 serve you. God frequently permits the wicked to prosper, 
 
 souvent que m^chants ••subj.pr.-- 
 
 Put this book in its place again. Under whatever form of govem- 
 a. /. quelque gouverne- 
 
 ment you may live, remember that your first duty is to be 
 
 ment que devoir de 
 
 obedient to the laws. It frequently happens that fathers transmit 
 
 soutnis art. 
 
 to their children both their vices and their virtues. He has long 
 
 meddled with ^public 'affairs ; but his endeavours have not been 
 s' entremettre de efforts 
 
 crowned with success, 
 de 
 
 EXERCISE XLIX. 
 
 I took great pains: but, at last, I ground all the coffee. Grind 
 beaucoup de sivg. enfin, caf^, m. 
 
 those razors with care. Those knives are just ground. This grain 
 rasoir venir d' etre 
 
 is not sufficiently grouna, it should be ground again. I wish 
 assez falloir le inf. pr. 
 
 that you would take courage. What news have you learned 1 
 
 Philosophy comprehends logic, ethics 
 
 art. art. f. art. morale,/. 9. art 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES- 145 
 
 physics, and metaphysics. It is with difficulty that he 
 
 physique,/.*. art. f.s. Ce • •difficilement- • 
 
 divests himself of his opinions. I fear you will undertake 
 
 • -se d^prendre- • que ne subj. pr.- •• • 
 
 a task above your strength. Could he have bean mistaken 
 
 t^che au-dessus de pi. 
 
 ■50 grossly ■? I reproved him continually for his faults, but to no 
 
 reprendre sans cesse de d^faut, • -inu- 
 
 urpose. We surprised the enemy, and cut them to pieces. In 
 
 lement. pi. tailler en i 
 
 ..le middle of the road the axletree of our carriage broke. Bad 
 
 essieu se rompre. art. 
 
 ompany corrupts the minds of young people. Why do you inter- 
 
 pl. sing. gens, 
 
 upt your brother, when you see him busy 1 
 
 occup6 1 
 
 EXERCISE L. 
 
 For a long while 'we ^followed that method, which was calculated 
 • •■siong-temps-- /. ne propre 
 
 only to mislead us. What is the consequence ] See the errors 
 
 6garer Que s' ensuivre 1 
 
 that have sprung from this proposition, which appeared so true 1 
 
 s' ensuivre 
 We pursued our course when some cries, which came from the 
 
 suivre chemin lorsque J^s sorlis 
 
 midst of the forest, excited terror in our souls. The Greeks 
 fond porter art. f. Grec 
 
 vanquished the Persians at Marathon, Salamis, Platea, and Mycale. 
 
 Per&e Salamine, Platte, 
 
 I have, at last, convinced him, by ^such ^powerful -reasons, of 
 
 si fort Ides 
 
 the greatness of his fault, that I have no doubt but he 
 
 6normit6 /. ne doiiter nuUement que ne 
 
 will repair it. It is during winter that they thrash the corn, 
 
 •subj.pr.. Ce pendant art. on battre 
 
 j in 3cold 2countries. The enemy was so completely beaten in 
 
 i ^art. Ttt. pi. 
 
 that engagement, that he was forced to abandon thirty leagues of the 
 I rencontre, de lieue — 
 
 I country.- The cannon beat down the tower. They were fighting 
 I canon abattre tour,/. 
 
 'iWith unexampled fury, when a 2panic Herror made 
 
 un 2sans Vxemple lacharnement 
 jthem take flight, and dispersed them in an instant. Beat 
 
 I leur art. fuite,/ 
 
 I G 10 
 
146 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 these mattresses again. Happy are those who live in solitadel 
 
 — arL retraite! 
 
 He did not long survive a person who was so dear to him. 
 
 d. f. 
 
 Fathers live again in their children. He was in a strange 
 
 dejection of mind; but the news which he has received has 
 accableracnt ont fail 
 
 revived him. 
 ivf. pr. 
 
 EXERCISE LI. . 
 
 What will you have him do 1 Do not make so much 
 Que vouloir — que — il subj. pr. 
 
 noise. Do they never exact? That woman mimicked all the 
 de 
 
 persons whom she had seen ; this levity rendered her odious. It 
 que 16g6ret6 
 
 was with difficulty he divested himself of the false opinions 
 peine que se d^faire /. 
 
 which had been given him in his infancy. Could it be possible 
 
 on — lui /. 
 
 that we should not again make a journey to Paris, Rome and 
 
 • ••refaire-" le — voyage de 
 Naples 1 He says that you have offended him, and that if you do 
 
 not satisfy him quickly, he will find means to satisfy 
 
 promptement, art. moyen, m. de se 
 
 himself. Every night, she milked her goats, which gave 
 
 iui mfeme. art. soir, pi. 
 
 her a great quantity of wholesome milk. Have you milked 
 
 lui ^abondant-' •• ^et ♦sain ^lait, m. 
 
 your goats 1 Are the cows milked 1 Salt is good to entice 
 
 chevrel vache attraire 
 
 pigeons. You will never know the nature of bodies, 
 
 art. connaitre art. 
 
 if you do not abstract their Accidental Equalities from those which 
 
 are inherent in them. The least thing diverts his attention. 
 
 ••leuf" moindre le distraire 
 
 "Will you not extract that charming passage 1 Have you darneJ 
 
 your gown? Should he not redeem that landl What! would 
 
 Quoi! 
 you that I should screen those guiltj persons from the rigour of the 
 
 ••soustraire-' — ft /. 
 
 laws : 
 
GRAMMAR AIND EXERCISES. 147 
 
 EXERCISE LII. 
 
 Was not Virgil born at Mantua 1 It is from that 2poisoned 'source 
 
 Mantoue 1 Ce empoisonn6 /. 
 
 that have arisen all the 2cruel 'wars that have desolated the universe 
 Bont n6 /. 
 
 The fable says, that as soon as Hercules had cut off one of the heads 
 /. Hercule / 
 
 of tJie Hydra others spranpf up. While their 2united 
 
 Hydre *de eautre ^il 'en ^renaitre. Tandis que r^uni 
 
 •flocks fed on the ^tender ^and ''flowery 'grass, they sung under 
 
 m. paitre — f. k 
 
 the shade of a tree the sweets of ^imal Uife. Your horses 
 
 ombre douceur art. champfetre 
 
 have not fed to-day ; you must have Hhem fed. 
 
 repaitre d' aujourd'hui; 'faire inf.pr 
 
 He is a man who thirsts 2after nothing 'but blood and slaughter. 
 Ce ne se repaitre de — que carnage. 
 
 Young people tell what they do, old people what they have done, 
 jfrf, gens vieillards 
 
 and fools what they intend to do. You may set out when 
 sot se proposer de 
 
 you please ; we will follow you 
 11 vous plaire,/ut. 5. 
 
 EXERCISE Lm. 
 
 The thunder whicli roared from afar announced a ^dreadful 
 
 VI. bruire dans art. lointain 
 
 'storm. They heard roar the waves of an ^agitated 'sea. That 
 orage, m. On flot /. 
 
 street is too noisy for those who love retirement and study. I 
 
 /. bruyant art. retraite 
 
 have a glimpse of something that shines through those trees. 
 
 entrevoir au travers de 
 
 A ray of hope shone upon us in the midst of the misfortunes 
 raj'on, m. — k milieu 
 
 which overwhelmed us. Every thing is well rubbed in that house ; 
 
 accabler frott^ 
 
 every thing shines, even the floor. Would he not have 
 
 y reluire, jusque S. plancher, m. 
 injured you in that affair 1 Will you preserve these peaches with 
 
 confire & 
 
 sugar, with honey, or with brandy 1 Did you pickl« 
 art. m. art. m. art. , f. 
 
148 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 cucumbers, purslain, and sea-fennell If he 
 
 des concoinbre,m. de art. pourpier, m. de art. perce-pierrel/. 
 
 loses his law-suit, all his property will not suffice. 
 proc6s, TO. bien, m. 
 
 EXERCISE LIV. 
 
 Always speak truth, but with discretion. Never contradict 
 
 dire art. f. 
 
 any one in public. You thought you were serving me in speak- 
 personne — — inf. 
 ing thus ; well, let it be so ; you shall not be contradicted, 
 eh: bien, soit en dedire 
 
 What ! would you forbid him all communication with his friends ] 
 Quoi ! interdire 
 
 That woman who slandered every one, soon lost all kind 
 
 de esp6ce, / 
 
 of respect. You had foretold that event. Let us curse no 
 
 consideration. 
 
 one ; let us remember that our law forbids us to curse even 
 
 se rappeler d^fendre de 
 
 those who persecute us. Write every day the reflections which 
 
 you make on the books you read. Did he not read that 2in- 
 
 que 
 teresting history with a great deal of pleasure 1 God is an 2infinite 
 
 ibeing who is circumscribed neither by time nor place. 
 
 6tre ne ni art. m. lieu, m. 
 
 Will you not describe in that episode the ^dreadful ^tempest which 
 
 horrible 
 assailed your hero 1 Get ^ti^ose "soles ^and ^whitings ^fried. 
 
 Faire sole merlan inf.pr. 
 
 If you wish to form your taste, read over and over, unceasingly, 
 
 vouioir — sans-cesse, 
 
 the andents. He was elected by a great majority of voices. We 
 
 k 
 have laughed heartily, and have resolved to go on. He 
 
 de bon coeur, nous de continuer. 
 
 did not answer him any thing: but he smiled at him, as a 
 lui •••rien-'- — lui, en -• 
 
 sign of approbation, in the -kindest 'manner, 
 de gracieux air, m. 
 
 EXERCISE LV. 
 
 Seated under the shade of palm-trees, they were milking their goats 
 
 d. palmier, 
 
 and ewes, and ^merrily 'drinking that nectar, which was renewed 
 brebis, avec joie m. se renouveler 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 149 
 
 every day. Should they not have drunk with ice 1 This 
 
 k art. f. 
 Window does not shut well; when you have made some alterations 
 
 reparation 
 in it, it will shut better. He had scarcely closed his eyes 
 
 • •y-' mieux. si peine — art. 
 
 when the noise which they made at his door awoke him. Have 
 que on k r^veiller 
 
 they not enclosed the suburbs within the city 1 Will you en- 
 on faubourg /, 
 
 close your park with a wall, or a hedge? Put the eggs of 
 
 pare de mur, m. haiel /. ceuf 
 
 those silk-worms in the sun, that they may hatch. Those 
 
 vers-a.-soie, m. & 
 flowers, just blown, spread the sweetest fragrance, 
 
 nouvellement r^pandre parfuin,f«. 
 
 When did they conclude this treaty 1 His enemies managed 
 
 trait6? m. faire 
 
 so well, that he was unanimously excluded from the company. 
 
 unanimement 
 Did you think me capable of ^so ^black 'an 2act 1 He possesses 
 
 croire traitl m. avoir 
 
 some knowledge ; but not so much as he thinks. 
 savoir;7K. •••ils'en faittropaccroire- •• 
 
 CHAPTER VT. 
 OF THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 207. The participle is a part of the verb which par- 
 takes of the properties both of a verb and an adjective : 
 of a verb as it has its signification and regimen ; of an 
 adjective, as it expresses the quality of a person, or thing. 
 
 208. There are two participles : the participle present^ 
 and the participle past. 
 
 OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 209. The participle present always terminates in ant: 
 SiS,parlant.,Jinissant, recevant, vendant. 
 
 210. It always expresses an action, and is indeclin 
 able : as, 
 
150 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 TJne montagne dominant sur A mmmtain commanding im 
 
 des plaines immenses. mense plains. 
 
 Je vols des hommes venant a I see men coming to us. 
 nous. 
 
 211. What grammarians call the gerund^ is nothing 
 but the participle present with the preposition en prefixed 
 to it: as, on se forme P esprit en lisant de bans Uvres^ we 
 form our minds by reading good books. 
 
 212. There are adjectives which are spelled like the 
 participle present; but as they imply merely an attribute 
 of the noun, and do not express an action, and moreover 
 agree with their substantives in gender and number, it will 
 not be difficult to distinguish them from it. Thus : 
 
 Je vois (3es agneaux hondis- I see lambs skipping in the 
 
 sunt (part.) dans la plaine. plain. 
 
 J' airae a voir les agneaux I like to see skipping lambs 
 
 bondissans (adj.) errer dans la ramble in the plain. 
 plaine. 
 
 213. The first sentence of the preceding example con- 
 veys the idea that the lambs are Jioio engaged in tlie act 
 of skipping ; while the second merely implies that it is au 
 attribute, or propensity, of lambs to skip. 
 
 EXERCISE LVI. 
 
 This woman is of good disposition, obliging every one, whenever 
 
 un caract6re, toutUimonde, quand 
 
 she has it in her power. They go cringing before the great, 
 
 lepeut ramper devant pi. 
 
 that they may be insolent to their equals. The state of 
 
 afin de — inf.pr. avec ^gal. 
 
 pure nature is that of the savage, living in the desert, but living in 
 
 his family, knowing his children, loving them, making use ot 
 
 faniille,/. connaitre , user----" -^^ 
 
 speech, and making himself understood. An ^agreeable 
 
 art. parole,/. se fkift entendre 
 
 'languor, imperceptibly laying hold of my senses, suspended the 
 langueur,/. insensiblement s' emparer sens, 
 
 activity of my soul, and I fell asleep. Time is a real blunderer, 
 s' endormir. vrai brouillon. 
 
 placing, replacing, ordering, disordering, impressing, erasing, ap- 
 mettre, ranger. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 151 
 
 preaching, removing, and making all things good and bad ; and 
 
 rendre 
 almost always making them impossible to be known again. Sha 
 
 m^con naisable 
 
 met your father as she was coming here. My mother wai 
 
 en on 
 
 told the day before yesterday that your sister, remembering 
 
 dire & avant hier se ressouvenir de 
 
 the injuries she had received from your brother, refused to see him. 
 que 
 
 OF THE PARTICIPLE PAST. 
 
 214. The participle past has various terminations : as, 
 aime^Jini^ regu, ouvert, dlssous, &c. 
 
 "^15.^ When accompanied by the auxiliary verb i rf, 
 it aTvvays agrees in gender and number with its subject, as, 
 
 Mon frere est tombe. My brother is fallen. 
 
 Ma soeur est tombee. My sister is fallen. 
 
 Mes soeurs sont tombees. My sisters are fallen. 
 
 21^.^, When it follows the verb avoir^ it never agrees 
 with its subject. 
 
 217. But it agrees with its object direct^ when, that ob 
 ject is placed before it : as, when speaking of 
 
 7ny sister .• Je V ai vue. I have seen her. 
 your books : Je les ai lus. I have read them, 
 my sisters .• Je les ai vues. I have seen them. 
 
 218. And does not agree M^ith its object direct.^ when 
 that object is placed after it: as, 
 
 J' ai vu ma socur. 7 have seen my sister. 
 
 J' ai lu vos livres. I have read your bonks. 
 
 y aivu mes soeurs. I have seen my sisters. 
 
 219. It never agrees with its object indirect.^ whethei 
 placed before, or after it : as, 
 
 C' est la lettre dont je vous ai This is the letter of which I have 
 
 parle. spoken to you. 
 
 Je vous ai parle de cette / have spoken to yon of this 
 
 It'ttre. letter. 
 
 220. The participle past of an impersonal verb Im 
 always indeclinable : as, 
 
152 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 Les pluies qu' il afait. The rains which we have had. 
 
 Les chaleurs qu' il y a eu. The heats which we have had. 
 
 221. In the compound tenses of verbs essentially pro- 
 nominal^ that is, of those verbs which cannot be conju- 
 gated without two pronouns, the participle past always 
 agrees with its object, which always precedes it: as, 
 
 Elle s' est moquee de vous. She has laughed at you. 
 
 Elles se sont repenties. They have repented. 
 
 222. There is but one exception to this rule, which ?s 
 the verb s' arroger : as, ils se sont arroge des droits, they 
 have assumed rights. 
 
 223. The participle past of the verbs accidentally pro 
 nominal, that is, of those which can be conjugated with a 
 single pronoun, has the same rules as the participle pas% 
 of verbs not pronominal, as stated in articles 217, 218, 
 219, ante : as, 
 
 art. 217: Lucrece s' est tttee. Lucretia has killed herself. 
 
 ar^ 218: lis &e sor\i partage They have apportioned the 
 
 r empire. empire among themselves. 
 
 art. 219. Ils se sont parle. They have spoken to each other. 
 
 EXERCISE LVII. 
 
 ON THE PAHTICIPLB PAST ACCOMPAlSriEI) BY THE VERB ctve. 
 
 Fire-arms were not known to the ancients. Heaven is that 
 Art. armes-&-feu de 
 
 ^permanent 'city, into which the just are to be received after this 
 
 cite, /. o\i devoir 
 
 life. In ^Abraham's stime the threatenings of the true God 
 
 De i«r«. /. 
 
 were dreaded by Pharaoh; but, in the time of Moses, all na 
 
 redouter , de Phaiaon ; ■ Moise, art. 
 
 tions were corrupted, and the world which God has made to ma 
 
 pervertir, pour 
 
 nifest his glory, had become a temple of idols. That ^dreadful ^crisis 
 
 terrible cri«e. f 
 which threatened the state with ^instant 'destruction, was happily 
 
 de prochain /. 
 
 soon past. She is come to bring us all kinds of refreshments. 
 
 passer. — sorte,/. rafraichisseiuenl. 
 
 My brothers are gone to Dover, and intend to pay you a visiJ 
 Douvres, se proposer de rendre — 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 153 
 
 when they are come back. The houses which are built in the winter 
 
 fut. ••revenir-' /. — 
 
 are not so wholesome as those which are begun in the spring and 
 
 sain k 
 
 finished in the middle of summer. ^Virtuous ^people are 
 
 ^ art. ^art. 
 
 esteemed and respected, even by those who are not so. 
 mfime de le. 
 
 EXERCISE LVIII. 
 
 ON THE PABTICIPLE PAST ACCOMPAIS'IEn BY THE VERB avOlT, ATSTD 
 FOLLOWED, OR PRECEDED, BY ITS OBJECT DIRECT. 
 
 All the letters which I have received, confirm that ^important 'news. 
 
 /. /• 
 
 The 2agitated 'life which I have led till now, makes me sigh for 
 mener aprfig 
 
 retirement. The sciences which you have studied, will prove 
 art. retraite,/. §tre 
 
 infinitely useful to you. What fortunes has not this revolution 
 
 ruined I What tears has she not shed ; what sighs has she 
 renverser ! Que de verser ; 
 
 not heaved ! The language in which Cicero and Virgil have written, 
 
 pousser! /. — Cic^ron 
 
 will live in their works. She has taken the resolution of going into 
 
 par /. a 
 
 the country. I am very sorry for the trouble this affair has 
 
 /. de peine,/, que 
 
 given to your aunt. The letter which you have written to me in 
 
 French was well enough ; I have shown it to your aunt, who % 
 
 Smuch ^pleased with it. I have not yet received the goods 
 
 tr6s content •■len-- marchandise,/. 
 
 which you sent me. Ladies, have you returned him the letters 
 
 Mesdames, rendre 
 
 wki^-h he had desired you to read"? Where did you buy those 
 
 prier de 
 
 gloves ■? I bought them in France. Alexander conquered Asia 
 
 art 
 with the troops which his father Philip had disciplined. The faults 
 
 which he had committed, ^greatly 'increased his prudence. He has 
 beaucoup augmenter /. 
 
 spent all the treasures which his father had amassed with so much 
 
 tr^sor, m. 
 care and labour. I have not forgotten the good services which you 
 
154 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 have done to my mother. The reasons which you have given us 
 
 rendre 
 have satisfied us. I have lost my books. What books have you 
 
 lost] The fine actions your brothers have done, will be trans- 
 
 que 
 mitted to posterity. 
 
 an. 
 
 EXERCISE LIX. 
 
 OJS THE PARTICIPLE PAST OF IMPEKSOXAI, YEHBS. 
 
 The great changes which have taken place in the administration 
 
 changement y avoir 
 
 have astonished many people. The heavy rains which we have had 
 
 bien grand /. 
 
 in the spring, have been the cause of many diseases. The scarcity 
 a. disette,/. 
 
 which there was ^last ^winter, has afiforded the opportunity oi 
 
 lart. donner occasion 
 
 doing much good. What news has reached you 1 How many 
 
 bien. sing, est-il venir Que de 
 
 imprudent steps were taken on that occasion ! How many 
 
 faux d-marche,/. se faire en 
 
 large ships have been built in England within these fifty years! The 
 gros ee construire d^puis — 
 
 storm which we had yesterday has done a great deal of damage 
 
 tempdte,/. causer dommage 
 
 to our ships. The high winds which they have had in the county 
 
 grand comt* 
 
 of Lancaster, have blown down many houses and trees. 
 
 renverser 
 
 EXERCISE LX. 
 
 OW THE PARTICIPI.E PAST OF PHOXOMIXAX VERBS. 
 
 The death which Lucretia gave herself has immortalized her. The 
 /. --se donner- • immortaliser 
 
 cities which those nations have built for themselves are but a 
 
 ville,/. peuple se b^tir 
 
 collection of huts The chimeras which she has got 
 
 amas, TO. chaumiere. clum6re,/. se mettre 
 
 into her head pass all belief. The Amazons made them- 
 
 — art. croyance,/. • -se rendre- 
 
 selves famous by their courage. The ci^ of London has mads 
 ' c^ldbrs 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 155 
 
 itself, by its commerce, the metropolis of the universe. iVlen 
 
 m. Art. 
 
 built themselves cities. That woman has bestowed on herself 
 
 seba.tir se donner 
 
 fine gowns. She has cut two of her fingers. I have 
 de se couper — — 
 
 given myself a great deal of trouble. They have made an 
 
 peine,/. se donner — 
 
 appointment. My sisters have qu irrelled the whole day, but are 
 rendez-vous. se quereller 
 
 now reconciled. He is the man of whom our neighbours have 
 
 Ce ••dont-' 
 
 complained. We saw ourselves surrounded by more than twenty 
 se plaindre. ' entourer 
 
 persons. We had thought ourselves able to resist them, but 
 
 secroire de leur, 
 
 we have been deceived. She took ple^isure in contradicting 
 
 • -se tromper- • se plaire ft. 
 
 me. Some of our 2modern 'authors have imagined 
 
 Quelques-uns s' imaginer que 
 
 they surpassed the ancients. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 ^^§p In the simple tenses, the adverb is generally 
 placed after the verb ; and, in the compound tenses, be- 
 tween the auxiliary and the participle : as, 
 
 II se porte hmi. He is well. 
 
 II s' est bien porte. He has been ivell. 
 
 225. Compound adverbs, and those which are derived 
 from adjectives, are always placed after the verb : as. 
 
 C est d la mode. That is fashionable. 
 
 II a agi consequemment. He has acted consiatently. 
 
 226. Adverbs of order, rank, and those which express 
 a determinate time, are placed either before or after the 
 verb : as, 
 
156 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FREXCH 
 
 Nous devons premierement We ought, first, to do mn 
 
 faire notre devoir; secondement duty; secondly, to enjoy lawfui 
 
 chercher les plaisirs permis. pleasures. 
 
 Aujuurd' hui il fait beau; 11 To-day it is fine,- it will rain, 
 
 pleuvra peut-etre demain. perhaps, to-morrow. ^ 
 
 < .227!^ Tlie adverbs comment., 'ou^ (Pcmi^'parou., com'^ 
 bien. j^ur'giipi^ 'qudnd', used with or without interrogation 
 are always placed before the verb which they modify : as^ 
 
 Com?nent vous portez-vous? How do you do? 
 
 Ou allez-vous ] Wliere are you going ? 
 
 228. The adverb is always placed before the adjec- 
 tive which it modifies : as, 
 
 C est una femme fort belle, She is a woman very beautiful, 
 ires sensible, et infiniment sage, of gnat sensibility, and infinitely 
 
 \ prudent. 
 
 /^"^ ^^A>W^ - 
 
 (^229jP Beaucoup is not, as in English, susceptible of 
 bemg modified by any adverb : thus, we do not say, tres 
 beaucoup, trop beaucoup, &c. 
 
 230. Bien, when it precedes another adverb, means 
 very, much, &c. : as, 
 
 Bien moins. Much less. 
 Bien tard. Very late. 
 
 231. But when it is placed after the adverb, it signifies 
 well: as, 
 
 Assez bien. Pretty v:ell. 
 Fort bien. Very ivell. 
 
 EXERCISE LXI. 
 
 We do not expect him to-day. If it be fine weather, I shall be 
 back this day se'nnight I shall be glad to see you this day fort- 
 night, if I am well. This day week I was at your house. A 
 
 • -Chez vous- • 
 
 year hence you will be able to speak French tolerably well. He 
 
 • pouvoir- • 
 has as much money and as many friends as you. I was so much 
 
 the more persuaded of what you told me, that I dismissed him this 
 
 day three weeks. My sister has just as much wit, and is just as 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXFJRCISES. 157 
 
 amiable as yours. Hati. off, gentlemen, and sit down. There is a 
 
 man below, whom you will see with pleasure. Though we said it 
 
 for fun, he was very angry with us. He has much increased his 
 
 contra 
 fortune. Sir, I have done my exercise. Well and good. 
 
 th6me. A la bonne heure. 
 
 My father has bought a horse very cheap. They wandered to and 
 
 fro without knowing whither to go. Some went to London 
 
 Les uns 
 
 in a coach, others on horseback. How far is it hence to 
 
 en — art. k 
 
 Dover 1 How long will it be before you send me back the 
 
 Douvres 1 Dans combien de temps 
 
 books I loaned you ] They run up and down all day, and ^do 
 
 'nothing but play. I know how that happened : talk no more of 
 
 ne 
 it. I will call upon you to-morrow, and the day after we will 
 
 passer chez 
 go and see my uncle. We will pay you the day after to-mor- 
 row, if we can. My brother often speaKs with a double meaning. 
 
 Tou have put on your waistcoat the wrong side outwards. My 
 
 mettre 
 brother and yours work in emulation of one another. Whatever 
 
 may happen, I do not care for it. He did it in the twinkling 
 
 se soucier 
 of an eye. 
 
 EXERCISE LXII. 
 
 This morning I awoke suddenly, but I soon fell asleep again. 
 s' dveiller 
 
 Let every one speak in his turn, for if you speak all together, how 
 
 Que k 
 
 can I hear what you say ? They demolished the house from top 
 
 to bottom. How long, O Catiline, will you abuse our pa- 
 
 * Catilina, abuser de 
 
 tience 1 You always come to see me by night ; why do you not 
 
 — de 
 
 come in the day-time T It is not amidst the pleasures of this 
 
 de — — parmi 
 
 world that we find happiness ; it is in the bosom of inno- 
 art. seiu art. 
 
158 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 cence and peace, where we ought to look for it. There is no 
 
 que chercher- 
 
 going any where in winter. He speaks so low that I can hardly 
 
 hear what he says. The Spaniards pursued them so closely 
 Espagnol de pr6s 
 
 that they entered the town helter-skelter. Let the worst come 
 
 dans 
 to the worst, I will get rid of it. All our rooms are on the same 
 
 •se defaire- 
 floor. You give me more than enough. You come very sea- 
 sonably, and your brother came in the nick of time. She is better 
 
 than her sister, in all respects. Our eating-room is even with 
 
 t 6gard. 
 
 the ground. 
 
 CHAPTER Vni. 
 
 OF THE PREPOSITION. 
 
 ( 
 
 232. Prepositions may be divided, according to their . 
 regimen, into three classes : 
 
 233. 1. Those which govern the nouns without the j, 
 assistance of any other preposition : as a, de, des, &c. 
 
 234. 2. Those which govern the nouns with the 
 assistance of the preposition a : which are, conformed |i 
 ment, jiLsqv? or jusques, par rapport, quant, attenant, &c 
 And, 
 
 235. 3. Those which govern them with the assistance b 
 of the preposition de : as, aupres, autour, &c. 
 
 236. A, de, en, must be repeated before every sub- 
 
 itantive. 
 
 • 
 
 237. The other prepositions, particularly those which ; 
 have only one syllable, are to be repeated before sub- 
 stantives wliieh have different or opposite meanings : "• 
 as, dans la paix, et dans la guerre ; par la force, et par 
 /' adresse. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 159 
 
 238. But they are not to be repeated when the nouns 
 are synonymous : as, dans la paix et la tranquillite; j}ar 
 la force et la violence. 
 
 EXERCISE LXTII. 
 ox pnEPOsiTioxs OF THE FiKST CLASS. See art. 233. 
 
 We find less 2real 'happiness in an ^elevated 'condition than in 
 
 On de 
 
 a ^middling 'state. One is never truly peaceful but at home. 
 
 moyen v^ritablement tranquille soi. 
 
 He walked before me to serve me as a guide. There was a 
 
 pour de — 
 
 ^delightful 'grove behind his house. Nature displays her riches 
 
 bosquet, m. d^ployer 
 
 with magnificence under the 2torrid 'zone. ^Eternal -ignows 
 
 3de3 ion 
 
 are to be seen on the summit of the Alps. Towards the north, nature 
 
 'voir sommet 
 
 assumes a ^gloomy ^and "^wild 'aspect. We were up before day light, 
 
 triste se lever — 
 
 m order to enjoy the Smagnificent 'spectacle of the 2rising 'sun. 
 
 •pour-' de 
 
 From my earliest infancy I have had an abhorrence of lying. 
 
 — art. tendre — horreur mensonge. 
 
 With wit, politeness, and some readiness to oblige, one gene- 
 
 un peu de provenance 
 
 rally succeeds in the world. Besides the^exterior 'advantages of 
 
 art 
 figure, and the graces of deportment, she possesses an 2excellent 
 
 art. maintien, avoir 
 
 'heart, a ^correct 'judgment, and a ^sensible 'mind. Always act 
 
 sain se conduire 
 
 according to the maxims which I have given you. We 
 — inculquer 
 
 cannot long act contrary to our own character; notwith- 
 eavoir cond. pr. agir •••contre--- — 
 
 standing all the pains we take to disguise it, it shows itself, and 
 
 que pour -semontrer- 
 
 betrays us on many occasions. I have written to you con* 
 
 en bien de art. 
 cerning that business, in which I take the most lively interest ; and 
 
 k lequel vif 
 
 as 1 know well your benevolence towards the unfortunate, 
 connaitre nialheureux. 
 
160 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 I have not the least doubt that you will carefully attend 
 
 ne douter nullement- • • ne donner tous vos soins, subj. pr. 
 
 to it, not so much for the satisfaction of obliging me, as for the pleasure 
 
 • -y moins 
 
 of justifying innocence and confounding calumny. When we 
 
 art. art. 
 
 were in the country, we devoted the morning to study, we 
 
 k consacrer matinee art. 
 
 walked at noon, and at three or four o'clock we went a hunting, or a 
 
 midi, 
 fishing. That man with his gloomy Mooks and Sguriy 
 
 pfeche,/. a — art. sombre regard, m. brusque 
 
 ^behaviour, seems fit only to serve as a scarecrow. In that happy 
 maintien, ne de — ^pouvantail. 
 
 retreat we lived on the milk of our flocks, and the ^delicious 'fruits of 
 
 de brebis, 
 
 our orchards. We were at peace, and ^enjoyed ^all 'its blessings, 
 
 en gouter en *art. charme, 
 
 when ambition rekindled the flames of war, and forced us 
 
 art. rallumer feu art. 
 
 to put our frontiers in a state of defence, 
 de — 
 
 EXERCISE LXIV. 
 
 05- PREPOsiTioxs OF THE sEcojTD CLASS. See art. 234. 
 
 A magistrate should always judge agreeably to the laws, and 
 
 according to what they prescribe. He has been punished 
 confer moment 
 
 pursuant to an act of parliament. His garden is next to 
 conform^ment attenant 
 
 mine. Yesterday we waited for him till five o'clock in the morning. 
 
 attendre de 
 
 If I had not stopped him, he would have gone even to Dover. W^e 
 
 jusque 
 accompanied them as far as Antwerp. I will do it for your 
 jusque Anvers. a 
 
 sake but never on account of them. As for me, I vdll not 
 consideration par rapport Quant 
 
 give him a penny. As to what people may say, I do not care for it. 
 sous. r on s' en soucier 
 
 EXERCISE LXV. 
 
 ox PHEPOsiTioxs or THE THIRD CLASS. See art. 235, 
 
 I have sent nothing to your brother, because of his idleness ; but i 
 
^ ^^ GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 161 
 
 forgU* him on your account. Cut that sorrel even with the 
 
 oseille,/. a. fleur — 
 
 ground. All laid down their arms, except two regiments, 
 
 mettre bas — art. 
 who preferred, making their way through the enemy. He is 
 
 sefairejour au-lravers pi. 
 
 become a very good master by dint of study and practice. Under 
 
 il force 
 that thick tree we shall be sheltered from the rain. All the prisoners 
 
 a r abri 
 made their escape by means of the darkness of the night. I am 
 • •• -s' dchapper • • • S. la faveur 
 
 going to meet my aunt ; will you accompany me 1 He took 
 
 ati (levant de 
 my hat instead of his. My house is good for nothing in compaVison 
 
 • ••valoir •• au prix 
 
 of hers. I can do nothing for want of money. They were 
 • -faute- • 
 off the Cape of Good Hope, when they were taken. He is 
 ft la hauteur 
 gone along the river. The officers and soldiers were lodged in 
 
 le long 
 barracks, proof to cannon and bomb, 
 a. r 6preuve 
 
 CHAPTER TX. 
 
 OF THE CONJUNCTION. 
 
 239. Conjunctions may be divided into three classes : 
 
 240. 1. Those which either govern the indicative, or 
 may be used with any mood : as, e/, om, sinon^ Stc. 
 
 241. 2. Those which require the following verb to be 
 in the infinitive mood : as, ajin de^ de fenr de, &c. And, 
 
 242.- 3. Those which require the following verb to be 
 ' in the subjunctive : as, afin que, qiiolque, &c. 
 
 EXERCISE LXVI. 
 
 ox coxjuxcTTOxs OF THE FIHST CLASS. ScB art. 240. 
 
 Gold and silver are metals less useful than iron. I like 
 [ jJ'-t. des ne 
 
 I nnither flatterers nor the wicked. You may choose either a happj 
 pi. ou 
 
 P* 11 
 
162 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 mediocrity, or a sphere more elevated, but exposed to many dangers. 
 
 /. 
 He is an 2inconsistent 'man ; he is sometimes of one opinion, and 
 Ce inr.ons^quent tant6t avis, 
 
 sometimes of another. I have nothing more to say to you, only 
 ne • autre chose • Biuon 
 
 that I will have it so. The serpent bites ; it is only a 
 vouloir — — ce ne 
 
 bite ; but from this bite the venom communicates iteelf to the 
 morsure ; /. venin 
 
 whole body : the slanderer speaks ; it is but a word ; but this 
 
 ce ne parole ; 
 
 word resounds every where. The most beautiful flowers last 
 » retentir ne durer 
 
 but a moment : thus ^human ^life 'passes away. The greater part 
 
 — plupart,/. 
 
 of mankind have, like plants, ^hidden Zqualities, that 
 
 art. hommes art. 'des propri^t^,/. 
 
 chance discovers. We ought to love what is amiable : now' 
 art. hasard faire decouvrir. or 
 
 virtue is amiable ; therefore we ought to love virtue. Despreaux 
 art. ' 
 
 was extremely particular in not coming too late, when he was^ 
 
 de la plus grande exactitude ^ 
 invited to dinner; he said that all the faults of those whc^ 
 
 d^faut 
 
 are waited for present themselves to those who wait for them. We 
 
 86 faire attendre — ' 
 
 had hardly done when he came in. I 
 
 finir entrer. 
 
 EXERCISE LXVII. 
 ON coxjtJKCTioxs OF THE sEcoxD CLASS. See art. 241. 
 
 In order to ^leam 'well, we must study with a great deal of attentionr 
 
 — falloir 
 Let us breakfast before we 2begin any thing. A prudent man oughj 
 
 — ... irien • • • 
 
 to think several times, before he acts. I would not do it for fear of 
 
 — agir. ■ 
 
 displeasing you. He is capable of every thing except of doinjg 
 
 — tout — 
 good. He lost his arm for want of sending for a surgeon. You.' 
 
 chirurgien. 
 cousin has humbled himself till he fell on his knees before the idol 
 • ••s' humilier- ••• . • a. •• 
 
 Far from exciting them to fight, I did all that I could, in order to pre 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISP:S. 163 
 
 vent them. She would do any thing in the world, rather than 
 
 •••tout'* a 
 speak to him. Rather than study, he loses his time, or spends it ir« 
 
 passer 
 trifles. We must, at least, know the 2general 'principles of a lan- 
 guage, before we take upon ourselves to teach it. 
 de se mcler de 
 
 EXERCISE LXVIir. 
 
 ox cojf JUNCTIONS OF THK THiuD CLASS. See art, 242. 
 
 To listen with joy to a slanderer, and to applaud him, is to cherish 
 — medisant, — lui, ce rdchaulf<?r 
 
 the serpent who stings, that he may sting more effectually, 
 
 afin surement. 
 
 Although Homer, according to Horace, slumbers at times, he 
 
 sommeiller quelquefois, n' en 
 is, nevertheless, the first of all poets. You will succeed, provideu 
 pas moins, r^ussir, 
 
 you act with vigour. I will explain to you every difficulty, 
 que afin 
 
 that you may not be disheartened in your undertaking. You will 
 d^courager 
 
 never be respected, unless you forsake the bad company you 
 abandonner que 
 
 keep. They are not happy, though they be rich. Although you 
 frequenter. 
 
 have a good memory, this is not enough to learn any language 
 
 pour une 
 
 whatever : you must make use of your judgment I will not give you 
 
 se servir 
 that penknife, lest you should make a bad use of it. God grant 
 
 .veuille que 
 you be not disappohited in your hopes ! Would to God I had 
 
 tromper Plut q.ue 
 
 been there ! T would have conquered or perished. God forbid 
 
 vaincie k ne plaise 
 
 I should blame your conduct. However little you give her, 
 
 que Pour peu que 
 
 she is of 3so ^good 'a 2temper, that she is always pleased. If your 
 
 naturel, 
 father do not arrive to-day, and if you want money, I 
 
 que avoir besoin de 
 
 will lend you some. 
 
164 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 OF THE INTERJECTION. 
 
 243. There arc interjections of different sorts, ac- 
 cording to the different passions which they serve to ex- 
 press : viz. 
 
 Aliens! Come! Hol^ho! Ho there! 
 
 Ah mon Dieu ! Oh my God! Hem ! Hem ! 
 
 Ha, quelle joie! Oh joy! Fi ! Fie! 
 
 O ciel ! Oh heaven ! Fi done ! For shame ' 
 
 Helas ! Alas ! Paix ! chut ! st! Hist ! husk ' 
 
 Misericordc ! Bless me ! Silence! Silence! 
 
 Malheur a vous ! Wo to you ! 
 
 EXERCISE LXIX. 
 
 Come ! friends, let us rejoice. Fie ! fie ! Robert, you do not reflect 
 
 • -se r^jouir- • 
 on what you say. Oh ! ihow ^lovely -^a ^virtue % ^modesty. Alas 
 
 que 
 who can express the torments I suffer here. Wo to you ! usurers, 
 
 misers. Bless me ! T am undone. Hush there ! silence. Oh ! tha 
 
 perdre 1& 
 
 dismal effects of idleness ! 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 165 
 
 PART II. 
 
 Syntax is that part of Grammar which treats of tht 
 Agreement and Construction of Words in a Sentence. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 244. Substantives generally have but one gender : there 
 are some, however, which are masculine or feminine, ac- 
 cording to their signification; and a few which are mas- 
 culine in one number, and feminine in the other. For a 
 list of these, see ante, page 45. 
 
 ^45?) Gens requires all adjectives which precede it to 
 bel^rmnine, and all which follow it to be masculine : as, 
 les vieilles gens sont soupgonneux ; toutes les mechanles 
 gens. 
 
 However, instead of foutes, ious is employed : 1st 
 When this adjective is the only one which precedes 
 gens : as, ious les gens d? esprit. 2d. When gens is 
 preceded by an adjective which has but one termination 
 for both genders : as, tous les honnetes gens ; tons les ha- 
 biles gens. (French Acad.) 
 
 246. Certain nouns remain in the singular number, 
 although there is plurality in the idea. These are : 
 
 247. J . Proper noun : as, Z' Espagne a vu natlre les 
 deux Seneque. 
 
 Except when they are employed as nouns common, to 
 designate individuals like those whose names we employ . 
 
166 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 as, la France a eu ses Cesars et ses Pompees ; that is, 
 generals equcil to Caesar and Pompey. 
 
 248. 2. Nouns borrowed from foreign languages, and 
 which are not yet made French : as, des alleluia, des ave, 
 des auto-da-fe, des alinea, &.c. 
 
 249. However, the French j\cademy writes, des fac- 
 iums, des debets, des bravos, des operas. 
 
 250. 3. Words used as nouns (parts of speech, &.c.), 
 which, naturally, are not declinable : as, les pourquoi, Its 
 car, les oui, les non, les on dif, Sec. 
 
 251. In nouns compounded of two or more words, 
 the only words that take the sign of the plural, are the 
 substantive and adjective : as, un plain-chant, des plains- 
 chants ; une plate-forme, des plates-formes, &.c. 
 
 252. There are some compound words, however, 
 which, of necessity, from their sense, do not change in 
 the plural, even where one of the words is a substan- 
 tive: such as, un crcve-cceur, des creve-coeur, literally, 
 hurst-heart, that is, great troubles that burst the heart ; 
 un coupe-gorge, des coupe-gorge, literally, cut-throat, 
 that is, places where a man is exposed to have his throat 
 cut. 
 
 253. When a noun is compounded of two substan- 
 tives united by a preposition, the iirst alone takes the sign 
 of the plural : as, un arc-en-ciel, a rainbow ; des arcs-en- 
 cLel, rainbows. 
 
 254. This last rule has the following exceptions : des 
 coq-a-V dne, cock and bull stories ; des pied-a-terre, 
 counti-y lodgings ; des tete-d-tete, private conversations. 
 
 255. Compound nouns, the second word of which 
 always marks plurality in the idea, take s, both in the 
 singular and in the plural : as, un cure-dents, a tooth-pick; 
 des casse-noisettes, nut-crackers. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 167 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 256. The article is to be put bt-fore all substantives 
 common, taken in a general sense : as, 
 
 L' hornme se repait trop sou- Man ton often beguiles hinir 
 
 vent de chimeres. self with chimeras, 
 
 Les hommes a imagination Men of intaglnative disposi- 
 
 sont toujours raalheureux. tions arc always unhappy. 
 
 257. In English, the article is not used before sub- 
 stantives taken in a general sense. 
 
 258. The article is also to be used before substantives 
 taken in a determinate sense, as in English : as, 
 
 L' homme dont vous parlez. TTie man of whom you speak. 
 
 L' enfant qui pleura. The child who cries. 
 
 259. The article is put before proper names of coun- 
 tries, regions, rivers, winds, and mountains : as. 
 
 La France est bornee au sud France is bounded oil the 
 
 par les Pyrenees et la Mediter- south by the Pyrenees and the 
 
 ranee, a V est par la Suisse et la Mediterranean, on the east by 
 
 Savoie, au nord par les Pays- Switzerland and Savoy, on the 
 
 Bas, et a /' ouest par 1' ocean. north by the Netherlands, and 
 
 on the west by the ocean. 
 
 Ija Taniise, le Rhone, V aqui- The T'lamcs, the Rhone, the 
 
 Ion, les Alpes, le Cantal. north wind, the Alps, the CantaL 
 
 Except Naples : as, 
 
 Naples est un pays delicieux. Naples is a delightful country, 
 
 260. The article is put before the adverbs plus., mieux, 
 mains., to express comparison, and agrees in gender witli 
 ihe substantive : as, 
 
 Cctte dame ne pleurait pas, That lady dd not cry, aU 
 
 quoiqu'elle fut la plus aftligee. though she was the most ajfflictid. 
 
 261. The article remains always in the masculine, 
 when we express a quality in the highest degree without 
 comparison : as, 
 
 Cctte dame ne pleure pas, That lady does not cry, even 
 lors meme qu' elle est le plus ivhen she is most [extremely] 
 affligce. afflicted. 
 
168 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 EXERCISE LXX. 
 
 The moment clejrance, the most visible ♦imaj^e of zfino 
 
 De que 25C* 279 un d^licat 
 
 'taste, appears, it is universally adnaired : men differ respecting the 
 
 se montre, '2L6 but 
 
 other constituent 'parts of beauty, but they all unite without 
 
 iqui 3couiposer — 256 se 
 
 hesitation in acknowledging the power of elegance. Tranquillity 
 
 t 256 256 
 
 of soul is the height of felicity. The man who lives under an 
 
 coiiible dans 
 
 ^habitual 'sense of the ^Jivine 'presence, preserves a perpetual 
 
 conviction conserver constant 
 
 cheerfulness o( temper, and enjoys, every moment, the satisfaction of 
 
 thinking himself in company with the dearest and best of friends. 
 
 Europe is bounded on the north by the Frozen Ocean; on the south 
 
 259 
 by the Mediterranean Sea, which separates it from Africa; on the 
 
 259 
 east by the continent of Asia ; on the west by the Atlantic Ocean. 
 
 Of all the planets, the moon is the most brilliant to us. The moon 
 
 260 
 does not give us so much light as the sun. even when it shines 
 
 brishtest. This woman has the art of shedding tears, even whep 
 
 261 
 she is least afflicted. 
 261 
 
 262. The article is put before substantives taken u 
 a jiarliiive sense; see art. 52, 53^ 154 ante : as, 
 
 Du pain. &jnie breed. 
 
 De r eau. Some wafer. 
 
 Dcs tableaux. Su me pictures. 
 
 263. The article is omitted, however, when the sub- 
 stantive, taken in a partitive sense, is preceded by an ad- 
 jective ; see art. 155 ante: as, 
 
 Je mange de bon pain. 7 eat gnnd bread. 
 
 Je Iiois de bonne eau. / drink uood icaler. 
 
 J' ai de beaux tableaux. 1 have beatil ful picfurea, 
 
 ^ That is: See art 256, page 167 ante, for the rule which is ap- 
 plicable here, &c &c. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES.' 169 
 
 264. When the adjective is joined to the substantive 
 so as to form but one word, the article must be used : as, 
 
 Des petits-inaitres. Fops. 
 
 Des petits-pois. Peas. 
 
 265. It may not be improper to observe here, that most 
 authors who have made literal translations from French 
 into English, have erroneously rendered the words da^ de 
 la., des, by some ; not thinking that nearly all sentences 
 of which these words form a part are elliptical. 
 
 For instance, when, sitting at table, 1 say, Donnez-mol 
 dttpniii, Give me some bread, I mean, Donnez-moi une 
 portion, on nil morceau dti pain qui est sur la tahle^ 
 Give me a portion, or a piece of the bread which is on the 
 table. So that it is easy to see, that in Donnez-moi du 
 pnin, the word portion., or morceau, which is the equiva- 
 lent oi' some, is understood in French ; whereas, du, of the, 
 is understood in English. The correct translation would 
 then be,* 
 
 Donnez-moi du pain. 
 
 Give me some — bread. 
 
 266. The French, unlike the English, do not put the 
 article before substantives employed adjectively, that is, 
 to qualify a preceding noun : as, 
 
 'J'clemaque, fils d' U lysse. Telemachus, the son of Ulysses. 
 
 Ijc Due d' York, prince du The Duke of York, a prince of 
 
 san^f. the blood. 
 
 Je suis Franpais. I ant a Frenchman. 
 
 267. But if the substantive be used in a restricted 
 sense, un or une must precede it, as in English : as, 
 
 Je snis un Franpais d' une I am a Frenchman of an illuS" 
 illustre maison. trious family. 
 
 268. The article is omitted before plus and moins^ 
 when either of them is repeated to express a compari- 
 son : as. 
 
 Plus une chose est difficile, Tlie more difficult a thing is, 
 plus elle est honorable. the more honourable it is. 
 
 \ * See Collet's " PiioonEssivE IxxERLTa-EAB Fhekch Reader*' 
 I in which this error has been carefully avoided. 
 I u 
 
170 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 EXERCISE LXXI. 
 I yesterday saw some learned men, who do not think as you do 
 
 I have given him bread, money, and clothes. You always read 
 
 liii 2G2 236 
 
 good books. Bad wine is not worth good water. He is always 
 263 valoir 
 
 seen with wits and noblemen. He was a man of 2uncommcn ' 
 
 204 Ce 267 un rare 
 
 'probity, and of ^tvied 'virtue: to recompense him for the ser- 
 
 un €pTcuv6 pour de | 
 
 vices he had rendered to the church and state, the king has made ' 
 que 236 ; 
 
 him a bishop. Jupiter, a god of the heathens, was the son 
 
 266 266 2G6 
 
 of Saturn, and the father of the other gods. Robert, duke of Nor- 
 mandy, the brother of Henry, king of England, was the son of 
 
 266 
 William the Conqueror. 
 
 I 
 
 CHAPTER IH. 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 269. The adjective agrees in gender and number with I 
 the substantive wiiich it qualifies or determines. f 
 
 OF THE QUALIFICATIVE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 270. From the preceding rule must be excepted, 
 when they precede the substantive, wm, bare, and demi, 
 half* as, 
 
 Nn-pieds. Barefooted. 
 
 Une demi-heure. Half an hour. 
 
 271. But the agreement takes place if 7im and demi be 
 placed after the substantive : as, 
 
 II a les pieds 7ius. His feet are bare. 
 
 Line heure et dernie. An hour and a half 
 
 272. Feu., late, does not agree with its substantive*^ 
 when another word is interposed between them : as, 
 
 Feu la reine. The late queen. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 171 
 
 J273. But the agreement takes place if the adjective be 
 placed immediately before the substantive : as, 
 La/eiic reine. The late queen. 
 
 274. Adjectives used substantively are, like substan- 
 tives common, accompanied by the article : as, 
 
 Les fans inventent les modes, et Fools invent fashions, and ivise 
 jes sages s' y conforment. men conform to them. 
 
 275. The adjective takes the article wherever there is 
 a noun expressed or understood : as. 
 
 La langue franpaise, et /' an- The French and English Ian- 
 glaise soat tres-cultivees. guages are very much cultivated. 
 
 The noun langue is here understood before anglaise. 
 
 276. When two or three adjectives qualify a single 
 noun, the article is not repeated : as, 
 
 Le sensible et vertueux Fe- The sensible and virtuous Fe- 
 nelon. nelon. 
 
 277. When the adjective is placed after a proper name, 
 which it qualifies, it expresses a distinguishing quality : as, 
 Varron le savant; meaning the one distinguished for his 
 learning from all of the same name. 
 
 278. When a superlative relative precedes a substan- 
 tive, the article serves for both substantive and adjective : 
 as, 
 
 Les plus hahiles gens font The ablest men sometimes 
 quelquefois les plus grandes commit the greatest blunders. 
 fautes. 
 
 279. But if the superlative relative follow the substan- 
 tive, the article must be repeated : as, 
 
 Les gens les plus habiles font The ablest man sometimes 
 quelquefois les fautes les plus commit the greatest blunders, 
 grandes. 
 
 280. Adjectives in French, are generally placed after 
 the substantive. 
 
 281. This rule is, however, subject to many excep- 
 tions, which it would not be possible to present in a 
 systematic view to the student: practice and taste will, in 
 this instance, be his best teachers. 
 
173 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 282. The adjective, placed after two or several sub- 
 stantives wliich are not united by the conjunction c/, 
 agrees in gender and number with the last only: as, 
 
 II a nioiitrd une reserve, une He exhibited a reserve, a dis» 
 retenue, d.gnc d'eloges. creiion, worlhy to be praised. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXII. 
 
 He ran through the streets Uke a madaian, barefoot and bareheaded. 
 
 270 
 His legs were bare. Give me half a guinea, and then you will 
 — II 2S6 avoir 271 270 
 
 only owe me a guinea and a half. I shall be at home in half an 
 
 — 271 Chez inoi 270 
 
 hour. The late queen was idolized. The late queen was universally 
 
 272 273 
 
 regretted. The ignorant have, in a large stock of presumption, what 
 
 fort dose 
 they want in real knowledge, and that is the reason they are ad- 
 
 ce qui fait que 
 mired by fools. We ought to frequent good, and shun bad company. 
 274 275 256 , 
 
 The ancient and modern writers are not agreed upon that point. ; 
 
 275 
 
 The wise man preserves the same tranquillity of mind in good or bad ; 
 
 275 237 J 
 
 fortune. The more wc read the fables of the good and artless La 
 
 2G8 on 276 
 
 Fontaine, the more we are convinced thev are a book foi all ages, and 
 268 ' 258 
 
 the manual of the man of taste. 
 
 
 EXERCISE LXXIII. 
 
 It was only under the reign of Louis the Just (the Thirteenth,) that 
 
 277 
 good taste began to show itself in France ; but it was under that of 
 
 258 
 
 Louis the Great that it was carried to perfection. It has been said of . 
 
 On — ' 
 
 the Telemachus of the virtuous Fenelon, that it is the most useful present 
 
 279 don 
 
 the muses have made to mankind ; for, could the happiness of j 
 que 40' si 
 
 man be produced by a poem, it would be by that The smoothest 
 
 naitre • ■ • da tranquill* 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXjlRCISES. / 173 
 
 waters often conceal the most dangerous gulfs. The most beautiful 
 
 279 279 278 
 
 actions are sometimes sullied by the greatest vices. Cicero was the 
 278 est 278 
 
 mo6t eminent orator the Romans have had. All his life was but a 
 
 c6l6bre 407 a 6t6 
 
 labour, but a continual occupation. 
 282 
 
 OF THE DETERMINATIVE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 283. Vingt and cent take s, when multiplied by other 
 numerel adjectives : as, 
 
 Q,\iAUe-vmgfs hommes. Eighty men. 
 Deux cents bccufs. Ttvu hundred oxen. 
 
 284. But they do not take s, when followed by other 
 numeral adjectives ; as, 
 
 Quatre vigni-un hommes. Elghly-one men. 
 
 Deux cent six bcEufs. Two hundred and six oxen. 
 
 285. The adverbs of place, cl and lei., are often joined 
 to the adjectives ce, ce/, celfe,, ces., in order to point out 
 in a more precise manner the person or thing spoken of. 
 The adjective is then placed before the substantive, and 
 the abverb after it : as, 
 
 Ce livre-ci, this hook. Cet homme-la, that man. 
 Cettc fleur-ci, this flower. Ces femmes-la, those women. 
 
 (^86.) The adjective possessive, which, in English, 
 prec"ecles a noun representing any part of the body, is 
 rendered in French by placing the definite article before 
 the noun, and a pronoun of the proper person before the 
 verb : as, 
 
 II me coupa le bras. He cut my arm. 
 
 On lui a coupe la jambe. They have cut off his leg. 
 
 287. Chaque, which is of both genders, has no plural, 
 and must always be followed by a substantive : as, 
 
 Chaque pays a ses coutumes. Each country has its customs. 
 
 288. JS\d and pas un have no plural : they require Tie 
 before the verb : as, 
 
 Nul homme n est parfait. No man is perfect. 
 
 Pas une experience ne reussit. Not one experiment succeeds. 
 
174 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FREXCH 
 
 289. Aucun is not employed in the plural, except be- 
 fore substantives which, in some particular sense, are bet- 
 ter employed in the plural : as, 
 
 II n' a fait aucunes disposi- He has made no dispositions. 
 tions. 
 
 290. Touf^ considered collectively, signifies the whole 
 of a thing, and is then followed by the article : as, 
 
 Tout r univers. The whole universe. 
 
 291. Touf^ v.hen considered distributively, signifies 
 chaque, every, and is not accompanied by the article : cis, 
 
 Tuut bien est desirable. Every good is desirable. 
 
 292. Qmlque^ when it precedes a substantive, is of 
 both genders, and takes s in the plural : as, 
 
 II a fait queljiies fautes. He has committed some faults. 
 
 Quelques efforts que vous fas- Whatever attempts you may 
 
 siez. make. 
 
 293. Quel que., before an adjective, operates as an ad- 
 verb, and is indeclinable, except when the adjective pre- 
 cedes a substantive in the plural : as, 
 
 Quclque belle qu' elle puisse However beautiful she may be, 
 
 etre, elle ne doit pas etre vaine. she ought not to be vain. 
 
 Quelques braves soldats y sent Some brave soldiers went 
 
 alles. thither. 
 
 294. Quel que., before a verb, must be two words ; 
 and quel agrees in gender and number with the substan- 
 tive : as, 
 
 Quelles que soient vos affaires, Whatever your business may 
 venez. be, come. 
 
 295. Quelconque is always placed after the substan- 
 tive; and when used with a negative, is always sin- 
 gular: as, 
 
 ^ II n' y a raison quelconque qui There is no reason whatever 
 puisse r y obliger. which can oblige him to it. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXIV. 
 
 I bought eighty horses, two hundred oxen, ninety sheep, and tv, 
 
 283 283 284 
 
 hundred and four cows. I had a &11 yesterday and hurt my back 
 284 286 
 
OrRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 175 
 
 and head. In this bloody battle he received a wound, by a shot, in 
 
 286 coup de feu 
 
 his right arm, and another in his left leg : by dint of care his anu 
 
 286 286 
 
 was saved ; but it was necessary to amputate his leg. This stuff 
 
 286 285 
 
 will become you wonderfully. That action is worthy of blame. 
 
 si6ia a. merveille. 285 
 
 This scene is calculated to interest all men, but that cannot succeed. 
 
 faite 258 ne saurait 
 
 Every nation has, in its turn, shone on the theatre of the world. 
 287 a 
 
 EXERCISE LXXV. 
 
 No expression, no truth of design or colouring, no touches of genius 
 
 288 dessin trait 
 
 in that great work. Did any man ever attain to such a pitch of 
 
 289 parvenir ••ce" comble 
 
 glory ! I doubt whether there be in any science a more ^evident 
 que 289 lumincux 
 
 'principle. The whole course of his life has been distinguished by 
 
 290 marquer 
 
 ^generous 'actions. Every vice is odious. Whatever faults you 
 
 291 292 
 
 may have committed, they will forgive you. AH men, however 
 
 fait, 258 293 
 
 opposite they may be, agree on that point. Whatever your 
 
 294 
 fault may be, I will forgive you. There is no reason whatever 
 
 295 
 that can bring him to it. 
 puisse determiner 118 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 OF THE PRONOUN 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 OP THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 298 Je^ iu, il, elle^ Us, elles, are always the subject; that 
 is, they always represent the person or thing which per- 
 forms the action expressed by the verb : as, 
 
 Je dis la verite. I speak the truth. 
 
 Tu apprendras des nouvelles. Thou wilt hear newt* 
 
f7G COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 7/ nous raconta son histoire. He laid us his history. 
 
 Elks sont survenues a 1' im- They have come unexpectedly. 
 proviste. 
 
 297. J/e, /e, sr., leur, 7c, 7a, les^ ?/, ct?, are always the 
 object; that is, they always represent the person or thing 
 which suffers the action expressed by the verb : as, 
 
 Je me rase. / shave myself. 
 
 Tu leu7- paries. Thou speakest to them. 
 
 II te voit. He sees thee. 
 
 lis la voient. They see her. 
 
 298. In affirmative sentences, the subject always 
 comes first : as, 
 
 Je me rase. I shave myself. 
 
 299. In negative sentences, the particle ne is put be . 
 tween the subject and object: as, 
 
 Je ne me rase pas. I shave not myself. 
 
 300. In interrogative sentences, the subject is put after 
 the verb : as. 
 
 Me xase-je ? Shave I myself? 
 
 301. In negative-and-interrogative sentences, the sub- ; 
 ject is also put after the verb : as, 
 
 Ne me rase-je pas 1 Shave I not myself? 
 
 302. The regimen of me, fe, se, is sometimes direct^ 
 and sometimes indirect : 
 
 303. It is direct^ when they represent respectively 
 moi^ toi, sot : as, 
 
 Vous 7ne connaissez. You know me. 
 
 Je /e vois. I see thee. 
 
 II se perd. He ruins himself. 
 
 304. And indirect., when they supply respectively the 
 place of a mot., a toi^ a. sol : as, 
 
 Vous me parlez. You speak to me. 
 
 Je t ' ecri;!. I vjrite to thee. 
 
 II se represente. He represents to himself. 
 
 305. Xe, 7flt, les^ are always direct : as, ^ 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 177 
 
 Je le vols, for Je vols lui. 
 
 Je la vois, . . Je vols elle. 
 
 Je les vois, . . Je vois eux, or elle.s. 
 
 06^ Xewr, ?/, en, are always indirect : as, 
 
 Je leur parle, for Je parle a eux, or d elks. 
 
 Je n" y entends rien, . . Je n' entends rien a cela. 
 J' en suis f ache, . . Je suis fache de cela. 
 
 307. The pronouns which are sometimes the subject, 
 md sometimes the regimen or object, are nous, voiis, moi-, 
 '■ol^ lui, elle, eux, elles : as, 
 
 Nous leur parlons. We speak to them. 
 
 lis nous parlent. They speak to us. 
 
 308. Moi, toi, after the imperative, are changed into 
 me, ie, when followed by en : as, 
 
 Donno.z-m^ on. Give me some. 
 
 Retourne-i!' en. Go back. 
 
 309. When several pronouns accompany a verb, me, 
 te, se, nous, vous must be placed first in order; le, la, les, 
 oefore lui, leur; and y before en, which is always the 
 last : as, 
 
 Pretez-moi ce livre; je vous Lend me that book,- I wilt 
 
 le rendrai demain ; si vous me return it to you to-morrow ,- if 
 
 le refusez, je saurai m' en pas- you refuse me, I can make shift 
 
 ser, without it. 
 
 Aurez-vous la force de le leur Will you have the resolution 
 
 dire ] to mention it to them ? 
 
 11 n' a pas voulu vous y me- He was not willing to take 
 
 ner. you there. 
 
 Je vous y en porterai. / ivill bring you soine there. 
 
 310. In imperative sentences, when me is changed into 
 moi, it is preceded by le, la, les : as, 
 
 Donnez-le-moi. Give it to me. 
 
 Apportez-les-moi. Bring them to me. 
 
 311. In imperative sentences, moi, for the sake of eu- 
 phony, is placed after y ; as, 
 
 Menez-y-moi. Carry me thither. 
 
 312. The pronoun le may supply the place ol'a mem- 
 ber of a sentence : as, 
 
 12 
 
178 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 On doit s' accommoder a 1' hu- We ought to accommodate our- 
 
 meur des autres, autant qu' on le selves to the temper of others, as 
 pc'Ut. much as we can. 
 
 313. Le, also, supplies the place of an adjective, or 
 of a substantive used adjectively : as, 
 
 Madame, ^tes-voua malade ? — Madame, are you sick ? — Yes, 
 
 Out. je le suis. I am, 
 
 Mesdasnes, etes-vous marie'e* .? Ladies, are you married? — 
 
 Oui, nous le sommes. Yes, we are. 
 
 314. But Za, Ze5, supply the place of substantives, or 
 of adjectives used substantively: as, 
 
 Mesdaraes, etes-vous le? ma- Ladies, are you the brides ?-— 
 
 riees ? — Oui, nous hs sommes. Ye", we are. 
 
 Madame, etes-vous la malade? Madam, are you the sick per- 
 
 •—Oui, je la suis. son ? — Fes, I am. 
 
 315. Pronouns expressing the first and second persons, 
 must be repeated before all the verbs : as, 
 
 Je soutiens, et je soutiendrai / maintain, and [ /] will nl- 
 
 toujonrs. ways maintain. 
 
 Vous dites, et vous avez lou- You say, and {youl have al- 
 
 jours dit. ways said. 
 
 316. Pronouns of the third person, when they form 
 the subject, are seldom repeated before verbs of the same 
 tenses : as. 
 
 La bonne grace nc gate rien ; A graceful manner spoils no- 
 elle ajoute a la beaute, et releve thing,- it adds to beauty, and 
 la modestie. heightens modesty. 
 
 317. But these pronouns are generally repeated before 
 verbs of different tenses ; and when passing from an affir- 
 mation to a negation, and the contrary : as, 
 
 II est arrive ce matin, et il re* He arrived this morning, and 
 partira ce soir. {he] will set off again this even- 
 
 ing. 
 II veut, et il ne veut pas. He will, and [he] will not. 
 
 318. Pronouns forming the regimen, are repeated be- 
 fore every verb : as, 
 
 L' idee de ses malheurs le The idea of his misfortunes 
 poursuit, le tourmente et P acca- pursues [him], torments [liim'] 
 ble. and overwhelms him. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 179 
 
 II nous ennuie et nous obsede He wearies [us] and besets its 
 sans cesse. unceasingly. 
 
 319. Except before such compound verbs as express 
 the repetition of the same action, and are in the same tense ; 
 as, jd vous le dis^ et redis ; il lefail, el refait, sans cesse. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXVI. 
 
 The better to bear the irksomeness of captivity and solitude, I 
 Pour 256 
 
 sought for books ; for I was overwhelmed with melancholy, for want 
 
 de ••fautc" 
 
 of some knowledge to cherish and support my mind. I, 
 
 qui pAt nourrir 307 
 
 who am older than he, I ! go and speak to him ! No ; I 
 
 307 — 115 296 
 
 will not go ; let him come himself. How darest thou answer thy 
 
 296 
 master in ^so -^insolent ^a 2manner ! Thou whom he loves, thou 
 
 de 307 296 
 
 for whom he takes so much pains. He has been speaking to 
 
 131 
 them with an energy that has astonished them. He said to mc, 
 297 302 
 
 Wilt thou torment thyself incessantly for advantages, the en- 
 
 se tourmenter 303 52 biens, 
 
 joyment of which could not render thee more happy ? Cast thy 
 
 297 286 
 
 eyes round thee : see how every thing smiles at . thee, and seems 
 
 304 — 297 
 
 to invite thee to prefer a retired and tranquil life, to the tumultuous 
 
 pleasures of a vain world. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXVn. 
 
 I believe your brothers are not well ; for I have not seen 
 
 que 299 
 
 them this week. Does he recognise himself in this portrait 1 
 305 300 k 
 
 Do vou hide yourselves in order to surprise them 1 Do you not 
 
 301 
 see them every day 1 Enjoy the pleasures of the world ; I 
 
 de 
 consent to it: but never give yourself up to them. I shall never 
 
 .S06 306 
 
 consent to that foolish srhcme; do not mention it any more 
 
 parler 306 
 
180 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 If you have good pears, send me some. You wish to make 
 
 263 308 
 
 a present to your sister. There is a beautiful fan ; you should 
 
 • •Voila-' devoir 
 
 present it to her. I shall speak to them about it, and 
 
 offrir 309 --lui-- 309 -..en--- 315 
 
 give you a faithful account of it. I know .you have con- 
 
 rendro exact que 
 
 cealed my book: return it to me. Do you go to your country 
 
 — 310 
 seat 1 Yes, I do. Conduct me thither. Take us thither. 
 
 311 309 
 
 EXERCISE LXXVni. 
 
 The laws of nature and decency equally oblige us to defend 
 
 256 236 bienseance 
 
 the honour and interest of our parents, when we can do it without 
 
 256 312 
 
 injustice. We were embarrassed, and are so yet. Are you Mrs. 
 
 313 
 
 2such a 'one 1 Yes, I am. Are those your servants 1 
 
 — 314 Sont-ce la 
 
 Yes, they are. Overwhelmed with sorrow, I exclaimed and 
 314 
 
 said. He took the strongest cities, conquered the most con 
 315 
 siderablc provinces, and overturned the most powerful kingdoms. 
 
 It is inconceivable how whimsical she is: from one moment to 
 
 another she will and she will not. It is taste that selects the 
 
 expressions, that combines, arranges, and varies them, 
 
 318 
 so as to produce the greatest efiect. 
 
 de manifere a. ce qu' elles 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONGU.XS. 
 
 320. These pronouns must always relate to a substan- 
 tive previously expressed : as, 
 
 Votre livre est micux relie que Your hook is better hound thwfi 
 ie mien. mine. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 181 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 321. Qm/, when it is the subject, relates both to per* 
 sons and things : as, 
 
 La femme qui chante. The woman who sings. 
 
 I<es livres qui instruisent. The books which instruct. 
 
 322. But when qui is the regimen, it can only be 
 used of persons, or of things personified : as. 
 
 La femme de qui vous parlez. The luoman of whom you are 
 
 speaking. 
 Rocher ! a qui je me plains. Rock I to whom I complain. 
 
 323. Que relates both to persons and things. It is 
 always the regimen, and cannot occur without an antece- 
 dent expressed : as, 
 
 C est vous qu* on appelle. // is you whom they call. 
 
 C est le livrc que je cherche. It is the hook which lam seek- 
 
 ing for. 
 
 324. Lequel relates both to persons and things. It is 
 generally used after a preposition : as, 
 
 La protection sur laquelle il The protection on which he 
 cornptait. relied. 
 
 L' fctuJe a /a^'ueZ/e il s' applique. The study to which he ap- 
 plies himself. 
 
 325. Dont^ also, relates both to persons and things ; 
 but it must be preferred to duquel^ when a noun comes 
 after it : as, 
 
 Le prince dont la protection. The prince whose protection. 
 
 v326) Quoi relates only to things. It is always pre- 
 ceoed by a preposition, and is generally used when the 
 subject is vague and indefinite : as, 
 
 II n' y a rien a quoi je sois There is nothing to vjhich 
 plus dispose. ^ n 1^-^ Llammore^nclji^d. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXIX. 
 
 A. young man who loves vanity of dress, is unworthy of wisdom 
 321 & Be parer vaiuemontt 256 
 
182 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 and gloiy ; glory is due only to a heart tliat knows how to suffer pain, 
 23P 321 — 
 
 and to trampie upon pleasure. That after which a true philosopher 
 
 Ce 326 
 
 sighs most ardently, is to spread that sentiment of ^universal ibenevo- 
 
 2ei 
 lence, which should unite and bring together all men. These aro 
 
 321 •• rapprocher- • 256 
 
 conditions without which the thing would not have been concluded. 
 
 262 324 
 
 A man whose manners are innocent, and behaviour blameless, is 
 
 325 258 * irreprochable, 
 
 the man whom we ought to cherish and honour. The ambitious man 
 323 — 
 
 sees nothing but pleasure in the possession of the ofnces to which he 
 
 — 324 
 
 aspires with so much eagerness, instead of seeing the trouble that is 
 
 321 
 
 inseparable from them. To whom were you speaking when I met 
 
 118 322 
 
 vou ? It was to my brother-in-law. 
 
 SECTIOxN IV. 
 
 OF THE ABSOLUTE PRONOUNS. 
 
 327. Qui relates to persons only, and is of both 
 genders and numbers : as, 
 
 Qui vous a dit cela ] W?io told you that ? 
 
 Qui sont ces ferames la 1 Who are those women ? 
 
 328. Que and qpoi relate to things only : as, 
 Que pouvait la valenr 1 What could vaJoitr do P 
 
 A quoi pensez-vous 1 What are you thinking of? 
 
 329. Que is sometimes used for a quoi^ de quoi: as, 
 
 Que sert la science sans la What avails learning, wilhoui 
 
 vcrtu ■? virtue ? 
 
 Que sert a 1' avare d' avoir Whet avaih it the miser to 
 
 des richesses 1 possess trea>iures ? 
 
 330. Que and quoi require the preposition de before 
 the adjective or substantive that follows them : as. 
 
 Que dit-on de nouveau 1 What news is there ? 
 
 Quoi de plus instructif ] What more instructive ? 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. I9S 
 
 331. Quel relates both to persons and things : as, 
 Quel homrne est-ce 1 What man is it P 
 
 Quel temps fait-ii ] W/mt weather is it ? 
 
 EXERCISE LXXX. 
 
 Some one entered secretly ; guess who it was. Who woulJ not 
 
 327 — — 
 love virtue, for its own sake, couM he see it in all its beauty ] 
 
 256 • •elle-ineine-- si on pouvait 
 
 What have you read in that book tliat can have excited in vour soul 
 
 32S ' 321 pnrl6 
 
 emotion and enthusiasm % I know not what to think of it. In what 
 
 256 329 118 328 
 
 did you find them occupied 1 There is in that discourse I know not 
 
 what which appears to me dcsijjiiing. What have you remarked 
 328 seinbler — iiisidieux. 
 
 good, beautiful, and sublime in Homer ] What more brilliant, and 
 330 226 330 
 
 at the same time more false, than the expressions of a man who has a 
 en — 236 
 
 great deal of wit, but wants judgment? He does not 
 
 qui manque de 
 know what model to fellow. I have told you what man it i«. Which 
 
 331 331 ce 134 
 
 of those ladies do you think the most amiable ] What tht-n must 
 trouver 331 done doit 
 
 have been that ^extraordinary 'man, to whom seven cities hnve 
 
 322 
 
 contested the glory of having given birth ] One of your brother*. 
 66 disputer 256 jour? 
 
 has arrived from the continent : which is it ? 
 134 
 
 SECTION V. 
 
 OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 332. C^, when it relates to the first or second person, 
 always governs the verb in the singular : as, 
 
 C est moi ; c' est nous ; c' est vous. 
 
 333. Ce governs the verb in the plural, only when it 
 relates to the third person plural : as, 
 
 Ce sont eux ; cefureni vos ancetrea. 
 
TQ-l COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 334. Ce supplies tlie place of i/, Us, e/Ze, elles, when 
 the verb etre is followed by a substantive : as, 
 
 Lisez Homere et Virgile : ce Read Homer and Virgil, they 
 sont deux grands poetes. are two great pods. 
 
 Avez-vous lu Platon] c' est Have you read Plato P he is a 
 xxii he&\i genie. great genius. 
 
 335. But v/hen etre is followed by an adjective^ or by 
 a substantive taken adjectively, il, Us, elk, elles must 
 be used : as, 
 
 Lisez Demosthene et Ciceron : Read Demosthenes and CicC' 
 
 Us sont trea-elu-juents. ro: they are very eloquent. 
 
 Oompteriez-vous sur Valerel Would you rely upon VaUre? 
 
 Ignorez-vous qu' il est hommt Do you not know thai he is a 
 
 a ne jamais revenir de ses pre- man who will never abandon his 
 
 mieres idees 1 Jirst opinions ? 
 
 336. Ce, followed by a relative pronoun, represents 
 things only, and is always masculine singular : as, 
 
 Ce qui flutie est plus dange- What flatters is m,ore danger^ 
 reux que ce qui o^ense.. ous than what offends. 
 
 337. Ce, placed at the beginning of a sentence, must 
 be repeated in the second part of that sentence, when it 
 begins with the verb etre : as, 
 
 Ce que j' aune le plus, c' est What I like most, is to hf 
 d' etre seal. alone. 
 
 338. Ccht.7. cclle, apply both to persons and things : as, 
 J' ai vu le portrait du pere et I have seen the picture of the 
 
 celui du fils. father, and that of the son. 
 
 Celle que vous hai'ssez est ma She whom you hate is my best 
 meilleure aniie. friend. 
 
 339. Celui is sometimes omitted, to give strength and 
 elegance to the expression : as. 
 
 Qui veut trop se faire craindre, [-^'^j W'/to wishes to make 
 se fait raremeiit aimer. himself too much feared, seldom 
 
 inakes himself beloved. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXXI. 
 
 It is we who have drawn that misfortune upon ourselves, through 
 
 332 s' attirer — 
 
 our thoughtlessness and imprudence. It was the Egyptians that 
 i^gdretd S33 321 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 185 
 
 first observed the course of the stars, regulated the year, and 
 les ptomiers astre, 
 
 invented arithmetic. Peruse attentively Plato and Cicero : f hey aro 
 
 256 Lire 334 
 
 the two philosophers of antiquity who have given us the most sound 
 
 256 279 sain 
 
 and luminous ideas upon morality. If you are intended for the 
 
 256 • -se dostiner- ii 
 
 pulpit, read over and over again Bourdaloue and Massiilon : they 
 ••lire et relire sans cesse •• 335 
 
 are bot'n very eloquent ; but the aim of the former is to convince, and 
 
 but 
 that of the latter to persuade. What is astonishing is not always 
 
 336 
 what is pleasing. What the miser thinks least of, is to enjoy 
 
 Ce a. quoi — 337 
 
 his riches. What pleases us in the writings of the ancients, is to 
 
 337 
 see that they have taken nature as a model, and that they have 
 
 256 
 painted her with a noble simplicity. Whichever of you 
 
 338 que 
 
 shall be found to excel the others, both in mind and body, shall 
 
 on juger vaiiiqueur et pour 237 
 
 be acknowledged king of the island. There are admirable pictures ; 
 
 these are after the manner of Rubens, and those after the manner 
 
 139 dans genre 
 
 of Van Huysum. He that judges of others by himself, is liable to 
 
 138 
 many mistakes. 
 
 SECTION VI. 
 
 OF THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 340. On is always subject, and always joined, to the 
 third person singular of tlie verb : as, on dlt^ they say. 
 
 341. Though on may generally be considered as a 
 masculine pronoun, there are, however, occasions in 
 which it is evidently feminine : as, on n' est pas toujours 
 jeune et jol'ie. 
 
 342. On is sometimes followed by an adjective, or a 
 substantive plural : as, on se hattit en desesperes ; est-on 
 de^ traUres ? 
 
186 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 343. Quiconque is generally masculine, and relates to 
 persons only : as, 
 
 Quiconque parle. Whoever speaks. 
 
 344. Quelqv? un applies both to persons and things : as, 
 J' attends quelqu^ un. I waii for Homtbody. 
 Qaelquea-uns assurent. Some people affirm. 
 
 345. C/iacun^ though always singular, when placed 
 after the regimen, takes son, sa, ses : as, 
 
 lis ont opine dans cette af- TAei/ have given iheir opinion 
 faire, chacun selon ses lu- in tkat affair, each one accord' 
 mieres. ing to his knowledge. 
 
 346. But Zewr, leurs, must be used, when chacun i.s 
 placed before the regimen : as, 
 
 lis ont, chacun selon leurs They have, each one according 
 lumieres, opine dans cette af- to his knowledge, given thdr 
 faire. opinion in tJtat affair. 
 
 347. Autru'i relates to persons only, and is always 
 preceded by a preposition : as. 
 
 La charite se rejouit du bon- Charity rejoices in the happi- 
 beur d' autrui. ness of others. 
 
 '348.J Personne is always masculine singular, and when 
 it Cleans nobody, takes 7ie before the verb : as, 
 
 Personne n' est aussi heureux Nobody is so happy as she. 
 qu' elle. 
 
 349. In interrogative phrases without negation, or in 
 phrases expressing doubt, personne signifies quelqu' un^ 
 anybody : as, 
 
 Personne oserait-il nier 1 Je Would any body dare deny ? 
 
 doute que personne soit assez I doubt whether any body b 
 hardi. bold enough. 
 
 350. Autre relates both to persons and things : as, 
 
 Un autre le fera. Another will do it. 
 
 Cette plume ne vaut rien ; This pen is good for nothing , 
 donnez-m' en une autre. give me anoiJier one. 
 
 351. Tel relates both to persons and things : as, 
 M. un tel. Mr. such a one. 
 
 Je ne vis jamais rien de tel. I never saw the like. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 18? 
 
 352. D un r nil' re applies both to persons and things . 
 it takes both gender and number : as, 
 lis se hai'ssent l' un V autre. They hate each other. 
 
 [ 353. If there be any preposition, it must be placed be- 
 j tween the two words which compose this pronoun : as, 
 Elles parlent mal 1' une de They speak ill the one of the 
 V autre. other. 
 
 354. U un et P autre requires the verb in the plu- 
 ral : as, 
 
 L' un et r autre ont raison. Both arc in the rigid. 
 
 355. Tow/, when a pronoun, signifies all things, every 
 thing : as, 
 
 II fait tout avec esprit. He does every thing ingeniously. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXXII. 
 
 Do you know what they do here ] They eat, they drink, they 
 
 340 
 dance, they play, they walk; in a word, they kill time in the gayest 
 
 256 
 manner possible. Do you sincerely think, said Emily to Lucilla, 
 
 de bonne foi 
 that when women are sensible and pretty, they are ignorant of it 1 
 
 341 341 — 
 
 No, they know it very well; but if they are watchful over their 
 
 jaloux de 
 character, they are not proud of these advantages. We are not 
 reputation, 342 
 
 slaves, to receive such treatment. Whoever of you is bold enough 
 
 essiiyer 343 
 
 to slander me, I will make him repent it. Will not aome one of 
 
 » 344 
 
 these ladies be of the party ] Some people like to read 
 
 344 
 every thing new. They have all brcught offerings to the temple, 
 toutes les nouveaut^s. 
 every one according to his means and devotion. After a day so 
 
 345 24 
 
 usefully spent, they went back, each one to his own home. 
 
 Chez 316 — — 
 
 Can any one be still so ignorant as not to know that it is from 
 Poiirrait-il •••'319-- dds 
 
 the earliest infancy we ought to form the mind, the heart and the taste? 
 tendre 340 
 
188 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 EXERCISE LXXXIII. 
 
 Do not to others what you wouUl not wish to be done to you. An 
 
 347 
 egotist loves nobody, not even nis ov?n children. Reason and 
 
 318 pas 256 
 
 faith equally demonstrate that we were created for another life. I 
 
 350 
 never heard any thing similar. The same man sows who often 
 
 351 — 351 — 
 
 reaps nothing. The happiness of the people constitutes that of th< 
 
 faire 
 prince; their true interests are connected with each other. The} 
 
 tier a ....353 .-. 
 
 praise one another too much. They both relate the same story, 
 
 352 354 rapporter fait, 
 
 although neither believes it. I should love them both, if they 
 
 bien 
 were more attentive to their studies. Every thing which is lofty, 
 
 355 6\ev6, 
 
 vast and profound, expands the imagination and dilates the heart, 
 ^tendre 
 
 Do you believe all that she says 1 No ; I do not believe the half 
 
 355 ee que 
 nor the quarter of it. 
 119. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH THE SUBJECT. 
 
 356. The verb agrees iu number and person with its 
 subject or nominative : as, 
 
 L' oiseau vole. The hird files. 
 
 Vous ne volez pas. You do not fly. 
 
 357. When a verb has two subjects, both singular, it 
 is put in the plural : as, 
 
 Mon pere et ma mere m' ai- My father and mother love 
 ment. me. 
 
 358. When a verb has two or more subjects, of dif- 
 ferent persons, it is put in the plural, and agrees with tho 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 189 
 
 first person, in preference to the other two, in which case 
 the pronoun nous must be placed before the verb : as, 
 Vous et moi nous irons. You and I will go. 
 
 359. But, if the second person should be used with 
 the third, the verb must be put in the second person plu- 
 ral, and be preceded by vous: as, 
 
 Vous et lui vous irez. You and he shall go. 
 
 360. When the verb is preceded by the relative pro- 
 noun qui., it must agree with the noun or pronoun to 
 which qui relates : as, 
 
 Est-ce moi qui 1' ai dit 1 Is it I who have said so ? 
 Est-ce vous qui 1' avez vu 1 Is it yoif^ luho have seen him ? 
 
 361. When two or more nouns, united by om, form 
 the subject, the verb agrees with the last only : as, 
 
 Pierre ou Paul le fera. Peter or Paul will do it. 
 
 362. But, if the words united by ou are of different 
 persons, tlie verb must be put in the plural : as, 
 
 I Vous ou moi parlerons. You or I shall speak. 
 
 Vous ou votre frere viendrez. You or your brother will come. 
 
 363. When two subjects are joined together by the 
 conjunction comme., de meme que., ainsi que., &c., the verb 
 agrees with the first subject only: as, 
 
 Celte bataille, comme tantd' au- That haftle, like so many 
 
 tres, ne decida de rien. others, decided nothing. 
 
 364. When V un et V autre is the subject, the veib is 
 put in the plural : as, 
 
 L' un et r autre sont bons. Both arc good. 
 
 365. When ni V un ni V autre or two nouns joined 
 together by ni repeated, are used as nominatives, the verb 
 must be put in the plural, if both concur to the action, or 
 receive it ; and the verb takes ne before it : as, 
 
 Ni r un ni i' autre n' ont fait Neither the one nor the othfT 
 
 leur devoir. have done their duty. 
 
 Ni la douceur ni la force ne Neither mildness nor force can 
 
 peuvent rien. effect any thing. 
 
190 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 366. But the verb is put in the singular, if only one 
 performs the action, or receives it : as, 
 
 Ni Smith ni Stone ne sera nom- Neither Smith nor Stone will 
 me president. be chosen president. 
 
 367. A substantive collective general, that is, a noun 
 representing the whole of the persons or things mentioned, 
 always governs the verb in the singular number : as, 
 
 L' armee des confederes est The army of the confederates 
 tres-nombreuse. is very numerous. 
 
 368. But when the subject is a collective partitive, 
 that is, a noun or an adverb representing a part of the 
 whole, the verb agrees with the noun following it : as, 
 
 Une troupe de barbares deso- A troop of barbarians laid 
 
 lerent le pays. waste the country. 
 
 Peu de gens negligent leurs Few people neglect their own 
 
 int^rets. interests. 
 
 REGIME!^ OF VERBS. 
 
 369. The object, or regimen, of the verb is either 
 direct or indirect. 
 
 370. The direct regimen is that on which the action 
 immediately falls, without the help of any preposition : as, 
 
 Je donne une plume. I give a pen. 
 
 371. The indirect regimen i-s that on which the action 
 of the verb cannot fall without the aid of a preposition : as, 
 
 Je parle a ma soeur. I speak to my sister. 
 
 372. Some verbs admit of both regimens : as, 
 
 Je donne une plume k ma socur. I give a pen to my sister. 
 
 373. A verb after which qitelqv? un or quel que chose 
 will form sense, is called active or transitive, and h-'s a 
 direct regimen : as, 
 
 Je donne quelque chose. I give something. 
 
 374. A verb after which quelqu"^ un or quelque chose 
 will not form sense, is called neuter or intransitive, and has 
 an indirect regimen. For instance, we cannot say, parler 
 quelqu^ un^ parler quelque chose, meaning, to speak to some 
 
GRAMMAR AND 0:ERC|§ES 
 
 one, to speak of some thing; but must call in the aid of a 
 preposition, thus, j^arler a quelqu? iin^ parhr de quelque 
 
 chose. 
 
 37-5. Passive verbs require for their regimen the pre- 
 position de or par. ( 
 
 ^g76^ De is used Avh^i the passive verb expresses a 
 fceTnTg, or an affection of the soul : as, 
 
 Get enfant est aime de tout le This child is loved hy every 
 
 monde. body. 
 
 ^77/ But par must be used when the action expressed 
 hytTie verb relates to the body only : as, 
 
 L' operation fut farite par un The operatioJi ivas performed 
 chiiurgien celebre. by an eminent surgeon. 
 
 378. Reflective verbs have for their regimen the pro- 
 nouns me, /e, se, nous, vous : as, 
 
 J 6 me flatte. I flatter myself. 
 
 II se blesse. He hurts himself. 
 
 379. Impersonal verbs generally have an indirect regi- 
 men : as, 
 
 II suffit de dire. // suflices to say. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXXIV. 
 
 The most free of all men, is he who can be free even in slavery. All 
 
 356 mdme 
 
 men are inclined to idleness, but the savages of hot countries are the 
 
 •356tendre- 356 
 
 laziest of all men. His uprightness and honesty make him courted 
 
 357 rechercher 
 
 by every body. Strength of body and of mind meet 
 
 376 256 celle 357 se rencontrnr 
 
 not always together. You, your friend, and I, have each a different 
 
 358 
 opinlm. In our childhood, you and I were pleased with playing 
 
 •358 se plaire- & 
 together. You and your friend will come with me. He that 
 
 ....359- ••. 
 complains most of mankind is not always he that has most reason 
 360 256 homnies fetre plus fondd 
 
 to complain of them. Either persuasion or terror has drawn hira 
 ~ 361 entrainer 
 
 I 
 
192 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 into the party of the rebels. It is he or I who have said it. Envy, 
 
 re belle. 362 25G 
 
 like ambition, is a blind passion. The king, as well as his ministry, 
 
 363 
 
 wishes for the public good. I called on your cousins, and J 
 
 363 — bien. passer chez 
 
 heard that both had been married a week. Both relate 
 
 apprendre 364 • ^taient • depuis 364 rapportei 
 
 the same story, though neither believes it to be true. Neither 
 
 fait, 365 ne penser que subj.pr. 366 
 
 of them is the author of that book. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXXV. 
 
 The crowd followed him as far as to his house. A gang of thieve* 
 
 foule 367 -jusque- bande 
 
 attacked me, and robbed me of every thing I had. Manj 
 
 368 — •••tout ce--- que 
 
 persons experience that human life is, every where, a state in J^hict 
 
 368 
 much is to be endured, and little to be enjoyed. He caresses them 
 ona beaucoup de peines, de jouissances. 370 
 
 because he loves them. You knew the importance which youi 
 
 370 savoir 
 
 parents attached to the success of that affair : why have you not 
 371 r6usslte 
 
 hastened to announce it to them 1 He has made a present to 
 B' empresser de 371 372 372 
 
 his sister. The French were dreaded by their neighbours, under , 
 redouter 376 j 
 
 Napoleon. His plan is approved by every bodv. Was not I 
 
 376 ' 
 
 England subdued by William the Conqueror, in the year 1066 ' 
 
 conqu-^rir 377 
 The city of Troy was taken, plundered, and destroyed by the con 
 
 Troie saccager, 377 
 
 federate Greeks, 1148 j^ears before the Christian era. We flatter 
 
 ourselves that you will meet with a very kind reception. He was 
 
 378 serez accueilli de la mani6re la plus honnfete. 
 
 warming himself when I came in. It is of momen to your 
 
 378 •entrer.- • • importer^ • • 370 
 
 partners that you set off immediately. 
 associ6 partix sur 1' beure. 
 
GRA_vlMAR AND EXERCISES. 19:< 
 
 1 USE OF MOODS AND TENSES. 
 
 OF THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 380. The present expresses an existing state, or an 
 action occurring at the time when we speak : as, 
 
 Mon frere dort. My brother sleeps. 
 
 Jefrappe. I strike. 
 
 381. The present is sometimes used to express aa 
 action past, in order to give a sort of animated picture of 
 It. Thus, we find in Racine : 
 
 J' ai vu votre malheureux fils I have seen your unhappy son 
 traine par ses chevaux. II veut dragged along by his hor&es. He 
 les rappeler, et sa voix les effraie. calls out to stop them, but his 
 
 voice frightens them. 
 
 382,i In English, for greater accuracy of description, 
 the verb to he is frequently used with the participle pre- 
 sent ; as, / am readings I was writings &.c. ; in place of, 
 / read., I wrote^ &c. Such expressions must be rendered 
 as follows : as, Je li.s^ 1 am reading ; ;' ecrivais^ I was 
 writing, &c. See notes to the verb parler., ante, pages 93^ 
 94, 95, for the various meanings of the French tenses. 
 
 (^3,, The imperfect expresses a present with respect 
 to something past : as, 
 
 Je pensais a vous quand vous I was thinking of you when 
 entrates. you came in. 
 
 384. It expresses also the recurrence of an action at a 
 time which is past : as, 
 
 Quand j' etais a la campagne, When I was in the country, I 
 j' allais souvent a la ctiasse. often went to the chase. 
 
 And the continuance of an action or state : as, 
 II ne meprisait ni ne rebutait He neither despised nor dis- 
 personne, et ne croyait etre roi couraged any one, and thought 
 que pour faire du bien. he was a king only to do good. 
 
 .,^385.^ The preterit definite is used to express an isolated 
 actioii, performed at a time which is completely past : as, 
 Je le vis hier. I saw him yesterday. 
 
 Je regus une lettre la semaine I received a letter last week, 
 derniere. 
 
 I 13 
 
194 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCTI ,j 
 
 386. The preterit indefinite is used either for a lime ! 
 past which is indeterminate, or for a past of which some- I 
 thing still remains : as, ! 
 
 J' ai voyage en Italie. I have travelled in Italy, 
 
 y ai dcjtune ce matin a Phila- I have break fojited this mom- 
 (lelphie. ing at Philadelphia. 
 
 387. The pluperfect denotes one action which took 
 place before another already past ; and also implies a re- 
 currence of the same action : as, 
 
 J' avais Jini quand vous en- / had finished when you came 
 
 trates. in. 
 
 L' hiver dernier, quand nous Last winter, when we had 
 
 avians pris le the, nous allioas taken tea, we usually went to 
 
 ordinairement au spectacle. the play. 
 
 388. The preterit anterior expresses one isolated action, 
 performed immediately before another which is also iso- 
 lated, and both occurring at a time entirely past : as, 
 
 Hier, quand nous eumes pris le Yesterday, when we had taken 
 the, nous allames au spectacle. tea, we went to the play. 
 
 389. The preterit anterior indefinite expresses an action 
 performed at a time which is not yet past, and before 
 another action : as. 
 
 J' ai sorti ce matin d6s que I went out this morning as 
 f ai eu dejeune. soon as I had breakfasted. 
 
 390. The future absolute expresses an action which 
 is to take place at a time determined or not : as, 
 
 J' irai a la campagne. I will go to the country. 
 
 J' irai demain a la campagne. / will go to the country to- 
 
 morrow. 
 
 391. The future anterior is used to express one 
 action which ^v ill take place before another yet to come : 
 as, ' 
 
 y aurai fini quand vous arri- I shall have finished when you 
 verez. come. 
 
 392. The future is not used after si, when the firsi 
 Terb implies no doubt : as, 
 
 Je viendral, si vous venez. I wiUconie, if you come. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 195 
 
 393. But the future is used after si, when the first verb 
 implies doubt or uncertainty : as, 
 
 Je ne sals s' il viendra. I do not know whether he will 
 
 come. 
 
 OF THE CONDITIONAL. 
 
 394. The conditional is the mood which affirms on 
 conditions ; it has two tenses, the present and the fast. 
 
 395. The present expresses that a thing would take 
 place on certain conditions : as, 
 
 Je le/erGt.s si j' avais le temps. / would do it if I had iht 
 time. 
 
 396. The past is used to indicate that an action would 
 have taken place on certain conditions, at a time which is 
 past: as, 
 
 Je r aurais fait si j' avais eu I would have done it if I had 
 le temps. had the time. 
 
 397. The second (not the first) conditional past is 
 used after sz, when the first verb implies no doubt : as, 
 
 Je r eusse fait si j' eusse eu I would have done it if 1 had 
 le temps. had the time. 
 
 398. But when the first verb implies doubt, any tense 
 of the conditional may be used after si: as, 
 
 Je ne sais s' il serait venu. I do not know if he would 
 
 have come. 
 
 OF THE IMPERATIVE. 
 
 399. The imperative is the mood which expresses 
 command, entreaty or reproof: as, 
 
 Soyez vertueux, et vous jouirez Be virtuous, and you will en- 
 da vrai bonhe'ur. joy real happiness. 
 
 OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 400. The subjunctive mood is so called because it is 
 dependent on a verb which precedes it; without which 
 dependence it would not form sense. It implies doubt 
 
196 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 401. The present is used with the present or futur 
 of the indicative : as, 
 
 Je desire qu' il parte. T wish he vwuld set off. 
 
 II faudra qu' il parte. It will he necesaary that ht 
 
 should set off. 
 
 402. The imperfect is used with all the past tenses of 
 the indicative, and also with the tenses of the conditional : 
 as, 
 
 Je desirais qu il parfit. I wished he would set off. 
 
 J' aurais desire qu' il part it. I would have wished he would 
 setoff. 
 
 403. The imperfect is also used with the present or 
 future of the indicative, when followed by a conditional 
 expression : as, 
 
 Je doute qu il part it mainte- I doubt that he would set off 
 nant, si on ne 1' y contraignait. now, if he was not compelled tn 
 
 do so. 
 
 404. The preterit is used with the present, or future 
 of the indicative : as, 
 
 Je doute qu^ il soil parti. I doubt that he has set off. 
 
 Je douterai qu' il soil parti. I shall doubt that he has set off. 
 
 405. The pluperfect is used with all the past tenses 
 of the indicative, and also with the tenses of the condi- 
 tional : as, 
 
 Je doutais qu^ ilfut parti. I doubted that he had set off. 
 Je douterais qu' ilfut parti. I should doubt that he had set off. 
 
 406. The pluperfect is also used with the present or 
 future of the indicative, when followed by a conditional 
 expression : as, 
 
 Je douterai qu' il fut parti, si I shall doubt that he would 
 on ne V y eut contraint. have set off, if he Jiad not been 
 
 compelled to do so. 
 
 407. The verb must be put in the subjunctive, when- 
 ever it is preceded by a superlative : as, 
 
 C est le plus bel enfant que Je It is the handsomest child 1 
 
 connaisse. know. 
 
 C est le meilleur homme que He is the best man I know. 
 € connaisse. 
 
 i 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 197 
 
 408. The subjunctive is also used after le seul, le 
 •premier^ le dernier : as, 
 
 C est le seul qxie f ale. If is the nnh/ one I have. 
 
 C est le premier qui se soit He is the first that has made 
 tronipe. a mistake. 
 
 409. We make use of the subjunctive after negative or 
 interrogative prepositions implying doubt or uncertainty, 
 and after v/ords which have a negative import : as, 
 
 Je ne crois pas qu'' ilvienne. I do not think he will come. 
 
 ('rovcz-vous qa^ ilvienne ? Do you think he will come ? 
 
 II n' y en a pas un qui puisse There is not one who can say sa> 
 ledire. 
 
 410. The verb is always put in the subjunctive, 
 after the conjunctions quoique^ malgre que, and all those 
 that mark a condition or a doubt, such as « moins que^ 
 pourvu que^ &c. : as, 
 
 Quoiqu' il soit juste. Although he is just. 
 Pourvu qu' il soit ban. Provided he be good. 
 
 411. The verb coming in the second part of a sentence 
 may be either in the indicative or in the subjunctive, ac- 
 cording to the idea of certainty or uncertainty which we 
 wish to express. 
 
 412. It is in the indicative when it expresses some- 
 thing certain : as, 
 
 Je cherche quelqu' un qui me I am looking for some one who 
 rendra service. may render me a service. 
 
 413. But it is put in the subjunctive, when it ex- 
 presses something uncertain : as, 
 
 Je cherche quelqu' un qui me / am looking for some one. 
 reside service. who may render me a service. 
 
 OF THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 414. The infinitive expresses affirmation in an indefi- 
 nite manner, without any reference to number or person: 
 as, chanter, to sing ; devoir, to owe. 
 
 415. The preposition /o, before the infinitive, when 
 represented in French, is rendered by pour, a or de : as, 
 
198 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 II vint pour me parler. He. came to speak to me. 
 II aime a jouer. He likes to play. 
 
 II me (lit d' aller. He told me to go. 
 
 416. The infinitive, when preceded by a preposition, 
 is often rendered into English by tl.e participle present: 
 as, 
 
 Emp^chez-le de partir. Prevent him from setting off. 
 
 II s' en alia sans dire un mot He went away without saying 
 a word. 
 
 417. It is also rendered by the participle present, 
 when it is the regimen of another verb : as, 
 
 Je r ai entendu chanter. I have heard him singing. 
 
 418. The infinitive expresses neither present, past, 
 nor future, except when it is preceded by other verbs • 
 as, 
 
 Je crois le voir. I think I see him. 
 
 Je crus r entendre. I thought I heard him. 
 
 Je voudrais le savoir. Iwiah I knew it. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXXVI. 
 
 He is in his chamber, where he is relaxing his mind from the fa- 
 
 . 382 delasser 
 tigue of business, by some instructive and agreeable reading. Adras- 
 
 lecture. 
 tus thought that he saw and heard Telemachus in a valley at 
 
 385 — •.417-. 
 
 the foot of a hill, where there was a crowd of combatants ; he runs, 
 
 foule 381 
 
 he flies, he longs to sate himself with blood. What are 
 
 vouloir •• -se rassasier- •• de 
 you doing here 1 I am translating from English into French. 
 • •382 382 en 
 
 I was answering your letter when you arrived. When I was 
 382 ft 385, 384 
 
 at Paris, I went every morning to take a walk in the Champs Ely 
 
 384 
 sees. As soon as we perceived the danger, we warned him of it. 
 
 3S5 
 I have travelled through almost all Europe, and I have visited the 
 
 386 dans 
 
 most celebrated places in Asia and Africa- 
 lieu de Afrique 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 199 
 
 EXERCISE LXXXVir. 
 
 I had finished the task that you had imposed upon me, when you 
 
 387 — 
 
 came in. When I was in the country, as soon as I had break- 
 
 •••385-.. a 387- 
 
 fasted, I used to go a-hunting. As soon as Casar 
 
 avals coutume 
 
 had crossed the Rubicon, he had no Iont,fer to deliberate; he 
 
 •SSSpasssr- 385 plus 
 
 was ohliiTed to conquer or to die. This morning, after he had 
 
 •335 devoir- vaincre 
 
 breakfasted, I spoke to him. I shall go shortly into the coun- 
 
 ••389 .-SyO-- bient6l k 
 
 try, where I intend to collect plants, in order to perfect myself 
 
 se proposer de • •herboriser- • 
 in the knowledge of botany. I shall have done before you 
 
 botanique. 391 ••• ne 
 
 set out. I will reward you, if you study your lesson well. You 
 ••410-^ 392 
 
 do not know whether you will be rewarded. 
 ••393-. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXXVIIL 
 
 I would settle your business before long, if it depended only 
 
 -•395faire-- peu, uniqueintjnt 
 
 upon me. I should have been mortified, if he had lost his 
 
 de 396 ...397--- 
 
 lawsuit. Do you know whether he would do it? Be not 
 
 proc6s. ■ . . 398 ■ • ■ 399 
 
 fond of praise ; but seek virtue, which procures it. 
 
 passionn6 pour louany;e ; 390 
 
 Let us not be deceived by the first appearance of things ; but 
 •••399 se laisser prendre • • i 
 
 iet us take time to fix our judgment. I wish you may succee-d 
 •ae donnor- de 401 
 
 in your undertaking. He will require you to do it. I could not 
 
 "•.•401 ••• 
 persuade myself that he was so vain as to aspire to that 
 402 assez — pour 
 
 place. Though every body says so, I do not believe that he 
 
 410 
 is gone to Rome. I could wish that the love which we ought to 
 
 • 409- • 
 have for one another, were the principle of all our actions, as it 
 402 
 
200 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 is the basis of all virtues. I doubt whether his piece would have 
 256 que 403 
 
 the approbation of connoisseurs, unless he made the alterations you 
 
 suffrage 
 •'udofed necessary. 
 
 EXERCISE LXXXIX. 
 
 am very sorry that this misfortune has happpened to you. It 
 
 -■..167, 404-. .. 
 
 would be unjust that a vile murderer should not be punished. I 
 assassin 405 
 
 could have wished that you had applied yourselves more to your 
 
 405 davanta?* 
 
 studies. I doubt whether the Romans would ever have triumphed 
 
 que 406 
 
 over the Gauls, if the different chiefs of this warlike people had not 
 
 been disunited. His cousin is the handsomest young lady that 
 
 on 
 
 can be seen. The movements of the planets are the most regu- 
 407 .-voir-. 
 
 lar that we know. He is the only man that is capable of filling 
 
 407 ' 409 ...416 •• 
 
 that charge. It is one of the last epistles which Saint Paul 
 
 has written. Do you believe he is vain enough to aspire to that 
 
 ••••403 409 
 
 high degree of honour ? I do not think she is handsome enough 
 
 409 
 to please you. There are few kings who know how to seek true 
 
 409 
 glory. 
 
 EXERCISE XC. 
 
 I will not pardon you, unless you promise me to behave 
 
 ne 410 de se conrluire 
 
 better in future. Although she is rich, I would not marry her. 
 
 k 410 
 
 I will give you leave to dance, provided you give me your word 
 de 410 parole 
 
 of honour not to overheat yourself. I want a decanter that 
 
 de ^chauffer carafe 
 
 \^ ill contain three pints of wine. I shall marry a lady that pleases 
 .••■ 411 411 
 
 me. You cannot prevent ray flocks from grazing in this place. I 
 
 . • 416 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 201 
 
 composed that song while walking, and I spent two hours in 
 3S6 422 a 
 
 correcting it. We saw her dead, and we thought we saw an 
 
 416 385 ..•418-. 
 
 angel asleep. This woman is always occupied in doing good 
 
 .■ii416.. 
 
 works : you see her constantly consoling the unhappy, relieving 
 tnuvre : sans cesse 417 assister 
 
 the poor, reconciling enemies, and promoting the happiness of every 
 417 •••faire--- 
 
 one around her. 
 
 CHAPTER Vr. 
 
 OF THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 419. There are two participles, the present and the 
 past. 
 
 420. The participle present is indeclinable, and always 
 expresses an action : as, 
 
 J' ai vu ceite femme obllgeant I saw that woman obliging 
 
 ses amis. her friends. 
 
 y ai vu ces beautes charmant I saw those beauties charming 
 
 tout le monde. every one. 
 
 421. But care must be taken not to confound it with 
 adjectives spelled similarly, and also derived from verbs, 
 which express only a state or a quality, and agree in 
 gender and number with their substantives : as, 
 
 Cette femme est obligeante. That woman is obliging. 
 
 Ces beautes sont charmantes. Those beauties are charming.. 
 
 422. The only preposition after which the French use 
 the participle present is en : as. 
 
 On apprend en instruisant les We learn by teaching others. 
 autres. 
 
 423. The participle past never agrees with its object 
 direct, when that object is placed after it: as, 
 
 Ellc a obtenu des graces. She has obtain id some favours. 
 
:03 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 424. But it does agree with its object direct, when that 
 object is placed before it: as, 
 
 Quelles sont les graces qu' elle What are the favours which she 
 a obtenues ? has obtained ? 
 
 425. The participle past of a neuter verb always? re- 
 mains invariable : as, 
 
 lis nous ont nid. They have injured us. 
 
 La joie a paru dans leurs Joy has appeared in their eyeg. 
 yeux. 
 
 428. The participle past is invariable, when it relates 
 to the pronoun en: as, 
 
 Tl a gagne autant de batailles He has won as many batiks as 
 qu' il en a livre. he has fought. 
 
 427 The participle past of an impersonal verb is 
 always invariable : as. 
 
 La chaleur qu' il ai fait. The heat which we have had. 
 La disette qu' il y a eu. The dearth which we have had. 
 
 428. When accompanied by the verb etre.) expressed 
 or understood, the participle past must be considered as 
 an adjective, since it only indicates the state of the sub- 
 ject, with which it agrees in gender and number: as, 
 
 Elle est blessee. She is wounded. 
 
 lis sout ble-^scs. They are wounded. 
 
 Que de \ilies detruiies / How many towns destroyed. 
 
 429. The participle past of the verbs which are natu- 
 rally pronominal, agrees with its object, which is always 
 the second pronoun : as, 
 
 lis se sont repentis. They have repented. 
 Elle s' est enfuie. She has fled. 
 
 430. T!ie participle past of neuter verbs, which are 
 accidentally made pronominal, is always invariable ; as, 
 
 Elles se sont 7i!ii. They have injured each other. 
 
 lis se sont parle. They have spoken to each other. 
 
 431. The participle past of active verbs which are 
 accidentally pronominal, follows the general rule. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 903 
 
 EXERCISE XCI. 
 
 Does not every body respect those magistrates, who, forgetting tlieir 
 
 4-20 
 own interests, observing the laws, protecting virtue, and restraining 
 
 r^primer 
 vice, have in view only the welfare of their country 1 Is not this a 
 
 bonheur 
 convincing proof of the surprising effects of the loadstone? It is not 
 
 4'21 aiiiianf? 
 
 in giving ourselves up to our passions that we live happy ; it is in go- 
 422 
 verning them. I have attentively read the papers which you have 
 
 423 
 sent me, about the affair which 1 had proposed to you, and I have 
 424 touchant 424 
 
 found that if I had undertaken it, I should have met with obstacles 
 
 423 424 423 — 
 
 which I had not foreseen. Our enemies have injured us more by their 
 
 424 425 
 
 moderation than bytheir valour. Alexander has destroyed more cities 
 
 423 
 than he has founded. The abundant rains which have fallen this 
 
 426 427 
 
 summer have spoiled the harvest. The wicked are always tormented 
 
 423 428 
 
 by the remorse of their own conscience. His sister has laughed at 
 
 429 
 me. How many kings have succeeded one another on the throne of 
 
 430 
 France? 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 1432.^ The negative, in French, consists of the words 
 ne pas^ or ne point, which are often divided. Pomt is 
 stronger than pas : as, 
 
 Je ne joue pas. I do not play. 
 
 Je ne joue point 7 do not play at all. 
 
 433. When ne is accompanied by a word expressing 
 
204 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 want or absence, such as jamais^ plus^ aucun^ &c. ; pas or 
 point is omitted : as, 
 
 Je ne joue jamais. I never play. 
 
 Je ne joue plus. ^ P^'^U ^^o more. 
 
 Je ne joue a aucun jeu. 7 do nut play at any game. 
 
 ^34^ For the sake of elegance, pas^ or point may also 
 be omitted after the verbs cesser., user, pouvoir and savoir : 
 as, 
 
 II ne cesse de parler. He does not leave off speaking. 
 
 II n ose vous parler. He dares not speak to you. 
 
 435. The particle ne is used after the verbs craindre., 
 trembler^ oppreliender., avoir peur^ although it does not 
 affect the meaning : as, 
 
 Je crains qu' il ne vienne. I am afraid he will come. 
 
 Je tremble que cela n' arrive. I tremble lest that will happen. 
 
 436. JVe is also used after the conjunctions a inoins 
 que., de peur que., and de crainle que : as, 
 
 A moins que vous ne lui par- Unless you speak to him. 
 liez. 
 
 De peur qu' il ne le sache. Lest he should know it. 
 
 437. Plus Siiid davantage must not be used indiffer- 
 ently. 
 
 Plus is followed by de., or que: as, 
 
 II a plus de brillant que de so- He has more brilliancy than 
 lide. solidity. 
 
 (438. But davantage is used alone, and at the end of 
 sentences : as, 
 
 La science est estimable, mais Learning is estimable, but 
 la vertu 1' est davantage. virtue is still more so. 
 
 ^ EXERCISE XCII. 
 
 Never do to others what you would not like them to do unto you. 
 
 433 autrui 432 -qu' on fit- — 
 
 Your letter is very badly written : I am afraid you have written it 
 
 435 
 hastily. I can not see him without trembling. Use none of 
 aiah^te. 434 416 Employer 433 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 205 
 
 these stratagems. He does not know what he says. He is better, 
 
 434 
 but we are afraid lest the fever should return upon him. For fear he 
 
 435 — — •••436-.. 
 
 should do it. Nobody behaves with more prudence than he. He is 
 
 433 437 
 
 rich, but his brother is more so. There is no more of it. 
 
 438 438 . n 
 
 OF THE PREPOSITION" 
 
 (439^ En is used in a vague sense, and is seldom fol- 
 lowed by the article : as, 
 
 II demeure en France. He lives in France. 
 CS4Q,) Dans is used in a determinate sense : as, 
 T! demeure dans la province de He lives in the province of 
 Middlesex. Middlesex. 
 
 Mettez cela dans le tiroir. Put this in the drawer. A^ ! / - 
 
 ( 3^41^ Avant denotes priority of time and order : as, 
 
 II est arrive avant moi. He has arrived before me, ^'* 
 
 ^442.' Devant is used for en presence de: as, J^ *^^' 
 II a paru devant le juge. He has appeared before the Judge. /^^'^ 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 OF THE CONJUNCTION que. 
 
 443. Que serves to complete a comparison : as, 
 
 L' Asie est plus grande que Asia is larger than Europe. 
 V Europe. 
 
 444. Que^ after ne, expresses restriction : as. 
 On ne parle que de cela. Thei/ talk only of that. 
 
 445. Que is used to save the repetition of comme, sz, 
 puisque^ &c. : as, 
 
 Comme il ne vient pas, et qu" il As he does not come, and [as] 
 
 ne fait rien dire. he sends no word. 
 
 Puisqu' il est votre ami, et que Since he is your friend, and 
 
 vous lui etes redevable. [since] you are beholden to him. 
 
206 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENJH 
 
 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES.* 
 
 THE DEATH OF ADRASTUS. 
 
 EXERCISE XCIir. 
 
 Telcmachus heard at a distance the shouts of the victors, and saw 
 
 cri 
 the disorder of his people flying before Adrastus; Uke a herd of 
 
 • -des siens •• troupe 
 
 timorous deer crossing the spacious plains, the woods, the mountainaSij 
 cainpagne, ' 
 
 and even the most rapid rivers, when they are pursued by the huntera 
 
 He sighs deeply ; indignation is manifest in his eyes ; he quits the 
 
 g^mir---' 256 ••paraitre-- 
 
 place where he had long fought with so much danger and glory ; ha 
 runs to sustain his party: he advances all covered with the blood of a 
 multitude of enemies whom he had extended in the dust ; and, on hia 
 
 way, he gives a shout which is heard by both armies, 
 pousser se faire entendre si. 
 
 * The Exercises in this Grammar, hitherto, have been in exem- 
 plification uf particular Rules. These " Promiscuous Exercises'' are 
 intended to furnish good practice under all the Rules. They comprise 
 three pieces, each divided into Exercises of convenient length. Th^ 
 first — "The Death of Adrastus" — is translated from the French 
 it preserves, as far as may be, the French idiom, and is accompanied* 
 as in previous Exercises, by versions of the more difficult phrases 
 and words, and references to appropriate Rules. The second — " Th» 
 Questions left by Minos" — also is translated from the French, anti 
 retains the idiomatic peculiarities of that language ; but it is without 
 aids to the pupil, who is now for the fiirst time left to walk, alone. The 
 third — -'The Transmigrations of Indur" — is originally English, andi 
 has been selected for the excellence of its style, for the pleasing variety} 
 of subjects which it introduces, and for the large number of ditTerentj 
 words which its calls into use. In this piece the pupil takes his last 
 step in the art of writing French : for he is required, unaided, to render 
 his own languasje into such French as shall not be merely English 
 gallicized, but French in idiom and general style — in short, such 
 French as a well educated Frenchman would use to express the saaM^ 
 ideas. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISP^S 207 
 
 Minerva had infused something terrible into his voice, which 
 
 mettre je ne sais quoi dont 
 
 made the neighbouring mountain ring. Tlie voice even of Mars 
 
 — retentir. 
 
 was never louder in Thrace, when he called up the infernal furies 
 
 war and death. The shout of Telemachus animates his peopie 
 256 
 with new courage, and chills the enemy with fear. Even Adrastus 
 
 feels himself confused. A thousand fatal presages thrill him 
 
 troubler. — le font fr^mir 
 
 with horror; and he is actuated rather by despair than a sedate 
 
 tranquille 
 
 valour. Thrice his trembling knees bent under him, and thrice ha 
 
 drew back without knowing what he did. A swooning pale- 
 
 416 de d^faillance 
 
 ness and a cold sweat spread over all his limbs; his hoarse and 
 
 faltering voice could sound no word distinct ; his eyes, sparkling with 
 
 hesitant 
 
 a gloomy fire, seemed to be ready to start out of his head ; he looked 
 
 like Orestes tortured by the Furies ; all his motions were convulsive. 
 
 agiter 
 Now he begins to believe that there are Gods ; he fancies that he sees 
 Alors 
 
 them incensed against him, and that he hears a hollow voice arising 
 from the depths of hell, and calling him to everlasting torment. Every 
 
 thing makes him sensible of a heavenly and invisible hand stretched 
 
 •• -lui faire sentir- •• 
 over his head, and ready to fall heavy upon him. Hope was extin- 
 
 s' app^santir 256 
 
 guished in his heart ; and his courage vanished like the daylight, 
 when the sun sinks into the bosom of the waves, and the earth is 
 ec sloped in the shades of night. 
 
 EXERCISE XCIV. 
 
 Adrastus, whose tyranny would already have been too long, if the 
 
 earth had not needed such a scourge, the impious Adrastus, had filled 
 
 up the measure of his iniquity, and his hour was come. He madly 
 
 force n6 
 mns to meet his inevitable fate ; horror, stinging remorse, constema- 
 
 856 
 
208 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 tion, fury, rage, despair, attended his steps. He scarcely sees Te- 
 
 marcher avec lui. 
 lemachus ; but he fancies he sees Avernus yawn, and whirlwinds of 
 
 256 
 flames issuing from dreary Phlegethon, ready to swallow him up. 
 He cries out, and his mouth remains open, without being able to 
 
 utter a word. So a man asleep in a frightful dream opens his lips, 
 
 286 
 and strives to speak ; but his speech continually fails him, and he seeks 
 it in vain. Adraslus, with a trembling, hasty hand, hurls his javelin 
 at Telemachus. The latter is undaunted, as the friend of the Gods, 
 and covers himself with his shield. Victory already seems to over- 
 shadow him with her wings, and suspend a crown over his head. A 
 
 calm and composed courage glittered in his eyes, and one would 
 doux paisible 
 
 have taken him for Minerva herself, so wise and discreet does he 
 
 mesur^ 
 appear in the greatest dangers. The javelin of Adrastus is repelled 
 by the shield. Upon which the Daunian instantly draws his sword, 
 to deprive the son of Ulysses of the advantage of throwing his jave- 
 lin in his turn. Telemachus, seeing Adrastus with his sword in 
 
 — la a 
 
 his hand, immediately draws his also, and drops his useless javelin. 
 286 
 
 EXERCISE XCV. 
 
 When the other combatants on each side saw them thus closely 
 engaged, they laid down their arms to gaze upon them, and from this 
 single combat expected the issue of the war. Their swords, bright 
 as the flashes whence the thunderbolts are hurled, frequently cross 
 
 each other, and deal their fruitless blows upon their polished and 
 
 porter des 
 resounding armour. The two combatants stretch themselves out, 
 shrink up, stoop down, rise again in an instant, and at length 
 
 grapple with each other. The ivy growing at the foot of an elm, 
 
 se saisir 
 
 does not more closely embrace its hard and knotty trunk with its 
 entwining arms, even to its highest branches, than the two com- 
 batants grasp each other. Adrastus had lost nothing of his strength ; 
 but that of Telemachus was not yet mature. Adrastus makes sever.il 
 efforts to stagger, and throw his antagonist by surprise. At last he 
 endeavours to seize \l\e sword of the voung Greek, but in vain : for 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 20D 
 
 the moment he attempts it, Teleraachus lifts him from the ground, 
 and throws him on the sand. In this dreadful moment, the wretch 
 
 who had so long despised the gods, betrays an unmanly fear of death; 
 
 montre lache 
 
 he is ashamed to ask his life, and yet cannot help manifesting his 
 desire to live. He endeavours to move the compassion of Telcma- 
 chus. Son of Ulysses, said he, I at length acknowledge the 
 i^hteous gods : they punish me as I have deserved. It is misfortune 
 tnly that opens our eyes to truth : I now see it, and it condemns me ; 
 )ut let an unhappy prince bring your father, now distant from his 
 country, to your remembrance, and touch your breast with cora- 
 
 jassion 
 
 Telemachus, who kept the tyrant under him with his knee, and 
 
 had already raised his sword to plunge it into his throat, immediately 
 replied : I sought nothing but victory, and the peace of the nations I 
 
 came to assist ; I do not delight in bloodshed. Live, then, 
 
 aimer d. r^pandre le sang. 
 Adrastus, but live to repair your faults; restore every thing which 
 
 you have usurped ; re-establish peace and justice on the coast of 
 
 256 
 Great Hesperia, which you have stained by numberless massacres 
 and treacheries ; live, and become another man. Learn by your 
 fall that the gods are righteous ; that the wicked are miserable ; that 
 
 they deceive themselves in seeking for happiness in violence, 
 
 — 256 
 
 inhumanity and falsehood ; and, in short, that nothing is so delightful 
 
 237 
 and happy as a plain and steady virtue. Give us, as hostages, your 
 ni 
 son Metrodorus, with twelve of the principal persons of your nation 
 
 EXERCISE XCVL 
 
 This said, Telemachus suffers Adrastus to rise, and holds out 
 A ces paroles, 
 
 his hand to him, without suspecting his treachery : but the tyrant im- 
 mediately darts another javelin at him, which was very short, and 
 which he had kept concealed. It was so sharp, and so artfully 
 thrown, that it would have pierced Telemachus's armour, if it had 
 I not been divine. Adrastus at the same time runs behind a tree, to 
 
 i I* 14 
 
 I 
 
210 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 avoid the pursuit of the young Greek. Telemachus then cries out : 
 
 Bear witness, Daunians, the victory is ours ! The impious wretch 
 Vous le voyez, — 
 
 saves himself only by treachery. He that fears not the gods, is 
 afraid of death. On the contrary, he that fears the gods, fears nothing 
 but them. In speaking these words, he advances towards the 
 Daunians, and makes a sign to his peojile, who were on the other 
 side of the tree, to cut off the retreat, of Adrastus. The tyrant, 
 
 perceiving his situation, pretends as if he would go back again, 
 
 voir fait seinbl ant da retourner sur ses pas 
 
 and attempts to break through the Cretans who obstruct his passage. 
 But Telemachus, swift as the thunderbolt hurled by the hand of the 
 father of the gods from the top of Olympus on the heads of the guilty, 
 
 flies instantly on his enemy : he seizes him with his victorious hand, 
 
 de un 
 he throws him on the earth, ns the cruel north wind beats down the 
 
 tender harvests which gild the fields. He hears him no mote, 
 
 ^couter 
 though the impious wretch makes a second attempt to abuse the 
 
 goodness of his heart. He plunges his sword in his breast, and 
 
 hurls him headlong into the flames of dreary Tartarus, a punishment 
 
 • •••le pr<5cii)iter 250 2S6 
 
 worthy of his crimes. — Fk^^elox. 
 
 I 
 
 THE QUESTIONS LEFT BY MINOS. 
 
 EXERCISE XCVir. 
 
 The chief of the ciders opened the book of the laws of Minos; it was 
 ft large volume, which was usually locked up in a golden box, with 
 perfumes. All the old men kissed it with respect; for they said, that 
 nest to the gods, from whom good laws proceed, nothing ought to be 
 saciod to men <is laws designed to render then good, wise, and happy. 
 Those who are entrusted with the execution of the laws for the go- 
 vernment of the people, ought themselves always to be governed by 
 th«; laws : it is the law, and not the man. which ought to reign. Such 
 was the discouise of these sages. He who presided over them proposed 
 three questions, which were to be resolved by the laws of Minos. 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. Ull 
 
 The First Question was — Who is the most free of all men 1 Some 
 answered that it was a king who has an absolute dominion over his 
 subjects, and was victorious over all his enemies. Others maintained 
 that it was a rich man, who could gratify nil his desires. Others said, 
 that it was a man who was not married, and was travelling during his 
 whole life through divers countries, without ever being subject to 
 the laws of any nation. Others imagined, that it was a barbarian, 
 who, subsisting by hunting in the midst of the woods, was indepen- 
 dent of all government, and free from every want. Others believed, 
 that it was a man lately made free, because, by passing from the 
 rigours of slavery, he enjoyed, more than any body else, the sweets of 
 liberty. And lastly, others bethought themselves to say that it was a 
 dying man, because death freed him from every thing, and that all 
 mankind united had no longer any power over him. 
 
 EXERCISE XCVIII. 
 
 When my turn came, I was at no loss for an answer, because I had 
 not forgotten what Mentor had often told me. <' The most free of all 
 men," said I, "is he who can be free in slavery itself. In what coun- 
 try or condition soever a man may be, he is perfectly free, provided he 
 fears the gods, and fears nothing but them. In a word, the truly free 
 man is he who, void of all fears and all desires, is subject only to the 
 gods and reason." The elders looked on each other with a smile, and 
 were surprised to see that iny answer was precisely that of Minos. 
 
 They then proposed the Second Question, in these words : — Who 
 is the most unhappy of all men 1 Every one said vi-hat octf^rred to 
 his mind. One said. It is a man who has neither money, nor health, 
 nor honour. Another said, It is one who has no friend. Others 
 maintained, that it was a man who has ungrateful and degenerate 
 children. There came a sage of the isle of Lesbos, who said: The 
 most unhappy of all men, is he who thinks himself so; for unhappi- 
 ness arises less from what we suffer, than from the impatience v\ith 
 which we aggravate our misery. At these words, the whole assembly 
 shouted ; they applauded the sage Lesbian, believing that he would 
 carry the prize as to this question. But they asked my opinion, and 
 I answered — according to Mentor's maxims — " The most unhappy of 
 all men, is a king who expects to be happy by rendering other men 
 
212 COLLOrS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 miserable: his blindness doubles his unhappiness; for, not knowing 
 his misfortune, he cannot cure himself of it ; he is afraid even to know 
 it : truth cannot pierce through the crowd of flatterers, to arrive at him. 
 He is the slave of his passions, he knows not his duty ; he has neve, 
 tasted the pleasure of doing good, nor felt the charms of virtue; he ii> 
 wretched, and deserves to be so ; his wretchedness increases daily ; he 
 runs to his destruction, and the gods are preparing eternal punishment 
 for him." The whole assembly owned that I had outdone the Les- 
 bian sage, and the elders declared that I had hit upon the true sense 
 of Minos. 
 
 EXERCISE XCIX. 
 
 It was asked, "Which of the two is preferable: a king victorious and in 
 vincible in war ; or a king without experience in war, but qualiiie<J to 
 govern his people wisely in peace 1 The majority answered, that 
 a king who is invincible in war was to be preferred. What profits it, 
 said they, to have a king who knows to govern well in peace, if he 
 knows not to defend his country in time of warl His enemies 
 will vanquish him, and reduce his people to slavery. Others, on the 
 contrary, maintained, that a pacific king would be better, because he 
 would fear war, and take care to avoid it Others said, that a victo- 
 rious king would labour to advance his subjects' glory as well as his 
 own, and would render them masters of other nations ; whereas, a pa- 
 cific king would keep theni in shameful cowardice, My opinion was 
 asked, and I answered thus : 
 
 " A king who is able to govern only in peace, or only in war, and 
 ts not capable of conducting his people in both these circumstances, is 
 out half a king. But, if you compare a king who understands nothing 
 but war, to a wise king, who, without understanding war himself, is 
 capable of maintaining it on occasion by his generals, I think him pre 
 ferable to the other. A king entirely turned to war, would be so often 
 making it, in order to extend his dominions and glory, that he would 
 ruin his people : what avails it to them that their prince subdues other 
 nations, if they themselves are miserable under his reign ? Besides, 
 long wars always draw after them many disorders; the victors them- 
 selves grow licentious in those times of confusion. Consider how 
 dear it has cost Greece to triumph over Troy : she was deprived of 
 her kings for more than ten years. Whilst every thing is inflamed hf 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 213 
 
 war, laws, agriculture, and the arts languish. Even the hest princes, 
 while they are engaged in it, are constrained to commit the greatest 
 of evils, which is, to wink at licentiousness, and to employ wicked men 
 How many profligate wretches are there whom one would punish in 
 time of peace, but whose crimes are even rewarded during the disor- 
 ders of war! Never had any nation a conquering monarch, without 
 having suffered much from his ambition. A conqueror, intoxicated 
 with his glory, ruins his victorious nation almost as much as the na- 
 tions he has conquered. A king who has not the qualifications requi- 
 site for peace, cannot make his subjects taste the fruits of a war hap- 
 pily ended. He resembles a man who not only can defend his own 
 field, but is able to usurp his neighbour's, although he neither can 
 plough nor sow it in order to reap the harvest. Such a man seems 
 born to destroy, to ravage, to overturn the world, and not to render a 
 nation happy by the wisdom of his government. 
 
 EXERCISE C. 
 "Let us now advert to the pacific king. He is not, indeed, quali- 
 fied to make great conquests; that is, he is not born to trouble the re- 
 pose of his people, by seeking to vanquish other nations whom justice 
 has not subjected to him ; but he is really adapted to govern in peace. 
 He has all the qualifications which are necessary to secure his sub- 
 jects against their enemies : for he is just, moderate, and easy with 
 regard to his neighbours ; he never undertakes any thing against tliem 
 which may disturb the public peace, and he is faithful to his alliances. 
 His allies love him, do not fear him, and have an entire confidence in 
 him. If they have a restless, haughty and ambitious neighbour, all 
 the adjacent princes who fear the turbulent, and have no jealousy of 
 the peaceful king, join themselves to the latter, in order to hinder him 
 from being oppressed. His probity, his sincerity, his moderation, 
 make him the arbiter of all the neighbouring nations. Whilst the 
 enterprising monarch is hated by all the rest, and continually in dan- 
 ger of their confederacies, the peaceful prince has the glory to be, as it 
 were, the father and guardian of the others. These are the advan- 
 tages which he has abroad ; those he enjoys at home are still more 
 solid. Since he is qualified to govern in peace, I suppose that he 
 governs by the wisest laws. He suppresses pomp, luxury, and all 
 the arts which serve only to cherish vice ; he makes those arts flourish 
 
814 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 which are subservient to the real wants of life; above all, he causes 
 his subjects to apply thennselves to agriculture, and he thereby pro- 
 cures them plenty of all nece.csaries. 1'hese laborious people, simple 
 in their manners, accustomed to live on a little, and easily getting their 
 livelihood by the culture of their lands, increase daily. Let a neigh- 
 bouring conqueror attack them ; he will find them, perhaps, not very 
 expert in forming camps, in ranging themselves in order of battle, or 
 in erecting machines to besiege a city ; but he will find them invinci- 
 ble by their numbers, by their courage, by their patience of fatigues, 
 by their habit of bearing poverty, by their vigour in battle, and by a 
 virtue which ill success itself cannot abate. Besides, if this king has 
 not sufficient experience to command his armies himself, he will cause 
 them to be commanded by men who are capable of it, and will know 
 how to make use of them, without losing his authority. In the mean 
 while, he will obtain assistance from his allies; his subjects will rather 
 die than submit to the yoke of a violent and unjust prince ; and even 
 the gods themselves will fight for him. Behold what resources he svill 
 have amidst the greatest dangers I I conclude, therefore, that a peace- 
 ful king, who is ignorant of war, is a very imperfect king, since h€ 
 knows not to discharge one of his greatest duties, which consists in 
 subduing his enemies ; but I add, however, that he is infinitely supe- 
 rior to a conqueror, who wants the qualities necessary in peace, and 
 IS fit only for war." 
 
 All the elders declared that I had spoken like Minos. — Fexelgx 
 
 THE TRANSMIGRATIONS OF INDUR. 
 
 EXERCISE CI. 
 At the time when fairies and genii possessed the powers which they 
 have now lost, there lived in the country of the Brahmins a man 
 mmed Indur, who was distinguished, not only for that gentleness ol 
 disposition and humanity towards all living creatures, which are so 
 much cultivated among those people, but for an insatiable curiosi'j 
 respecting the nature and way of life of all animals. In pursuit of 
 knowledge of this kind he would frequently spend the night among 
 onely rocks, or in the midst of thick forests ; and there, under shelter 
 of a hanging cliff, or mounted upon a high tree, he would watch the 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 215 
 
 motions ami actions of all the animals that seek their prey in the 
 night; and remaining in the same spot till the break of day. he 
 would observe these tribes of creatures retiring to tlieir dens, and all 
 others coming forth to enjoy the beams of tl)e rising sun. On these 
 occasions, if he saw any opportunity of exercising his benevolence 
 towards animals in distress, he never failed to make use of it; and 
 many limes rescued the small birds from the pitiless hawk, and the 
 lamb or kid from the gripe of the wolf and lytix. One day, as he 
 was sitting an a tree in the forest, a little frolicksome moukoy, in 
 taking a long leap from one bough to another, chanced to miss his 
 hold, and fell from a great height to the ground. As he lay there, 
 unable to move, Indur espied a large veuomous sorjient advancing to 
 make the poor defenceless creature his prey. He immediately de- 
 scended from his post, and taking the fatle monkey in his arms, ran 
 with it to the tree, and gently placed it upon a bough. In the mean 
 time, the enraged serpent, pursoing him, overtook him before he 
 could mount the tree, and bit hnn in the leg. Presently the liinU 
 began to swell, and the effects of the venom became visible over 
 Indur's whole frame. He grew faint, sick, and pale; anYl, sinking 
 on the ground, was sensible that hi-s last moments were fast a{)proach- 
 ing. As thus he lay, he was surpri.-cd to hear a human voice from 
 the tree; and looking up, he beheld, ^n the bough where he had 
 placed the monkey, a beautiful woman, who thus addressed hi.-n: — 
 "Indur, I am truly grieved ihat thy kindness to me should have been 
 the cause of thy destrurtion. Know, that in the form of the poor 
 monkey, it was the potent fairy Perezinda to whom thou gavest 
 succour. Obliged to pass a certain number of days every year under 
 the shape of an animal, I had chosen this form; and, though not 
 mortal, I should have suffered extreme agonie* from the bite of the 
 serpent, hadst thou not so humanely assisted tne. It is not in my 
 power to prevent the fatal effect of the poison ; but I am able to graul 
 thee any wish ihou shalt form respecting the future state of existence 
 to «hich thou art now hastening. Speak, then, before it be too late, 
 and let me show my gratitude." 
 
 " Great Perezinda !" replied Indur, " since j'ou deign so boun- 
 ceously to return my service, this is the request that I make: In all 
 my transmigrations may I retain a rational soul, with the memory 
 ftf the adventures I have gone through; and when death aHs xa» 
 
216 CC?.LOT*S PROGKESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 free from one body, may I instantly animate another in the prime 
 of its powers and faculties, without passing through the helpless state 
 of infancy." " It is granted," answered the fairy ; and immediately 
 breaking a small branch from the tree, and breathing on it, she threw 
 it down to Indur, and bade him hold it fast in his hand. He did so, 
 and presently expired. 
 
 EXERCISE CII. 
 liistantly, he found himself in a green valley, by the side of a clear 
 stream, grazing amid a herd of antelopes. He admired his elegant 
 shape, sleek, spotted skin, and polished spiral horns ; and drank with 
 delight of the cool rivulet, cropped the juicy herb, and sported with 
 his companions. Soon an alarm was given of the approach of an 
 enemy ; and they all set off with the swiftness of the wind to the 
 neighbouring immense plains, where they were soon out of the reach 
 of injury. Indur was highly delighted with the ease and rapidity 
 of his motions; and snuffing the keen air of the desert, oounded 
 away, scarcely deigning to touch the ground with his feet. This 
 way of life went on very pleasantly for some time, till at length the 
 herd was one morning alarmed with noises of trumpets, drums, and 
 loud shouts, on every side. They started and ran first to the right, 
 then to the left, but were continually driven back by the surrounding 
 crowd, which now appeared to be a whole army of hunters, with the 
 Ring of the country and all his nobles, assembled on a solemn chase, 
 after the manner of the eastern people. And now the circle began 
 to close, and numbers of aifrighted animals, of various kinds, thronged 
 together in the centre, keeping as far as possible from the dingers 
 that approached them from all quarters. 'J'he huntsmen were now 
 come near enough to reach their game with their arrows ; and the 
 prince and his lords shot at them as they passed and repassed, killing 
 and wounding great numbers. Indur and his surviving companions, 
 seeing no other means of escape, resolved. to make a bold push to- 
 wards that part of the ring which was the most weakly guarded \ and 
 though many perished in the attempt, yet a few, leaping over the 
 heads of the people, got clear away ; and Indur was among the num- 
 ber. But whilst he was scouring over the plain, rejoicing m his good 
 fortune and conduct, an enemy, swifter than himself, overtook him. 
 This was a falcon, w^hich, let loose by one of the huntsmen, dashed 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISf:S. 317 
 
 like lightning after the fugitives; and alighting upon the head of In- 
 dur, began to tear his eyes with his beak, and flap his wings over his 
 face. Indur, terrified and blinded, knew not which way he went; 
 and, instead of proceeding straight forwards, turned round, and came 
 again tovv^ards the hunters. One of these, riding full speed, with a 
 javelin in his hand, came up to him, and ran the weapon in his side. 
 He fell down, and by repeated wounds was soon despatched. 
 
 EXERCISE Clir. 
 
 When the struggle of death was over, Indur was equally surprised 
 and pleased on finding himself soaring high in the air, as one of 
 a flight of wild geese, in their annual migration to breed in the arctic 
 regions. With vast delight he sprang forward, on easy wing, through 
 the immense fields of air, and surveyed beneath him extensive tracts 
 of earth, perpetually varying with plains, mountains, rivers, lakes, and 
 woods. At the approach of night the flock lighted on the ground, 
 and fed on the green corn or grass; and at daybreak they were again 
 on wing, arranged in a regular wedge-like body, with an experienced 
 leader at their head. Thus for many days they continued their jour- 
 ney, passing over countries inhabited by various nations, till at length 
 they arrived in the remotest part of Lapland, and settled in a wide 
 marshy lake, filled with numerous reedy islands, and surrounded on 
 all sides with dark forests of pine and birch. Here, in perfect security 
 from man and hurtful animals, they followed the great business of 
 breeding and providing for their young, living plentifully upon the 
 insects and aquatic reptiles that abounded in this sheltered spot. 
 Indur with great pleasure exercised his various powers, of swimming, 
 diving, and flying; sailing round the islands, penetrating into every 
 creek and bay, and visiting the deepest recesses of the woods. He 
 surveyed with astonishment the sun, instead of rising and setting, 
 making a complete circle in the heavens, and cheering the earth with 
 a perpetual day. Here he met with innumerable tribes of kindred 
 birds, varying in size, plumage and voice, but all passing their time in 
 a similar manner, and furnished with the same powers for providing 
 food and a safe retreat for themselves and their young. The whole 
 lake was covered with parties fishing or sporting, and resounded with 
 their loud cries; while the islands were filled with their nests, and 
 new broods of young were continually coming forth, and launchingr 
 
 K. 
 
riB COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 upon the surface of the waters. One day Intlur's curiosity hiving lea 
 him at a distance from his companions to the woody border of the lake, 
 he was near paying dear for his heeJlessness ; fjr a fox, th.it lay in 
 wait among the bushes, sprang upon him, and it was with the utmost 
 difficulty, and not without the loss of some feathers, that he broke fro.u 
 his hold. 
 
 Summer now drawing to an enJ, the vast congregation of water- 
 fowl began to break up ; and large bodies of them daily took their 
 way southwards, to pass the winter in climites where the waters are 
 never so frozen as to become uninhibitable by the farthered race. 
 The wild geese to whom Indur belongeJ, proceede.l with their young 
 ones by long daily journeys across Sweden, the Baltic sea, Poland 
 and Turkey, to Lesser Asia, and finished their journey at the cele- 
 brated plains on the banks of the Cayster, a noted resort for their species 
 ever since the age of Homer. Here they soon recruited from the fa 
 tigue of their march, and enjoyeJ themselves in the deU^ious climate 
 till winter. This season, though here extremely mil J, yet miking 
 the means of sustenance somewhat scarce, they were obliged to maka 
 foraging excursions to the cultivated lands in the neighboarhooJ. 
 Having committed great depredations upon a field of young wheat, 
 the owner spread a net on the grounJ, in which Fndur, with several 
 of his companions, had the misfortune to be caught No mercy waa 
 shown them, but as they were taken out, one by one, their necks were 
 all broken. 
 
 EXERCISE CIV. 
 Indur was not immediately sensible of the next change he un 
 derwent, which was into a dormouse, fast asleep in his hole at the fooi; 
 of a bush. As it was in a country where the winters are pretty 
 severe, he did not awake for some weeks ; when, a thaw having 
 taken place, and the sun beginning to warm the earth, he uaioileJ 
 himself one day, stretched, opened his eyes, and not being able to 
 make out where he was, he roused a female companion wh>m ha 
 found by his side. When she was suflijiently awakened, a:id the} 
 both began to feel hungry^, she le.l the way to a migizine of nuts and 
 acorns, where they mide a comfortable meal, an J soon fell asleep again. 
 This nap having lasted a few days, they awoke a second time, and 
 aaviog again eaten, they veatured to crawl to the mouth of their 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 219 
 
 hole, where, pulling away some withered grass and leaves, they peeped 
 out into the open air. After taking a turn or two in tlie sua, they 
 grew chill, and went down again, stopping up the entrance after theai. 
 The cold weather returning, they took another long nap, till at length, 
 spring being fairly set in, they roused in earnest, and began to niik« 
 daily excursions abroad. Their winter stock of provisions being 
 now exhausted, they were for some time reduced to great straits, 
 and o])liged to dig for roots and pignuts. Their fare was mended as 
 the season advanced, and they made a nest near the bottom of a tree, 
 where they brought up a young family. They never ranged far from 
 homo, nor ascended the higher branches of the tree, and passed a great 
 part of their time in sleep, even during the midst of summer. When 
 autumn came, they were busily employed in collecting the nuts, 
 acorns, and other dry fruits that fell from the trees, and laying them 
 up in their storehouse under ground. One day, as InJur was closely 
 engaged in this occupation, at some distance from his dwelling, he 
 was seized by a wild cat, which, after tormenting him for a time, gave 
 him a gripe, and put him out of his pain. 
 
 EXKRCISE CV. 
 From one of the smallest and most defenceless of animals, Indur 
 found himself instantly chuiged into a mijestic elsp'tmt, in a lofty 
 forest of the isle of Cevlon. Elited with this wonderful advancement 
 in the scale of creation, he stalked along with conscious dignity, and 
 surveyed with pleasing wonder his o.vn form and that of his com- 
 panions, together with the rich scenery of the ever verdmit woods, 
 which perfumed the air with their spicy odour, and lifted their tall 
 heads to the clouds. Here, fearing no injury, and not viesiring to do 
 any, the gigantic herd roamed at large, feeding on the green branches 
 which they tore down with their trunks, bathing in deep rivers during 
 the heat of the day, and reposing in the depths of the forests, reclined 
 against the massy trunks of trees by night. It was long before Indur 
 met with any adventure that could lead him to doubt his security. 
 But one day, having penetrated into a close entangled thicket, ha 
 es{)ied, lurking under the thick covert, a grim tiger, whose eyes 
 flashed rage and fury. Though the tiger was one of the largest of 
 his species, yet his bulk was trifling compared to that of an elephant, 
 a single foot of which seemed sufficiant to crush him; yet the fierce- 
 
220 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 ness and cruelty of his looks, his angry growl, and grinning teeth, 
 struck some terror into Indur. There was little time, however, for 
 reflection ; for when Indur had advanced a single step, the tiger, set- 
 ting up a roar, sprang to meet him, attempting to seize his lifted 
 trunk. Indur was dexterous enough to receive him upon one of 
 his tusks, and exerting ali his strength, threw the tiger to a great 
 distance; he was somewhat stunned by the fall, but recovering, re- 
 newed the assault with redoubled fury. Indur again, and a third 
 time, threw him off; after which the tiger, turning about, bounded away 
 into the midst of the thicket. Indur drew back, and rejoined his com- 
 panions, with some abatement in the confidence he had placed in his 
 size and strength, which had not protected him from undergoing so 
 dangerous an attack. 
 
 EXERCISE CVI. 
 Soon after, he joined the rest of the herd in an expedition beyond 
 the bounds of the forest, to make depredations on some fields of maize. 
 They committed great havoc, devouring part, but tearing up and 
 trampling down much more ; when the inhabitants, taking the alarm, 
 assembled in great numbers, and with fierce shouts and flaming 
 brands, drove them back to the woods. Not contented with this, they 
 were resolved to make them pay for the mischief they had done, by 
 taking some prisoners. For this purpose, they enclosed a large space 
 among the trees with strong posts and stakes, bringing it to a narrower 
 and narrower compass, and ending at last in a passage only capable 
 of admitting one elephant at a time. This was divided by strong cross- 
 bars, which would lift up and down, into several apartments. They 
 then sent out some tame female elephants, bred to the business, 
 who, approaching the herd of wild ones, inveigled the males to follow 
 them towards the enclosures. Indur was among the first who was di^- 
 coyed by their artifices ; and with some others following heedlessly, ho 
 got into the narrowest part of the inclosure, opposite to the passage. 
 Here they stood awhile doubting whether they should go further. 
 But the females leading the way, and uttering the cry of invtation, 
 they ventured at length to follow. When a sufficient number was in 
 the passage, the bars were let down by men placed for the purpose, 
 and the elephants were fairly caught ir. a trap. As soon as they were 
 sensible of their situation, they fell into a fit of rage, and with all their 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 221 
 
 efforts endeavoured to brealc through. But the hunters throwing 
 nooses over them, bound thein fast with strong ropes and chains to 
 the posts on each side, and thus kept them without food or sleep for 
 three days ; when, being exhausted with hunger and fatigue, they 
 ga^"e signs of sufficient tameness. They were now let out one by one, 
 and bound, each of them, to two large tame elephants, with riders on 
 their backs, and thus without resistance were led away close prisoners. 
 They were then put into separate stables, and by proper discipline 
 were presently rendered quite tame and gentle. 
 
 EXERCISE CVII. 
 
 Not long after, Indur, with five more, was sent over from Ceylon 
 to the continent of India, and sold to one of the princes of the country. 
 He was now trained to all the services elephants are there employed 
 in: which were, to carry persons on his back in a kind of sedan or 
 Utter, to draw cannon, ships, and other great weights, to kneel and rise 
 at command, make obeisance to his lord, and perform all the motior>s 
 and attitudes he was ordered. Thus he Uved a long time, well fed 
 and caressed, clothed in costly trappings on days of ceremony, and 
 contributing to the pomp of eastern royalty. At length a war broke 
 out, and Indur came to be employed in a different scene. After propei 
 training, he was marched, with a number of his fellows, into the field, 
 bearing on his back a small wooden tow-er, in which were placed some 
 soldiers, with a small field-piece. They soon came in sight of tha 
 enemy, and both sides were drawn up for battle. Indur and the rest 
 were urged forwards by theii* leaders, wondering at the same time at 
 the scene in which they were engaged, so contrary to their nature and 
 manners. Presently all was involved in smoke and fire. The ele- 
 phants advancing, soon put to flight those who were drawn up before 
 them ; but their career was stopped by a battery of cannon, which 
 played furiously against them. Their vast bodies offered a fair mark 
 to the balls, which presently struck down some, and wounded others. 
 Indur received a shot on one of his tusks, which broke it, and put him 
 to such pain and affright, that, turning about, he ran with all speed 
 over the plain ; and falling in with a body of their own infantr}*, ha 
 burst through, trampling down wKole ranks, and filling them with 
 terror and confusion. His leader having now lost all command over 
 him, and finding him hurtful only to his own party, applied the sharp 
 
2^2 COLLOrS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 instrument he carried to the nape of his neck, and driving it in witn all 
 his force, pierced his spinal marrow, so that he fell lifeless to the 
 ground 
 
 EXERCISE CVIII. 
 In the next stage of his existence, Indur, to his great surprise, found 
 oven the vast bulk of the elephant prodigiously exceeded : for he was 
 now a whale of the largest species, rolling in the midst of the arctic 
 seas. As he darted along, the lash of his tail made whirlpools in the 
 mighty deep. When he opened his immense jaws, he drew in a flood 
 of brine, which, on rising to the surface, he spouted out again -n a 
 rushing fountain, that rose high in the air with the noise of a mighty 
 cataract. All the other inhabitants of the ocean seemed as nothing to 
 him. He swallowed, almost without knowing it, whole shoals of the 
 smaller kinds; and the larger swiftly turned aside at his approach. 
 " Now," he cried to himself, " whatever other evils may await me, I 
 am certainly secure from the molestation of other animals ; for what is 
 the creature that can dare to cope with me, or measure his strength 
 with mine? Having said this, he saw swimming near him a fish not 
 a quarter of his length, armed with a dreadful row of teeth. This waa 
 a grampus, which directly flying upon Indur, fastened on him, and 
 made his great teeth meet in his flesh. Indur roared with pain, and 
 lashed the sea till it was all in a foam ; but could neither reach nor 
 shake off his cruel foe. He rolled over and over, rose and sank, and 
 exerted all his boasted strength; but to no purpose. At length the 
 grampus quitted his hold, and left him not a little mortified with the 
 adventure. This was, however, forgotten, and Indur received pleasure 
 from his new situation as he roamed thiough the boundless fields of 
 ocean, now diving to its very bottom, now shooting swiftly to the sur- 
 face, and sporting with his companions in unwieldy gambols. Hav- 
 ing chosen a mate, he took his course with her southwards, and ia 
 due time brought up two young ones, of whom he was extremely 
 fond. The summer season being arrived, be more frequently than 
 usual *rose to the surface, and basking in the sunbeams, floa'.ed un- 
 moved with a large part of his huge body above the waves. As he 
 was thus one day enjoying a profound sleep, he was awakened by a 
 sharp instrument penetrating deep into his back. Instantly he sprang 
 away with the swiftness of lightning, and feeling the weapon still 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 223 
 
 Gticking, hedivod into the recesses of the deep, and stayed tliere till want 
 of air obliged him to ascend to the surface. Here another harpoon 
 was plunged into him, the smart of which again made him fly from 
 his unseen foes; but after a shorter course, he was again compelled to 
 rise, much weakened by the loss of blood, which, gushing in a torrent, 
 '.inged the waters as he passed. Another wound was inflicted, which 
 soon brought him almost lifeless to the surface: and the line fastened 
 to the first harpoon being now pulled in, this enormous creature was 
 brought, an unresisting prey, to the side of a ship, where he was soon 
 quite despatched, and then cut to pieces. 
 
 EXERCISE CIX. 
 The soul of this huge carcass had next a much narrower lodging, 
 for fndur was changed into a bee, which, with a great mulitude of its 
 young companions, was on flight in search of a new settlement, their 
 parents having driven then> out of the hive, which was unable to con 
 tain them all. After a rambling excursion, the queen, by whom all 
 their motions were directed, settled on the branch of a lofty tree. They 
 all immediately clustered round her, and soon formed a large black 
 bunch, depending from the bough. A man presently planting a lad- 
 der, ascended with a bee-hive, and swept them in. After they were 
 quietly settled in their new habitation, they were placed on a stand ia 
 the garden, along with some other colonies, and left to begin their la- 
 bours. Every fine morning, as soon sw the sun was up, the greater 
 part of them sallied forth, and roamed over the garden and the neigh- 
 bouring fields in search of fresh and fragrant flowers. They first 
 collected a quantity of gluey matter, with which they lined all the 
 inside of their houses. Then they brought wax, and began to mike 
 their cells, building them with the utmost regularity, though it was 
 their first attempt, and they had no teacher. As fast as they were 
 built, some were filled with liquid honey gathered from the nectaries 
 of flowers : and as they filled the cells, they sealed them up with a 
 thin covering of wax. In other cells the queen bee deposited her eggs, 
 which were to supply a new progeny for tne ensuing year. Nothing 
 could be a inoj-e pleasing sight, thin to behold on a sunshiny day the 
 insects continually going forth to their labour, while others were as 
 constantly arriving at the mouth of the hole, either with yellow balls 
 of wax under their thighs, or full of the hcney which they had drawn 
 
COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 in with their trunks, for the puspose of spoutinj it out into the cells 
 of the honeycomb. Indur felt much delight in this useful and active 
 way of life, and was always one of the first abroad at dawn, and latest 
 home in the evening. On rainy and foggy days they stayed at home, 
 and employed themselves in finishing their cells, and all the necessary 
 work, within doors ; and Indur, though indued with human reason, 
 could not but admire the readiness with which he and the rest formed 
 the most regular plans of work, all corresponding in design and execu- 
 tion, guided by instinct alone. 
 
 The end of autumn now approaching, the bees had filled their 
 combs with honey ; and nothing moie being to be got abroad, they 
 stayed within doors, passing most of their time in sleep. They ate of 
 their provisions with great frugality ; and all their meals were made in 
 public, none daring to make free with the common stock by himself. 
 The owner of the hives now came and took them one by one into 
 his hands, that he might judge by the weight whether or not they 
 were full of honey. I'hat in which Indur was, proved to be one of 
 the heaviest; and it was therefore resolved to take the contents. For 
 this purpose, one cold night, when the bees were all fast asleep, the 
 hive was placed over a hole in the ground, in which were put brim- 
 stone matches set on fire. The fumes rose into the hive, and soon 
 suftbcated great part of the bees, and stupefied the rest, so that they all 
 fell from the combs. Indur was amongst the dead. 
 
 EXERCISE ex. 
 
 He soon revived in the form of a young rabbit in a spacious war- 
 ren. This was like a populous town ; being every where hollowed by 
 burrows running deep under ground, and each inhabited by one or 
 more families. In the evening the warren was covered with a vast 
 number of rabbits, old and young, some feeding, others frisking about, 
 ind pursuing one another in wanton sport. At the least alarm, they 
 all hurried into the holes nearest them ; and were in an instant safe 
 from enemies, who either could not enter their burrows, or could not 
 get at them there on account of the numerous ways and turnings in 
 the earth, communicating with each other, so as to afford easy means 
 of escape. Indur delighted much in this secure and social life ; and 
 'aking a mate, was soon the father of a numerous offspring. Several 
 of the little ones, however, not being sufficiently careful, fell a prav 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 835 
 
 either to hawks and crows, continually hovering over the warren, or 
 to cats, foxes, and other wild quadrupeds, which used every art to catch 
 them at a distance from their holes. Indur himself ran several ha- 
 zards. He was once very near being caught by a little dog trained 
 for the purpose, which kept playing round for a considerable time, not 
 seeming to attend to the rabbits, till having got near, he all at once 
 'darted into the midst of them. Another time he received some sho* 
 from a sportsman who lay on the watch behind the hedge adjoining 
 the warren. 
 
 The number of rabbits here was so great, that a hard winter coming 
 on, which killed most of the vegetables, or buried them deep under 
 the snow, they were reduced to great straits, and many were famished 
 to death. Some turnips and hay, however, which were laid for them, 
 preserved the greater part. The approach of spring renewed their 
 sport and pleasure ; and Indur was made the father of another family. 
 One night, however, was fatal to them all. As they were sleeping, 
 they were alarmed by the attack of a ferret ; and running with great 
 speed to the mouth of their burrow to escape it, they were all caught 
 in nets placed over their holes. Indur, with the rest, was despatched 
 by a blow on the back of the neck, and his body was sent to the 
 nearest market town. 
 
 EXERCISE CXI. 
 
 His next change was into a young mastiff, brought up in a farm- 
 yard. Having nearly acquired his full size, he was sent as a present 
 to a gentleman in the neighbourhood, who wanted a faithful guard 
 for his house and ground. Indur presently attached himself to his 
 master and all his family, and showed every mark of a noble and 
 generous nature. Though fierce as a lion whenever he thought the 
 persons or properties of his friends invaded, he was as gentle as a 
 lamb at other times, and would patiently suffer any kind of freedoms 
 from those he loved. He permitted the children of the house to lug 
 him about, ride on his back, and use him as roughly as their little 
 hands were capable of; never, even when hurt, showing his dis- 
 pleasure further than by a low growl. He was extremely indulgent 
 to all the other animals of his species in the yard ; and when abroad, 
 would treat the impertinent barking of little dogs with silent con- 
 15 
 
a26 COLLOrS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 
 
 tempt. Once, indeed, being provoked beyond bearing, not only by 
 the noise, but by the snaps of a malicious whelp, he suddenly seized 
 him in his open mouth ; but when the bystanders thought that the 
 poor cur was going instantly to be devoured, they were equally sur- 
 prised and diverted at seeing Indur go to the side of a muddy ditch, 
 and drop his antagonist unhurt into the middle of it 
 
 He had, however, more serious conflicts to sustain. He was ac- 
 customed to attend the servant on market days to the neighbouring 
 town ; when it was his office to guard the provision cart, while the 
 man was making his purchases in the shops. On these occasions, 
 the boldest dogs in the street would sometimes make an onset in a 
 body ; and while some of them were engaging Indur, others would be 
 mounting the cart, and pulling down the meat baskets. Indur had 
 much ado to defend himself and the provisions ; however, he never 
 fjiiled to make some of the assailants pay dcarlj for their impudence ; 
 and by his loud barking, he summoned to hv? assistance hts fellow- 
 servant, who came in time to prevent their «i?p*?r-dations. 
 
 EXERCISE CXII. 
 
 At length his courage was exerted on the most important service to 
 which it could be applied. His master, returning home at night, was 
 attacked near his own house by three armed rullisms. Indur heard 
 his voice calling for help, and instantly flew to his relief. He seized 
 one of the villains by the throat, brought him to the ground, and 
 presently disabled him. His master, in the mean thzo, was keeping 
 off the other two vsdth a large stick ; but had received several wounds 
 with a cutlass ; and one of the men had presented a plttol, and was 
 just on the point of firing. At this moment, Irv]ur, leasing his van- 
 quished foe on the ground, rushed forward, and seising the man's 
 arm, made him drop the pistol. The master took it up -; on which 
 the other robber fled. He now advanced to him with wham Indur 
 was engaged, and fired the pistol at him. The ball broke tl« man's 
 arm, and from thence entered the body of Indur, and mortally 
 wounded him. He fell, but had the satisfaction of seeing his master 
 remain lord of the field ; and the servants rww coming up, made 
 prisoners of the two wounded robbers^ The master threw himself by 
 the side of Indur, and expressed (he warmest concern at the accident 
 
GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 227 
 
 which had made him the cause of the death of the faithful animal 
 that had preserved his life. Indur died licking his hand. 
 
 So generous a nature was now no longer to be annexed to a brutal 
 form. Indur, awaking as it were from a dream, found himself again 
 in the happy region he had formerly inhabited, and recommenced the 
 •nocent life of a Brahmin. He cherished the memory of his trans- 
 migrations, and handed them down to posterity, in a relation from 
 whence the preceding account has been extracted. — Parbauld, 
 
 THJS BND. 
 
^^ 
 
 A 
 
 'su 
 
 
Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
 Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
 Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 
 
 PreservationTechnologies 
 
 A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 
 
 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
 Cranberry Townshp, PA 16066 
 
UBRARY OF CONGRESS 
 
 003113 435 3